sj-20100211152857-010-zxwn mscs (v3.09.21) msc server common configuration operation guide
DESCRIPTION
ZTETRANSCRIPT
ZXWN MSCSMSC Server
Common Configura-tion Operation Guide
Version 3.09.21
ZTE CORPORATIONNO. 55, Hi-tech Road South, ShenZhen, P.R.ChinaPostcode: 518057Tel: (86) 755 26771900Fax: (86) 755 26770801URL: http://ensupport.zte.com.cnE-mail: [email protected]
LEGAL INFORMATION
Copyright © 2010 ZTE CORPORATION.
The contents of this document are protected by copyright laws and international treaties. Any reproduction or distribution ofthis document or any portion of this document, in any form by any means, without the prior written consent of ZTE CORPO-RATION is prohibited. Additionally, the contents of this document are protected by contractual confidentiality obligations.
All company, brand and product names are trade or service marks, or registered trade or service marks, of ZTE CORPORATIONor of their respective owners.
This document is provided “as is”, and all express, implied, or statutory warranties, representations or conditions are dis-claimed, including without limitation any implied warranty of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, title or non-in-fringement. ZTE CORPORATION and its licensors shall not be liable for damages resulting from the use of or reliance on theinformation contained herein.
ZTE CORPORATION or its licensors may have current or pending intellectual property rights or applications covering the subjectmatter of this document. Except as expressly provided in any written license between ZTE CORPORATION and its licensee,the user of this document shall not acquire any license to the subject matter herein.
ZTE CORPORATION reserves the right to upgrade or make technical change to this product without further notice.
Users may visit ZTE technical support website http://ensupport.zte.com.cn to inquire related information.
The ultimate right to interpret this product resides in ZTE CORPORATION.
Revision History
Revision No. Revision Date Revision Reason
R1.0 Feb. 28, 2010 First edition
Serial Number: SJ-20100211152857-010
Contents
About This Manual............................................. I
Declaration of RoHS Compliance ....................... I
Data Making for New Commissioning ................1Overview....................................................................... 1
MGW Data Configuration ................................................. 1
Overview................................................................... 1
Interface Address Configuration.................................... 3
Overview .......................................................... 3
Creating a Loopback Interface ............................. 4
Creating an SIPI Interface Address....................... 5
Creating a Static Route ............................................... 7
Adjacent Office and Topology Configuration.................... 8
Overview .......................................................... 8
Creating an MGW Adjacent Office ......................... 9
Creating an MGW Voice CODEC Template .............14
Creating a Topology Node...................................15
Creating an Inter-MGW Bearer Mode ...................19
SIGTRAN Configuration ..............................................22
Overview .........................................................22
Creating an SCTP..............................................24
Creating an ASP................................................27
Creating an AS .................................................28
Creating an M3UA Static Route ...........................32
Creating the SIO-Locating-AS .............................33
H.248 Configuration...................................................35
Overview .........................................................35
Creating MGC Static Data...................................37
Creating an MGW Static Data Template ................38
Creating MGW Static Data ..................................40
Creating a TID Analyzer .....................................41
Creating a TID Analyzer Entry.............................43
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION I
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
HLR Data Configuration ..................................................44
Overview..................................................................44
Creating a HLR Adjacent Office....................................47
Signaling Data Configuration .......................................48
Creating a Signaling Link Set ..............................48
Creating an SPB-Accessed Signaling Link .............50
Creating a Signaling Route .................................53
Creating a Signaling Office .................................55
Creating IMSI Analysis ...............................................57
SCCP Data Configuration ............................................59
Creating GT Translation Selector .........................59
Creating GT Translation Data ..............................63
STP Data Configuration ..................................................69
Overview..................................................................69
Creating an STP Adjacent Office ..................................71
Signaling Data Configuration .......................................73
Creating a Signaling Link Set to the STP...............73
Creating a Signaling Link to the STP ....................75
Creating a Signaling Route to the STP..................78
Creating a Signaling Office to the STP..................79
Creating a GT Translation Data ....................................81
SCP Data Configuration (Destination Network)...................85
Overview..................................................................85
Creating a Signaling Subsystem ..................................87
Creating GT Translation Data.......................................89
Creating the CAMEL Configuration................................93
Recharge and Query Configuration...............................94
Creating CAMEL Access Subscription
Information...........................................94
Creating Called Number Analysis.........................97
Configuration Related to Intelligent Tone Play ................99
Creating Interconnection Conversion for Service
Keys................................................... 100
Creating Tone Keys on the MGW Tone Board ......... 102
SMC Data Configuration ............................................... 104
Overview................................................................ 104
Creating GT Translation Data..................................... 106
Modifying VLR-Supported Services ............................. 110
Modifying Mobile Data of Local Office.......................... 111
PSTN/2G MSC (M3UA) Data Configuration....................... 111
II Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Overview................................................................ 111
Creating 2G MSC/PSTN Adjacent Office....................... 113
Configuration Related to Trunk and Route ................... 115
Creating a DT Trunk Group ............................... 115
Creating a PCM System.................................... 119
Creating an Outgoing Route.............................. 121
Creating an Outgoing Route Set ........................ 122
Creating an Outgoing Route Link ....................... 123
SIGTRAN Configuration ............................................ 126
Creating an SCTP............................................ 126
Creating an ASP.............................................. 129
Creating an AS ............................................... 130
Creating an M3UA Static Route ......................... 133
Creating the SIO-Locating-AS ........................... 134
BSC Data Configuration ................................................ 137
Overview................................................................ 137
Office Direction and Topology Configuration................. 139
Creating a BSC Adjacent Office ......................... 139
Creating BSC Office Direction............................ 143
Creating a BSC Topology Node.......................... 145
Creating the Topology Relationship between BSC
and MGW............................................ 148
Trunk and PCM Configuration .................................... 150
Creating a DT Trunk Group ............................... 150
Creating a PCM System.................................... 157
SIGTRAN Configuration ............................................ 159
Creating an SCTP............................................ 159
Creating an ASP.............................................. 161
Creating an AS ............................................... 163
Creating an M3UA Static Route ......................... 165
Creating the SIO-Locating-AS ........................... 166
RNC Data Configuration................................................ 168
Overview................................................................ 168
Creating an RNC Adjacent Office................................ 170
Office Direction and Topology Configuration................. 174
Creating RNC Office Direction ........................... 174
Creating an RNC Topology Node ........................ 178
Creating the Topology Relationship between RNC
and MGW............................................ 181
Trunk and PCM Configuration .................................... 183
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION III
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Creating an ATM Trunk Group ........................... 183
Creating a PCM System.................................... 190
Access Data Configuration.............................193Overview.................................................................... 193
Creating Emergency Call Center .................................... 194
Special Serivce Configuration ........................................ 196
Creating a Special Service Phone Group...................... 196
Creating the Special Service Phone Called Number
Analysis ......................................................... 199
LAI and GCI/Service Area Configuration.......................... 201
Creating a LAI Controlled by the Local Office ............... 201
Creating an Adjacent LAI .......................................... 205
Creating a Global Cell............................................... 209
Creating a Service Area............................................ 211
Number Analysis Data Making.......................213Number Analysis ......................................................... 213
Number Analysis Configuration...................................... 218
Overview................................................................ 218
Creating a Number Analyzer Entry ............................. 218
Creating a DAS ....................................................... 221
Setting the Default DAS Template of the Local
Office............................................................. 223
Creating a DAS Template .......................................... 226
Creating the Called Number Analysis .......................... 230
Tone Configuration........................................257Creating MSCS Tones in Batches.................................... 257
Creating the Fixed Tone Play Data.................................. 258
Creating the Basic Service Tone Play Data....................... 265
Creating the Intelligent Service Tone Play Data................ 274
Figure............................................................283
Table .............................................................285
Index ............................................................289
IV Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
About This Manual
Purpose At first, thank you for choosing ZXWN wireless core network sys-tem of ZTE Corporation!
ZXWN system is the 3G mobile communication system developedbased on the UMTS technology. ZXWN system boasts powerfulservice processing capability in both CS domain and PS domain,providing more abundant service contents. Comparing with theGSM, ZXWN provides telecommunication services in wider range,capable of transmitting sound, data, graphics and other multi-me-dia services. In addition, ZXWN has higher speed and resource uti-lization rate. ZXWN wireless core network system supports both2G and 3G subscriber access, and provides various services re-lated with the 3G core network.
The ZXWN MSCS system is designed for the UMTS system at thecore network control level. It supports the GSM core network,UMTS protocols in the R99/R4/R5 stage and relevant functions atthe same time, and provides the carriers with an overall solutionto the evolution from the GSM core network to the 3GPP R99 andthen to the 3GPP R5.
The ZXWN MSCS system completes the functions of the MobileSwitching Center Server and the Visitor Location Register (VLR)together, and provides the Service Switching Point (SSP) functionsof intelligent calls. The ZXWN MSCS system supports the MGCFfunction, and the coexistence of the MGCF and GMSCS. It also cansmoothly upgrade to the MGCF.
This manual aims to help operators master the methods of com-mon data configuration of ZXWN MSCS.
IntendedAudience
This document is intended for engineers, technical and mainte-nance personnel who have mastered the principles of mobile net-work communications.
Prerequisite Skilland Knowledge
To use this document effectively, users should have a general un-derstanding of wireless telecommunications technology. Familiar-ity with the following is helpful:
� CS network and its network elements
� The basic knowledge, interfaces and protocols, and servicefunctions of ZXWN MSCS
What Is in ThisManual
This manual contains the following chapters:
Chapter Summary
Chapter 1, Data Makingfor New Commissioning
Introduces the procedure and method forcollecting and configuring interconnectiondata so as to add various offices on thesoft-switch equipment that is normallyrunning in the current network
Chapter 2, Access DataConfiguration
Introduces the procedure and method forconfiguring the location area and the celldata on the MSCS
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION I
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Chapter Summary
Chapter 3, NumberAnalysis Data Making
Introduces the procedure and methodfor configuring the number analysis datawhen the soft-switch equipment runs inthe current network normally
Chapter 4, ToneConfiguration
Introduces the procedure and method forconfiguring the tone resources and toneplay data
FCC ComplianceStatement
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation issubject to the following two conditions.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party re-sponsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operatethe equipment.
Conventions ZTE documents employ the following typographical conventions.
Typeface Meaning
Italics References to other Manuals and documents.
“Quotes” Links on screens.
Bold Menus, menu options, function names, input fields,radio button names, check boxes, drop-down lists,dialog box names, window names.
CAPS Keys on the keyboard and buttons on screens andcompany name.
Note: Provides additional information about a certaintopic.
Checkpoint: Indicates that a particular step needs tobe checked before proceeding further.
Tip: Indicates a suggestion or hint to make thingseasier or more productive for the reader.
Mouse operation conventions are listed as follows:
Typeface Meaning
Click Refers to clicking the primary mouse button (usually theleft mouse button) once.
Double-click
Refers to quickly clicking the primary mouse button(usually the left mouse button) twice.
Right-click Refers to clicking the secondary mouse button (usuallythe right mouse button) once.
II Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Declaration of RoHSCompliance
Tominimize the environmental impact and take more responsibilityto the earth we live, this document shall serve as formal declara-tion that ZXWN MSCS manufactured by ZTE CORPORATION are incompliance with the Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parlia-ment - RoHS (Restriction of Hazardous Substances) with respectto the following substances:
� Lead (Pb)
� Mercury (Hg)
� Cadmium (Cd)
� Hexavalent Chromium (Cr (VI))
� PolyBrominated Biphenyls (PBB’s)
� PolyBrominated Diphenyl Ethers (PBDE’s)
…
The ZXWN MSCS manufactured by ZTE CORPORATION meetthe requirements of EU 2002/95/EC; however, some assembliesare customized to client specifications. Addition of specialized,customer-specified materials or processes which do not meet therequirements of EU 2002/95/EC may negate RoHS compliance of theassembly. To guarantee compliance of the assembly, the need forcompliant product must be communicated to ZTE CORPORATION inwritten form. This declaration is issued based on our current levelof knowledge. Since conditions of use are outside our control, ZTECORPORATION makes no warranties, express or implied, and assumesno liability in connection with the use of this information.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION I
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
This page is intentionally blank.
II Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
C h a p t e r 1
Data Making for NewCommissioning
Table of ContentsOverview........................................................................... 1MGW Data Configuration ..................................................... 1HLR Data Configuration ......................................................44STP Data Configuration ......................................................69SCP Data Configuration (Destination Network).......................85SMC Data Configuration ................................................... 104PSTN/2G MSC (M3UA) Data Configuration........................... 111BSC Data Configuration.................................................... 137RNC Data Configuration.................................................... 168
OverviewDescription This chapter introduces the procedure and method of collecting
and making interconnection data so as to add various office direc-tions on the ZXWN MSCS equipment.
MGW Data ConfigurationOverview
TypicalNetworking
Mc interface is the interface between MSCS and MGW. The net-working structure is shown in Figure 1.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 1
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
FIGURE 1 NETWORKING BETWEEN MSCS AND MGW
The Mc interface usually uses the IP bearer. Its protocol stack usesthe H.248/M3UA/SCTP/IP mode.
Data Collection Collect the data related to the Mc interface before data configura-tion, as described in Table 1.
TABLE 1 DATA COLLECTION TABLE
Parameter Items Parameter Values
Real address of the MSCS 192.168.1.11
Loopback address of the MSCS 192.168.11.11
Port number of the MSCS 2001
Real address of the MGW 192.168.1.31
Loopback address of the MGW 192.168.31.31
Port number of the MGW 2001
Coding scheme of H.248 protocol TEXT
MSCS signaling point code 1.11.2
MGW signaling point code 1.31.2
ConfigurationFlow
This configuration aims to complete the interconnection betweenthe MSCS and the MGW over the Mc interface so as to achieve themanagement and control over the media resources of the MGW.Table 2 describes the configuration flow.
2 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
TABLE 2 CONFIGURATION FLOW
Steps Operations Related Command
1 Creating a loop-back interfaceINTERFACELOOPBACK
ADD IP ADDRESS
2 Creating an SIPI interfaceaddress
INTERFACE
ADD IP ADDRESS
3 Creating a static route ADD IP ROUTE
4 Creating an MGW adjacentoffice ADD ADJOFC
5 Creating an MGW voiceCODEC template ADD CODECTPL
6 Creating a topology node ADD TOPO
7 Creating an inter-MGW bearermode ADD MGWBEARMOD
8 Creating an SCTP ADD SCTPCONN
9 Creating an ASP ADD ASP
10 Creating an AS ADD AS
11 Creating an M3UA static route ADD M3UART
12 Creating the SIO-locating-AS ADD SIOLOCAS
13 Creating MGC static data ADD MGCSCFG
14 Creating an MGW static datatemplate ADD MGSTPL
15 Creating MGW static data ADD MGSCFG
16 Creating a TID analyzer ADD TIDANL
17 Creating a TID analyzer entry ADD TIDENTR
Interface Address Configuration
Overview
Introduction Interface IP addresses are planned according to the actual net-working applications. The IP address of Nc, Iu-CS and other in-terfaces can be configuration independently, or share with the Mcinterface address.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 3
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Creating a Loopback Interface
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The RPUmodule configuration is completed, and the RPU worksnormally.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Creating the loopback interface means creating the service ad-dress on the RPU loopback port. Since the service address of Mcinterface can use ports 1 and 2, it is recommended that each portis configured with one IP address.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the RPU loop back interface. The command is INTERFACE LOOPBACK.
Port represents the port number, ranging from 1 to 128.
Example: Create the loop-back interface whose port numberis 1.
The command is as follows.
INTERFACE LOOPBACK:PORT=1;
3. Create the interface address. The command is ADD IP ADDRESS.
Table 3 describes the main parameters in the ADD IP AD-DRESS command.
TABLE 3 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD IP ADDRESS COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
ADDRESS IP addressIt is a mandatory parameter.The IP address of theloop-back address.
MASK MaskIt is a mandatory parameterof 32-bit. In general, it is255.255.255.255.
BROADCASTIP Broadcast IPaddress
It is an optional parameter. Ingeneral, it is 255.255.255.255.
Example: Create a loop back address with the following re-quirements.
� IP address: 192.168.11.11
� Subnet mask: 255.255.255.255.
The command is as follows.
4 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ADD IP ADDRESS:ADDRESS="192.168.11.11",MASK="255.255.255.255",BROADCASTIP="255.255.255.255";
4. Save the online configured data. Otherwise, these will losswhen the RPU is restarted.The command is SAVE ONLINEDATA;.
5. Exit the interface configuration mode. The command is EXIT;
END OF STEPS
Creating an SIPI Interface Address
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The SIPI unit is created.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context MSCS is interconnected to MGW on the CE through its SIPI board.The online configuration of SIPI board interface is to assign an IPaddress to some physical port of this SIPI board.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Enter the SIPI board interface configuration mode. The com-mand is INTERFACE.
Table 4 describes the main parameters in the INTERFACEcommand.
TABLE 4 INTERFACE REAL INTERFACE
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
SUBSYS-TEM Subsystem ID It is a mandatory parameter.
Select the default value 0.
MODULE Module No. It is a mandatory parameter.Select the default value 1.
UNIT Unit No.
It is a mandatory parameter. Itis the unit number of the realinterface. Select the unit numberof the board corresponded by theinterface.
SUNIT Subunit NoIt is a mandatory parameter. Realinterface’s sub-unit number fixedlyadopts 1.
PORT Port number
It is a mandatory parameter. Theport number refers to the networkinterface serial number of theSIPI rear board for connecting tothe external. The four network
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 5
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
interfaces are numbered 1 to 4from top to bottom. Only the firstport is used.
Example: Create the interface address of SIPI board. The con-figuration requirements are as follows.
� Unit number: 321
� Sub-unit number: 1
� Port number: 1
� Home module number: No.1 OMP module.
The command is as follows.
INTERFACE:SUBSYSTEM=0,MODULE=1,UNIT=321,SUNIT=1,PORT=1;
3. Create the interface address of the SIPI. The command is ADDIP ADDRESS.
Table 5 describes the main parameters in the ADD IP ADDRESS command.
TABLE 5 ADD IP ADDRESS REAL INTERFACE
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
ADDRESS IP addressIt is a mandatory parameter.The Mc interface address of SIPIboard
MASK Subnet maskIt is a mandatory parameter. Thereal interface subnet address ofcorresponding interface board
BROADCAS-TIP
Broadcast IPaddress
It is an optional parameter,corresponding to the broadcastaddress of the real address of thecorresponding interface board.
Example: The configured parameters are as follows.
� IP address: 192.168.1.11
� Subnet mask: 255.255.255.248
� Broadcast address: 255.255.255.255.
The command is as follows.
ADD IP ADDRESS:ADDRESS="192.168.1.11",MASK="255.255.255.248",BROADCASTIP="255.255.255.255";
4. Save the online configured data. Otherwise, these will losswhen the RPU is restarted.The command is SAVE ONLINEDATA;.
6 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
5. Exit the interface configuration mode. The command is EXIT;
END OF STEPS
Creating a Static Route
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The interface address is created.
� The BFD parameters are created when load-sharing networkingmode is adopted.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Static route is created when the service IP address of local sig-naling plane and PE interface address are not in the same net-work section. Under the active/standby working mode, a destina-tion address needs to be configured with a route only. Under theload-sharing working mode, a destination address usually needsto be configured with two routes.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the static route. The command is ADD IP ROUTE.
Table 6 describes the parameters in the ADD IP ROUTE com-mand.
TABLE 6 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD IP ROUTE COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
NETPRE Net prefix
MASK Mask
It is a mandatory parameter.Type the network section of theopposite-end equipment serviceaddress according to the networkplanning. Its prefix should matchits mask
NEXTHOP Next hop IP
It is an optional parameter,indicating the router interfaceaddress (VRRP address). Type thegateway address to the oppositeend office
DISTANCE Distance It is an optional parameter with adefault of 1, ranging from 1 to 254
BFDDETECT Enable BFDDetect
It is an optional parameter. Ingeneral, select NO. The settingEnable BFD Detect is effectiveonly when IP address acts as thenext hop.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 7
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Example: Create the static route to the opposite end with thefollowing requirements.
� Working mode: active/standby mode
� Service address of the opposite equipment: 11.11.11.11
� Mask: 255.255.255.0
� Next hop IP: 10.0.74.1.
The command is as follows:
ADD IP ROUTE:NETPRE="11.11.11.11",MASK="255.255.255.0",NEXTHOP="10.0.74.1",DISTANCE=1,BFDDETECT=NO;
Example: Create two static routes to the opposite end with thefollowing requirements.
� Working mode: load-sharing mode
� Service address of the opposite equipment: 11.11.11.11
� Mask: 255.255.255.0
� Next hop IP: 10.0.74.1 and 10.0.74.2.
The command is as follows:
ADD IP ROUTE:NETPRE="11.11.11.11",MASK="255.255.255.0",NEXTHOP="10.0.74.1",DISTANCE=1,BFDDETECT=NO;
ADD IP ROUTE:NETPRE="11.11.11.11",MASK="255.255.255.0",NEXTHOP="10.0.74.2",DISTANCE=1,BFDDETECT=NO;
END OF STEPS
Adjacent Office and TopologyConfiguration
Overview
Introduction Adjacent office configuration means configuring the neighboringoffice of the local office. There are two association modes, directassociation and quasi-association.
If the adjacent office is regarded as a node in the whole networktopology when the local office is in the center, topological nodeconfiguration means adding the topological node of its adjacentoffice in the local office. The topological nodes configured on MSCSinclude MGW, RNC/BSC, and MSCS (Nc).
8 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ConfigurationFlow Steps Operations Instructions Command
1 Creating an MGWadjacent office
Create the ba-sic information ofMGW adjacent of-fice.
ADD ADJOFC
2Creating an MGWvoice CODEC tem-plate
Create the encod-ing and decodingspeech type mod-ules supported byIM-MGW.
ADD CODECTPL
3 Creating a topol-ogy node
Create the topol-ogy relationshipbetween MGCFnode and IM-MGWnode.
ADD TOPO
4Creating inter-MGW bear mode(optional)
The inter-MGWbearer mode isconfigured whenthe Nb interfacesbetween severalIM-MGWs underthe same MGCFare connected.
ADD MGWBEARMOD
Creating an MGW Adjacent Office
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The physical IP connection between the MSCS and the MGWis clear, which is implemented by the connection between theFE1 interfaces on the rear board of the SIPI boards of thesetwo NEs.
� The signaling interworking data is planned and negotiated.
� The basic configuration of the local office is completed.
� The range of adjacent office number is configured in the re-source management.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Perform this procedure to configure the basic information of MGWadjacent office. On the MSCS, each MGW is configured with threeadjacent offices according to the SCTP Planning.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the MGW adjacent office. The command is ADD ADJOFC.
Table 7 describes the main parameters in the ADD ADJOFCcommand.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 9
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
TABLE 7 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD ADJOFC COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
ID Office ID
A mandatory parameter,indicating the identificationnumber of the adjacentoffice, and ranging from1 to 3000. In general,it is configured as theexchange ID of theadjacent office during theall-network planning
NAME User-defined aliasIt is a mandatoryparameter. Type acustomized name.
NET Network type
A mandatory parameter,indicating the networktype of the SPC used forconnecting the local officeto the adjacent officewhen the local office isconfigured with severalSPs. The default is thenetwork type of this SPwhen there is only one SPin the local office
OFCTYPE The type of adjacentoffice
It is a mandatoryparameter. Select MGWfor the MGW bearing H248signaling. Select SGW foranother two MGW offices.
SPCFMT SPC format Select TRIPLE_DEC.
SPCTYPE SPC type
DPC Destination SPC
It is a mandatoryparameter. Select itbased on the SPC typeof the adjacent officeaccording to the signalingpoint planning. In China,all the NEs adopt the 24-bitSPC except the BSC thatadopts the 14-bit SPC.
RC Area code
It is an optional parameter,indicating the local tollzone code of the adjacentoffice. This parameterhas impact on the areacode added by the callingnumber
10 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
ASSOTYPE
Association type,including:
� AM_SURE (directconnection mode)
� AM_QUASI (halfdirect connectionmode)
� AM_NONE (noneconnection mode).
It is an optional parameter.Select AM_SURE
SPTYPESignaling point type,including SEP, STP,and STEP
It is an optional parameter.Select SEP (signalingend point) for the MGWbearing H248 signaling.Select STEP (signalingtransition / end point) foranother two MGW offices
SSF
Subservice function,including
� INTERNATIONAL(Internationalsignaling pointcode)
� INTERNATIONALSTANDBY(Internationalstandby signalingpoint code)
� NATIONAL(National signalingpoint code)
� NATIONALSTANDBY(National standbysignaling pointcode).
It is an optional parameter.
In general, NATIONALis selected at home. Forthe BSC adjacent office,NATIONAL STANDBY isselected.
TAG
Office Attribute,including:
ISNI (Has ISNIFunction)
TRANS (TranslateNode)
TEST (Need TestInfo:0X02/0X01)
It is an optional parameter
TEST Test flag
It is an optional parameter.It is used to set whetherthe MTP3 link activelyinitiates the link testafter entering the servicestatus. In most cases, thisparameter is selected.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 11
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
BANDFLAG Broadband attribute
It is an optional parameterwith a default of NO. Itis used for SCCP to judgewhether to use the LUDTmessage.
The maximum length of abroadband link messageis 4,000, and that of anarrowband link messageis 255. Because the MTPlayer does not have thesegmentation function, theincorrect configuration ofthis parameter probablycauses the long packet tobe discarded.
Select this parameterwhen all the links betweentwo SPs are SIGTRAN orATM signaling links.
PRTCTYPE
Protocol Type,including:
� CHINA (China)
� ITU (InternationalTelecommunica-tions Union)
� ANSI (AmericanNational StandardsInstitute)
It is an optional parameter.The CHINA and the ITUare used for the NO.7signaling networking ofthe ITU standard and theANSI is used for the NO.7signaling networking ofthe American standard.In general, select CHINAfor the domestic officeand select ITU for theinternational office
CLST Cluster ID
It is an optional parameterwithin 0~65535. Ingeneral, select the defaultvalue 65535. It is validwhen the protocol typeof the adjacent office is“ANSI”. The signaling pointconnected to the signalingtransfer point belongs tothe corresponding cluster
INFO
Office Info, including:
� CIC_PCM (CICstarts the loadsharing accordingto the PCM codemode)
� BLOCK (Manualblock status)
� EVEN_CIC (Theoffice controlsthe even CICwhen CIC resourcecontention occurs)
It is an optional parameterand the default value isCIC_PCM
12 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
� CALLING(Callingtransform isallowed)
� CALLED (Calledtransform isallowed)
� MOD24_CIC (CICmode with 24mode)
� TEST (Dynamictest)
RELATE-DOFC1 Related Office ID It is an optional parameter
ranging from 0 to 3000
INFOEX
Office Extend Info,including:
� SIGBRDCST(Support SignalingBroadcastMessage)
� MTP (HongkongMTP Standard)
� DUPU ( ScreenDUPU message)
� SUA_REC_DT1(Receive SUAmessage andhandle it as DT1message)
� SUA_SND_DT1(Send SUAmessage andhandle it as DT1message withoutSN.)
� OPEN_TG_RES(Open outter trunkgroup resource)
It is an optional parameter
For example, create MGW adjacent office. The office ID is 101,the alias is MGW1, and the destination SPC is 1.31.2. For otherparameters, adopt the default value. The command is as fol-lows:
ADD ADJOFC:ID=101,NAME="MGW1",NET=3,OFCTYPE=MGW,SPCFMT=TRIPLE_DEC,SPCTYPE=14,DPC="1.31.2",RC="25",ASSOTYPE=AM_SURE,SPTYPE=SEP,SSF=NATIONAL STANDBY,SUBPROTTYPE=DEFAULT,TEST=YES,BANDFLAG=YES,PRTCTYPE=CHINA,CLST=65535,INFO="CIC_PCM",RELATEDOFC1=0;
END OF STEPS
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 13
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Creating an MGW Voice CODEC Template
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The basic configuration of the local office is completed.
� The range of the MGW voice CODEC template numbers is con-figured in the resource management configuration.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Perform this procedure to create the encoding and decodingspeech type modules supported by MGW. In general, MSCS isconfigured with a default common voice CODEC template.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the MGW voice CODEC template. The command is ADDCODECTPL.
Table 8 describes the main parameters in the ADD CODECTPLcommand.
TABLE 8 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD CODECTPL COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
ID Templatenumber
It is a mandatory parameterfor defining an encoding anddecoding speech template,ranging from 1 to 255.
GRPIDThe groupnumber of thespeech coding.
It is a mandatory parameter forspecifying the OID format andencoding and decoding type list.Up to eight types can be definedin an encoding and decodingtemplate.
VALFG
Valid option,including YES(valid) and NO(invalid)
It is a mandatory parameter forsetting whether this encodingand decoding speech template isvalid. Select YES
OID OID
It is a mandatory parameter forspecify an Organization Identifier(OID).
It has the following parameters.
� OID_NONE: No OID
� OID_ITU_T: ITU_T
� OID_ETSI: ETSI
� OID_IETF: IETF
14 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
ITYPE ITU_T CODECtype.
It is an optional parameter. Ingeneral, ITUT_G711A_64 isselected.
ETYPE ETSI CODECtype
It is an optional parameter. Ingeneral, ETSI_UMTS_AMRand ETSI_UMTS_AMR_2 areselected.
ACTRATE ActivatedCODEC rate
It is an optional parameter. Ingeneral, the default value isselected
SUPRATE SupportedCODEC rate
It is an optional parameter. Ingeneral, the default value isselected
OM ACS optimizedmode
It is an optional parameter. Ingeneral, the default value isselected
Example: Configure an MGW encoding and decoding speechtemplate with the following requirements.
� Template ID: 1
� CODEC group number: 1
� Valid option: YES
� OID: ETSI
� ETSI CODEC type: ETSI_UMTS_AMR2
� Activated CODEC rate: 5.90 K and 6.70 K
� Supported CODEC rate: 5.90 K and 6.70 K
� ACS optimize mode: Yes.
ADD CODECTPL:ID=1,GRPID=GRPID1,VALFG=YES,OID=OID_ETSI,ETYPE=ETSI_UMTS_AMR_2,ACTRATE="Rate590"&"Rate670",SUPRATE="Rate590"&"Rate670",OM=YES;
END OF STEPS
Creating a Topology Node
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The encoding and decoding speech template is configured.
� The range of the topological node number is configured in theresource management.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Perform this procedure to configure the topology relationshipbetween MSCS node and MGW node. This command is used toconfigure the adjacent NE information, including equipment type,
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 15
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
bearer type and attributes, user plane version, encoding anddecoding template, and other information.
For Mc interface, only the adjacent office bearing H.248 protocolis configured as a topological node.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create an MGW topology node. The command is ADD TOPO.
Table 9 describes the main parameters in the ADD TOPO com-mand.
TABLE 9 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TOPO COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
ID Topological nodeID
It is a mandatory parameter todefine ID of this node, rangingfrom 1 to 2,048.
It is recommended that the IDand office No. of a topologicalnode are consistent
OFCID Office ID
It is a mandatory parameterfor specifying the office ID ofthis topological node. Thisparameter must be defined bythe ADD ADJOFC commandfirst.
In this case, type the actualMGW office number
NAME Alias
It is a mandatory parameterfor naming this topologicalnode, with a length rangingfrom 1 to 50 characters.
CODECID CODEC identity
It is a mandatory parameterfor specify the CODECtemplate used by thistopological node. Thisparameter must be definedby the ADD CODECTPLcommand first.
ETYPE Equipment type
This parameter is used tospecify the NE type of thistopological node.
Select R4GW for an MGWnode
PROTTYPE Protocol type Select H.248 for Mc interface.
16 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
IPVER IP version of thenode
It is the IP protocol versionsupported between nodes.Select IPV4 or IPV6according to the actualconditions. Currently, IPV4 issupported.
ATTR Bearer attributes
This parameter is only validfor the node with the typeof R4GW (MGW). The bearertypes supported by MGWare BNCAAL1, BNCAAL2,BNCAAL1S, BNCIPRTP, andBNCTDM. MGW can supportone or more of these types ofbearers.
In general, select BNCAAL2,BNCIPRTP, and BNCTDM
UPVERUser planeprotocol versionof RNC or MGW
This parameter is used to setthe user plane version of thisnode.
In general, select V2
ATTR2
Extendedattributes (tunnelmode), including:
� NOTUNL(None tunnelmode)
� RTUNL(Rapid tunnelmode)
� DTUNL(Delay tunnelmode)
This parameter is used to setwhich tunnel mode is adoptedfor bearer establishment whenthis node supports the IP/RTPbearer. The default value isNOTUNL (None tunnel mode).
In general, select DTUNL(Delay tunnel mode) for anMGW topological node.
TRFMOD
Signaling transfermode, including:
MCINTF (Mcinterface signaltransfer mode)
This parameter is used to setwhich mode is used by thetopology for reporting whenit detects CNG or CED faxsignals.
The default value is MCINTF
UPERRCTRL
Error SDUcontrol, includingoptions:
YES: The userplane entity im-plements errorinspection, andsets the FQC bitposition accord-ing to the result.It will transmitall frames in-cludes the errorframes to theuser plane layer.
This parameter regulates thehandling method of the userplane for error frames. It isonly valid for MGW-type andRNC-type topological node.The default value is YES
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 17
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
During a call, theerror packet con-trol parameterdelerrsdu=Yes,which is deliveredby the terminalestablished byMGW on the Mcinterface. Theerror packet con-trol parameterdeliveryOfErro-neousSDU is YES,NA, NA duringRAB assignment.
NO: The userplane entity im-plements theerror inspection.It will directlydiscard the errorframe. Duringa call, the er-ror packet con-trol parameterdelerrsdu=No,which is deliveredby the terminalestablished byMGW on the Mcinterface. Theerror packet con-trol parameterdeliveryOfErro-neousSDU is NO,NA, NA duringRAB assignment.
INVALIDTION:The user planeentity does notimplement theerror inspection.During a call, theerror packet con-trol parameterdelerrsdu=NA,which is deliveredby the terminalestablished byMGW on the Mcinterface. Theerror packet con-trol parameterdeliveryOfErro-neousSDU is NA,NA, NA duringRAB assignment.
18 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
DTMFTC
Tandem officesend DTMFuse TC mode,including twooptions:
� NO
� YES
This parameter is used to setwhether the tandem officeuses the TC resources duringDTMF number delivery.
The default value is NO
MGWCONMGW congestionreportingcapability
It contains the followingoptions.
� SMGWCON (StandardMGW congestion event)
� CMGWCON (Custom MGWcongestion event).
The default value isSMGWCON.
Example: Create a topology node with the following require-ments.
� MGW office ID: 101
� Equipment type: R4 gateway
� Protocol type: H248
� Supported user plane protocol version: V2
� CODEC ID: 1.
The specific command is as follows.
ADD TOPO:ID=101,OFCID=101,NAME="MGW101",CODECID=1,ETYPE=R4GW,PROTTYPE=H248,IPVER=IPV4,ATTR="BNCAAL2"&"BNCIPRTP"&"BNCTDM",UPVER="V2",ATTR2=DTUNL,TRFMOD=MCINTF,UPERRCTRL=YES,DTMFTC=NO,MGWCON=SMGWCON,AUTOFAX=YES,OOBTC=NO,BCUID=0,SENDCAP=NO,G711TRAN=NO,BICCDTMF=TRANSPARENT,IPBCP2833=BYMGW,BICCDTMPPER=0,AOIPPRO=PRIVATE;
END OF STEPS
Creating an Inter-MGW Bearer Mode
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The MGW topological node is created.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context The inter-MGW bearer mode is configured when the Nb interfacesbetween several MGWs under the same MSCS are connected.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 19
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the inter-MGW bearer mode. The command is ADDMGWBEARMOD.
Table 10 describes the main parameters in the ADD MGWBEARMOD command.
TABLE 10 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD MGWBEARMOD COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
MGWPAIR MGW node pairType the gateway node IDconfigured in the topologicalnode configuration.
ATTR
Bearer attributebetween MGWs,the optionsinclude:
AAL1(supportbncAAL1)
AAL2(supportbncAAL2)
AAL1S (supportnbcAAL1Struct)
RTP (supportbncIPRTP)
TDM(supportbncTDM)
The parameter specifies thebearer attribute betweenMGWs. Select RTP or TDMaccording to the type of Nbinterface bearer.
CTYPE
Type of tone codebetween MGWs,the optionsincluding:
GENERAL
AMRONLY
AMRONLY represents the AMRencoding and decoding modeis used only. When G.711 andother encoding and decodingmodes are allowed, selectGENERAL
NAME Alias“Adjacent office alias ofgateway 1-Adjacent office aliasof gateway 21”
AAL1 AAL1 bearer typerate(%)
The parameter specifies therate (%) of the AAL1 bearerbetween two gateways
AAL2 AAL2 bearer typerate(%)
The parameter specifies therate (%) of the AAL2 bearerbetween two gateways
AAL1SAAL1STRUCTbearer typerate(%)
The parameter specifies therate (%) of the AAL1 STRUCTbearer between two gateways
RTP IPRTP bearer typerate(%)
The parameter specifies therate (%) of the IPRTP bearerbetween two gateways
20 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
TDM TDM bearer typerate(%)
The parameter specifies therate (%) of the TDM bearerbetween two gateways
DIRECT
Top-priority directlink topology, theoptions include:
NO
YES
The default is NO
UPMODE
User plane modefor multi-gatewayIP bearer, theoptions include:
TRANSPAR-ENT(transparentmode)
SUPPORT(supportmode)
The default is TRANSPARENT
IPNET Public IP networkdomain index
The parameter is used to setthe public IP network domainindex (ADD IPDOMAIN)
G711TRAN
G711 that isforced to usethe transparentmode. Optionsinclude:
NO
YES
The default is NO
Example: Configure the bearer mode between two MGWs withthe following requirements.
� MGW 1 node ID: 101
� MGW 2 node ID: 201
� Bearer mode: RTP
� Type of tone code between MGWS: AMRONLY
� Supported version: V2
� Alias: MGW101-MGW201
� Other parameters: default value.
The specific command is as follows.
ADD MGWBEARMOD:MGWPAIR="101"-"201",ATTR="RTP",NAME="MGW101-MGW201",CTYPE=AMRONLY,AAL1=0,AAL2=0,AAL1S=0,RTP=100,TDM=0,DIRECT=NO,UPMODE=TRANSPARENT,G711TRAN=NO;
END OF STEPS
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 21
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
SIGTRAN Configuration
Overview
Description SINGTRAN-related configuration is required not only by the Mcinterface between MSCS and MGW, but also by the Nc interfacebetween MSCS and other direct-associated office over IP.
When the SCTP bears the M3UA protocol, configuring SCTP, ASP,AS, M3UA static route and SIO-locating-AS is required.
When the SCTP bears H248 protocol, configuring SCTP is requiredonly. In general, this mode is not used.
Compared with the MTP data configuration of the traditional No.7signaling, the SCTP association configuration and the ASP config-uration of the M3UA are similar to the link logic and bearer infor-mation configurations in the MTP configuration, and the AS config-uration of the M3UA is similar to the link set configuration in theMTP configuration. The configuration of SIO location AS is similarto the signaling office direction and route configuration in the MTPconfiguration. The only difference between them is that one pieceof SIO location AS configuration record is configured the IP routeto a subscriber of an office.
22 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ConfigurationFlow
Figure 2 shows the flow of SIGTRAN configuration.
FIGURE 2 SIGTRAN CONFIGURATION FLOW
According to the rules regulated in SCTP Planning, perform theconfiguration by following the procedure specified below.
Steps Operations Instructions Command
1 Creating SCTP Create an associationbetween two offices ADD SCTPCONN
2 Creating ASP
Create the one-to-one relationshipbetween the ASP andthe association. ASPis one of instances ofAS.
ADD ASP
3 Creating ASCreate the tag, usertype, subsystem typeof AS
ADD AS
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 23
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Steps Operations Instructions Command
4 Creating M3UAstatic route
Create the mappingrelationship betweenthe M3UA static routeand the AS.
ADD M3UART
5Creatingthe SIO-Locating-AS
Locate one service toa routing table thatis maintained by theASP under the AS.
ADD SIOLOCAS
Creating an SCTP
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The physical configuration of the SMP module is completed.
� The SCTP flag is configured in the resource management.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context The SCTP connection is called as association, which is of one-to-one correspondence with ASP. It can be equivalent to the com-munication link used by the AS. An SMP can support up to 128associations. When multiple BCTC shelves are configured, associ-ations must share the load in each shelf.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the SCTP connection. The command is ADD SCTPCONN.
Table 11 describes the chief parameters of the ADD SCTPCONN command.
TABLE 11 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD SCTPCONN COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
MODULE Module No.
It is a mandatoryparameter, indicatingthe number of thesignaling modulehomed by this SCTPassociation. Select theSMP module number.Each SMP can supportup to 128 associations.The associations underthe same AS arerequired sharing loadon SMP modules asmore as possible.
24 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
OFCID SCTP opposite officeID
It is a mandatoryparameter, designatingthe office No. ofthe direct-associatedassociation. Typethe MGW adjacentoffice No. specifiedin the adjacent officeconfiguration.
PROT
Bearer protocoltypes, including
� M2UA
� M2PA
� M3UA
� SUA
� H248
� BICC
� IUA
� DHCTRL
� SIP
� DIM
� V5UA
� H245
It is a mandatoryparameter. It is used toidentify the upper-layerprotocol type borne bythe SCTP association.In general, M3UA isselected. M2UA isselected when MGWtransfers the signalingwith the M2UA mode.
ROLE
SCTP applicationattributes. Optionsinclude:
SVR: SCTP is usedas server
CLT: SCTP is used asclient
It is a mandatoryparameter. For Mcinterface, MSCS isconfigured as CLT, andMGW is configuredas SVR. For Ncinterface, this shouldbe negotiated by bothsides. For example, thesmall signaling pointserves as CLT, andthe big signaling pointserves as SVR
LOCADDR Local IP address
It is a mandatoryparameter. Itdesignates the serviceaddress of local endof this association,with a format ofLocal IP addresstype-VPN of localIP address-Local IPaddress
Local IP address type:IPv4 and IPv6
VPN of local IP address:Rang from 0 to 65535
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 25
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
Local IP address:the format isxxx.yyy.zzz.mmm
LOCPORT Local port number
It is a mandatoryparameter. It is thelocal SCTP port numberof the association,ranging from 1 to65535.
REMADDR Opposite IP address
It is a mandatoryparameter. Itdesignates the serviceaddress of remote endof this association,with a format ofRemote IP addresstype-VPN of remoteIP address-RemoteIP address
Remote IP addresstype: IPv4 and IPv6;
VPN of remote IPaddress: Rang from 0to 65535
Remote IP address:the format isxxx.yyy.zzz.mmm
REMPORT Opposite portnumber
It is a mandatoryparameter. It isthe opposite SCTPport number of theassociation, rangingfrom 1 to 65535.
NAME Alias
It is a mandatoryparameter with alength ranging from 1to 50 characters.
ID SCTP ID
It is an optionalparameter. It is theglobal serial number ofthe SCTP association,ranging from 1 to 2048.Configure it accordingto the associationplanning.
Example: Create the SCTP connection for the Mc interface withthe following requirements.
� MGW office ID: 101
� Bearer protocol: M3UA
� Application attribute: CLT
� SCTP signaling processing module number: 3
26 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
� Local port number: 2001
� Opposite port number: 2001
� Local IP address: 192.168.1.11
� Opposite IP address: 192.168.1.31
� SCTP association ID: 1
� Other parameters: default value.
The command is as follows.
ADD SCTPCONN:MODULE=3,OFCID=101,PROT=M3UA,ROLE=CLT,LOCADDR="IPv4"-"0"-"192.168.1.11",LOCPORT=2001,REMADDR="IPv4"-"0"-"192.168.1.31",REMPORT=2001,NAME="MGW101-1",ID=1,INSTRM=16,OUTSTRM=16,MAXRTRY=5,MAXRTO=500,MINRTO=50,INITRTO=100,HB=500,FIXNH=NO,SCTPMAXRTRYNUM=10,DELAYACK=20,MAXBURST=4,PRIMARYPATH=REMIP1,PMTU=0,BREAKTIME=0,PDTHRESH=0,MINCWND=0,PLTIMER=10,MPPLTHRD=2,DPLEN=MTU,CB=200;
END OF STEPS
Creating an ASP
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The SCTP association information configuration is completed.
� The range of the ASP configuration identification is created inthe resource management configuration.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Perform this procedure to define the one-to-one relationship be-tween the ASP and the association. ASP is one of instances of AS.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the ASP. The command is ADD ASP.
Table 12 describes the main parameters in the ADD ASP com-mand.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 27
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
TABLE 12 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD ASP COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
ASSOCID SCTP ID
It is a mandatory parameter,ranging from 1 to 2048
Type the association IDconfigured in the SCTPconnection configuration.
NAME Alias
It is a mandatory parameter,with a lengthen ranging from1 to 50 characters. It maybe named with a format of“Adjacent office alias-SCTPnumber”.
ID ASP ID
It is an optional parameter,ranging from 1 to 2048.
It is recommended to beconsistent with ASSOCID.
ISLOOP ASP self-loop ID
It is an optional parameter. It isused to set whether the ASP isself-looped.
Select the default value NO
ISLOCK ASP blocking flag
It is an optional parameter. It isused set whether the ASP is inblocking state.
Blocking is used formanagement. Select thedefault value NO
Example: Create the ASP between MSCS and MGW for Mc in-terface with the following requirements.
� MGW office ID: 101
� SCTP association ID: 1
� ASP configuration ID: 1
� User alias: MGW101-1.
The command is as follows.
ADD ASP:ASSOCID=1,NAME="MGW101-1",ID=1,ISLOOP=NO,ISLOCK=NO;
END OF STEPS
Creating an AS
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The ASP configuration is finished.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
28 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
Context The AS provides the transmission channels for upper-layer ser-vices. For example, H248 and TUP/UP are different services. Theyuse different AS for transmission. The AS can use one or moreassociations for communication.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the AS. The command is ADD AS.
Table 13 describes the main parameters in the ADD AS com-mand.
TABLE 13 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD AS COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
PROTSupportedadaptation layerprotocols
It indicates the protocoltype of a bearer. In general,M3UA is selected accordingto the networking planning.It is configured as M2UAwhen MGW transfers thesignaling with M2UA mode.
ASP ASP IDIt is associated with theASP ID configured in theASP configuration.
NAME AliasIt is a mandatoryparameter. The aliascustomized by the user.
ID AS ID
It is an optionalparameter. It is the uniqueidentification of the AS. Ingeneral, it is the same asthat of the ASP for easymemory. The parameterranges from 1 to 640
EXISTCTX Whether the routingcontext ID exists
CTXID Routing context ID
It is an optional parameter.The routing context isunique in the network.This parameter mustbe consistent with theAS configuration of theopposite-end. Its defaultvalue is NO
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 29
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
ASTAG
Usage tag. Optionsinclude:
SGP
ASP
SRV (IPSP server)
CLT (IPSP client)
It is an optional parameter.
For Mc interface, MSCSgenerally serves asIPSP_Client, and MGWserves as IPSP_Server.When MGW acts as a SGW,the AS at the MSCS sideserves as ASP, and the ASat the SGW side serves asSGP.
For Nc interface, this shouldbe negotiated by bothsides. For example, thesmall signaling point servesas IPSP_Client, and the bigsignaling point serves asIPSP_Server.
ASUP
User typessupported by AS.Options include TUP,ISUP, BICC, H.248,ALCAPSCCP, PCA,NNSF and ALL
It is an optional parameter.It defines the upper-layeruser types supported bythe AS. Currently, there areeight types of users.
User type is not configuredwhen MGW transfers thesignaling with the M2UAmode
ASMD Service modessupported
It is an optional parameter.The supported servicemodes include:
� OVERRIDE(Over-ridemode)
� LOAD (Load sharemode).
In the over-ride mode,only one ASP is in theactivated statue. In thiscase, only one ASP needsbe configured. In theload sharing mode, NASPs should be configuredin the activated workingstatue, and K ASPs shouldbe configured in thedeactivated standby statue.
The value of N+K is notmore than the number ofASPs actually configured
30 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
SSN
Types of subsystem.Options includeNO_SSN (subsystemSSN excluded(null)), SCCP, REV2(standby), ISUP,OMAP, MAP, HLR,VLR, MSC, EIR, AUC,REV11(standby),INAP, USSD, VLRA,SGSN_BSCAP,RANAP, RNSAP,GMLC_MAP, CAP,GSMSCF_MAP,SIWF_MAP, SGSN_MAP, GGSN_MAP,IP (intelligentperipherals),SMC, SSP_SCP,BSC_BSSAP_LE,MSC_BSSAP_LE,SMLC_BSSAP_LE,BSS_O_M_A ,BSSAP_A andRVE255.
Types of subsystemsupported by applicationserver (AS).
NVAL The N value in loadsharing mode
The parameter ranges from0 to 16.
The N+K should be equal tothe number of ASP underAS.
The N value indicates thatAS puts into use if N ASPsput into use.
Example: Configure the AS between MSCS and MGW for Mcinterface with the following requirements.
� MGW office ID: 101
� Supported adaptation layer protocol: M3UA
� AS configuration ID: 1
� Supported user type: H248
� ASP ID: 1
� Client: MSCS
� Alias: H248
The command is as follows.
ADD AS:PROT=M3UA,ASPID="1",NAME="H248",ID=1,EXISTCTX=NO,ASTAG=SGP,ASUP="H248",ASMD=LOAD,NVAL=1,KVAL=0;
END OF STEPS
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 31
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Creating an M3UA Static Route
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The AS configuration is finished.
� The range of the M3UA static route identification is configuredin the resource management configuration.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Perform this procedure to configure the mapping relationship be-tween the M3UA static route and the AS. An M3UA static routecan be used by up to 64 SIO-locating-ASs. Otherwise, configuringmore M3UA static routes is required.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the M3UA static route. The command is ADDM3UART.
Table 14 describes the main parameters in the ADD M3UARTcommand.
TABLE 14 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD M3UART COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
ID ID of M3UAstatic route
It is an optional parameter,indicating the serial number of theM3UA static route ID, ranging from1 to 640. In general, it is the sameas the AS ID.
ASID AS IDIt is a mandatory parameter,corresponding to the AS IDspecified in the ADD AS command.
MODE
Alignmentmode ofroutes.Optionsinclude
� BYTURNS
� LOCAL
� NATURE
Nature: routes are directly sortedaccording by the ASP marshallingsequence in the routing table.
Local: It is unnecessary to realizethe algorithm in the background.The background just needs to makethe alignment according to theNature option.
BYTURNS: in the routing table,the routes at the odd-bit positionare sorted by the serial number ofthe activated ASP, and the routesat the even-bit position are sortedinversely by the serial number ofthe activated ASP
The default is BYTURNS.
NAME AliasIt is a mandatory parameter definedby a user, with a length rangingfrom 1 to 50 characters.
32 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
Example: Create an M3UA static route for Mc interface withthe following requirements.
� MGW office ID: 101
� M3UA static route ID: 1
� AS ID: 1
� User alias: MGW101.
The specific command is as follows.
ADD M3UART:ID=1,ASID=1,MODE=BYTURNS,NAME="MGW101";
END OF STEPS
Creating the SIO-Locating-AS
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The M3UA static route configuration is completed.
� The range of the SIO-locating-AS configuration ID is configuredin the resource management configuration.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context The configuration of SIO-locating-AS is used to locate one serviceto a routing table that is maintained by the ASP under the AS. OnMSCS, H248 protocol is generally configured between MSCS andMGW, and ISUP, TUP, and SCCP protocols are configured betweenMSCS and other adjacent offices that are switched by MGW.
A routing key describes a set of No.7 signaling parameters andparameter values. The corresponded AS is selected according tothe message attributes, thus to select a route for the message.
The message attributes include DPC+NET+OPC+SIO. The DPCrepresents the destination SPC, the NET represents the networktype, OPC represents the original SPC, and the SIO representsthe service information octet.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the SIO-locating-AS. The command is ADD SIOLOCAS.
Table 15 describes the main parameters in the ADD SIOLOCAS command.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 33
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
TABLE 15 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD SIOLOCAS COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
ID SIO-location-AS ID
It is an optional parameter,indicating the serial number ofSIO-locating-AS, ranging from 1 to4096. In general, it is the same asthe AS ID.
NAME Alias It is a mandatory parameter, whichis the alias customized by the user.
SIO
Serviceindication.Options include
� NULL
� TUP
� ISUP
� BICC
� H.248
� ALCAP
� SCCP
� PCA
� NNSF
It is a mandatory parameter,indicating the subscriber typebelonged by the transmittedmessage. Different user types canbe located to the same AS underthe precondition that the MS mustsupport these user types
Select H.248 for Mc interface,BICC for Nc interface, SCCP forthe RNC or BSC office transferredthrough MGW, and TUP or ISUPfor the 2G MSC/PSTN officetransferred through MGW.
OFCIDDestinationadjacent officeID
It is a mandatory parameter,indicating the adjacent office IDcorresponded by the destinationsignaling point of the M3UA.It needs to associate with theadjacent office ID in the adjacentoffice configuration.
OPOFCIDOriginaladjacent officeID
It is the adjacent office IDcorresponding to the M3UAoriginating signaling point. If0 (indicating the local office)is selected, it indicates thatthe message is sent from thelocal office, and the routingcontext is routed according toDPC+NET+OPC+SIO. If 65535(invalid) is selected, it indicatesthat the OPC field is invalid, andthe routing context is routedaccording to DPC+NET+SIO
PCM PCM systemnumber
It is an optional parameter. Itranges from 0 to 65535, with adefault of 65535 (invalid).
34 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
RT1 ID 1 of M3UAstatic route
RT2 ID 2 of M3UAstatic route
It corresponds to the IDspecified in the M3UA staticroute configuration. RT1 is amandatory parameter. In general,RT1 is required. When theoptimum route mode is adopted,RT1 is set as an active route, andRT2 is set as a standby route.
Example: Create SIO-locating-AS between MSCS and MGWwith the following requirements.
� MGW office ID: 101
� Destination adjacent office ID: 101
� Service indication: H.248
� M3UA static route ID: 1.
The specific command is as follows.
ADD SIOLOCAS:ID=1,NAME="MGW-H248",SIO=H248,OFCID=101,OPOFCID=65535,PCM=65535,RT1=1,RT2=0;
END OF STEPS
H.248 Configuration
Overview
Description H.248 protocol is only used on Mc interface. It provides the fol-lowing functions.
� Under the control of MGC, it can establish, modify and releasethe media channel in the MG, and can control the attributes ofbearer and user plane.
� It reports the events in the MG to the MGC.
� It maintains the office and terminal status between MGC andMG.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 35
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ConfigurationFlow
Figure 3 shows the configuration flow of H.248 protocol.
FIGURE 3 CONFIGURATION FLOW
Flow Description The H.248 configuration procedures are as follows:
Steps Operations Instructions Command
1 Creating MGCstatic data
Cofigure the datarelated to theMGCF and H.248.
ADD MGCSCFG
2Creating anMGW static datatemplate
Create thetemplate usedby the MGWstatic dataconfiguration.
ADD MGSTPL
3 Creating MGWstatic data
Create the staticdata for eachIM-MGW underthe MGCF.
ADD MGSCFG
36 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
Steps Operations Instructions Command
4 Creating a TIDanalyzer
The TID analysisconfiguration isnecessary forthe H.248 serverto perform thecharacter stringconversion ofthe CIC. Nomallyadopt the defaultconfiguration.
ADD TIDANL
5 Creating a TIDanalysis entry
Create aTID analyzerentrance.Nomally adoptthe defaultconfiguration.
ADD TIDENTR
Creating MGC Static Data
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The data configuration of the local office is completed.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Perform this procedure to set the data related to the MSCS andH.248.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the MGC static data. The command is ADD MGCSCFG.
Table 16 describes the main parameters in the ADD MGCSCFGcommand.
TABLE 16 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD MGCSCFG COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
MEGACO MEGACO versionnumber
It is an optional parameter.Select the supported MEGACOversion number, which must beconsistent with that negotiatedwith the MGW. The default valueis 1
ACTTMService activationdetectiontimer(s)
It is an optional parameter,ranging from 0 to 3600, with adefault of 600
ACTCHK Service activationdetection switch
It is an optional parameter,being activated by default.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 37
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
WAITTMMGW answerwaiting timer(ms)
It is an optional parameter,ranging from 0 to 65535, with adefault of 7800
PTRYNUM PEND retrytimes(t)
It is an optional parameter,ranging from 1 to 255, with adefault of 5
PTRYTM PEND retry time(ms)
It is an optional parameter,ranging from 0 to 65535, with adefault of 4000
CTXLIVETM Context livetime(s)
It is an optional parameter,ranging from 0 to 65535, with adefault of 1200
NAME Alias
It is an optional parameter,ranging from 0 to 50 characters.It may be the same as the officename
Example: To create the MGC static data of an MSCS office withall the parameters adopting default value, the specific com-mand is as follows.
ADD MGCSCFG:MEGACO=1,ACTTM=600,ACTCHK=ON,WAITTM=7800,PTRYNUM=5,PTRYTM=4000,CTXLIVETM=1200,MGACTTM=600;
END OF STEPS
Creating an MGW Static Data Template
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The data configuration of the local office is completed.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Perform this procedure to set the template used by the MGW staticdata configuration.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create an MGW static data template. The command is ADDMGSTPL.
Table 17 describes the main parameters in the ADD MGSTPLcommand.
38 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
TABLE 17 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD MGSTPL COMMAND
Parame-ter Name
ParameterDescription Instruction
NAME Alias
This is a mandatory parameterwith a length ranging from1 to 50 characters. It canbe consistent with the officename.
ID Static data templatenumber
The number of a template,ranging from 1 to 255
MEGACO MEGACO versionnumber
This parameter must beconsistent with that negotiatedwith the MGW.
ACTCHK Gateway activationdetection switch
It is configured as ON bydefault
PRTTM Transient protectiontimer (s)
It ranges from 1 to 180. Typethe default value 10
PRT Transient protectionswitch
It is configured as ON bydefault.
PENDTM Interval of PENDmessages (ms)
It ranges from 0 to 3600, witha default of 200
LNGTM Maximum existencetime (ms)
It ranges from 0 to 65535,with a default of 15000
RTRNTM Retransmissiontimer (ms)
It ranges from 0 to 65535,with a default of 3800
MTRNNUM Maximumtransmission times
It ranges from 0 to 15, with adefault of 1
TRNMD Retransmissionmode
� FIXED: Duration un-changeable
� UNFIXED: Durationchangeable
CTYPE H.248 protocolcoding mode
It must be consistent with thatnegotiated with the MGW dataconfiguration
Example: Create an MGW static data template with the follow-ing requirements.
� Template ID: 1
� User name: MGW101
� Other parameters: default value.
The specific command is as follows.
ADD MGSTPL:NAME="MGW101",ID=1,MEGACO=1,ACTCHK=ON,PRTTM=10,PRT=ON,PENDTM=200,LNGTM=1500
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 39
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
0,RTRNTM=3800,MTRNNUM=1,TRNMD=UNFIXED,CTYPE=TEXT;
END OF STEPS
Creating MGW Static Data
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The MGW topological node is configured.
� The MGW static data template is configured.
� The MSCS voice batch processing is finished.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Perform this procedure to configure the static data for each MGWunder the MSCS.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create MGW static data. The command is ADD MGSCFG.
Table 18 describes the main parameters in the ADD MGSCFGcommand.
TABLE 18 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD MGSCFG COMMAND
Parame-ter Name
ParameterDescription Instruction
ID Gatewaynumber
It is a mandatory parameter forconfiguring the node number ofthis gateway, ranging from 1 to2048. It is associated with the nodeID specified by the ADD TOPOcommand.
TPLIDStatic datatemplatenumber
It is a mandatory parameterassociated with the templatenumber configured on the MGWstatic data template configuration.
TONEID Service tonetemplate ID
It is an optional parameter rangingfrom 0 to 65535. It uses thetemplate ID specified in the BADDSTONE command.
LANGIDLanguagedescriptiontemplate ID
It is an optional parameter, rangingfrom 0 to 65535. It uses thetemplate ID specified in the BADDSTONE command.
40 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
Parame-ter Name
ParameterDescription Instruction
NAME AliasIt is a mandatory parameter,ranging from 0 to 50 characters. Itmay be the same as the office name
BKMGC Backup MGCinformation
It is an optional parameter, with adefault of NULL
PKGLOSTThreshold ofpackage lossrate (0.01%)
It is an optional parameter, rangingfrom 0 to 10000, with a default of10
JITThresholdof networkjittering (ms)
It is an optional parameter, rangingfrom 0 to 10000, with a default of50
DELAYThreshold ofnetwork delay(ms)
It is an optional parameter, rangingfrom 0 to 5000, with a default of200
MGW MGW tandem
It is an optional parameter forsetting whether this MGW is usedfor the tandem function. Type thedefault value NO
Example: Create static data for an MGW with the followingrequirements.
� MGW office ID: 101
� Static configuration template ID: 1
� Alias: MGW101.
The specific command is as follows.
ADD MGSCFG:ID=101,NAME="MGW101",TPLID=1,TONEID=1,LANGID=1,PKGLOST=10,JIT=50,DELAY=200,MGW=NO;
END OF STEPS
Creating a TID Analyzer
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The data configuration of the local office is completed.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context The TID analysis configuration is necessary for the H.248 serverto perform the character string conversion of the CIC. The H.248server converts the CIC on the server to the corresponding char-acter string according to the mode configured by the TID analysis.Then it sends this character string to the gateway's H.248 for an-alyzing and operating the corresponded CIC. Since the form of theterminals used by the Mc interface is relatively fixed currently, youmay adopt the default configuration.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 41
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the TID analyzer. The command is ADD TIDANL.
Table 19 describes the main parameters in the ADD TIDANLcommand.
TABLE 19 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TIDANL COMMAND
Parame-ter Name
ParameterDescription Instruction
NAME User alias
It is a mandatory parameter,ranging from 1 to 50characters. It may be thesame as the office name.
PREV TID analyzer index
It is an optional parameter.It is the global number ofthe current analyzer for TIDanalyzer entry to use, rangingfrom 1 to 255.
TIDPFX TID prefix It is an optional parameter witha default of TDM
TAG
Analysis result flag.Options includeUSER, TRUNK, RTP,ATM, ROOT andPCM+IDX.
It is an optional parameter,with a default of TRUNK (trunktype).
Example: “TDM_5/1” is atrunk terminal form. “TDM” isthe TID prefix, “_” is the PCMseparation mark, “5” is the PCMnumber, "/” is the IDX (timeslot index) is the separationmark, and “1” is the time slotnumber
PCMSPR PCM flag It is an optional parameter,with a default of “ ”.
IDXSPR IDX flag It is an optional parameter,with a default of “/”.
PCMPOS1 PCM start location
It is an optional parameter,ranging from 0 to 255, with adefault of 1, indicating that thePCM number starts from thefirst digit of the PCM flag.
PCMPOS2 PCM end location
It is an optional parameter,ranging from 0 to 255, with adefault of 0. Since there is aPCM flag, the End Location ismeaningless.
IDXPOS1 IDX start location It is an optional parameter,ranging from 0 to 255, with a
42 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
Parame-ter Name
ParameterDescription Instruction
default of 1, indicating that thetime slot number starts fromthe first digit of the IDX flag.
IDXPOS2 IDX end location
It is an optional parameter,ranging from 0 to 255, with adefault of 0. Since there is anIDX flag, the End Location ismeaningless.
Example: Create a TID analyzer with the following require-ments.
� MGW office ID: 101
� TID index: 1
� Alias: MGW101
� Other parameters: default value.
The command is:
ADD TIDANL:NAME="MGW101",PREV=1,TIDPFX="TDM",TAG=TRUNK,PCMSPR="_",IDXSPR="/",PCMPOS1=1,PCMPOS2=0,IDXPOS1=1,IDXPOS2=0;
END OF STEPS
Creating a TID Analyzer Entry
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The MGW topological node is configured.
� The TID analyzer configuration is completed.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Perform this procedure to configure a TID analyzer entry.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create a TID analyzer entry. The command is ADD TIDENTR.
Table 20 describes the main parameters in the ADD TIDENTRcommand.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 43
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
TABLE 20 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TIDENTR COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
ND GatewayIt is a mandatory parameter. It is thenode ID allocated by the topologicalnode configuration.
TIDENTID TID analyzerindex
It is a mandatory parameterassociating the TID analyzer IDspecified in the TID analyzerconfiguration.
TIDTPLID TID templatenumber
By default, the system alreadycreates a TID template whose ID is1. You may query it with the SHOWTIDTPL command.
NAME User Alias
It is a mandatory parameter witha length ranging from 0 to 50characters. It may be the same asthe office name.
Example: Create a TID analyzer entry with the following re-quirements.
� MGW office ID: 101
� TID analyzer index: 1
� TID template ID: 1
� Alias: MGW101.
The specific command is as follows.
ADD TIDENTR:ND=101,TIDENTID=1,TIDTPLID=1,NAME="MGW101";
END OF STEPS
HLR Data ConfigurationOverview
TypicalNetworking
When ZXWN CS is interconnected with the HLR, the HLR is usuallyconnected to the MSCS in the TDM mode in the existing network.Figure 4 shows the typical networking between ZXWN CS and theHLR.
44 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
FIGURE 4 TYPICAL NETWORKING BETWEEN THE ZXWN CS AND THE HLR
Data Collection Before data configuration, it is supposed to complete collectingand negotiating the related data from the MSCS to the HLR office.Table 21 lists the data to be collected. The parameter values arejust examples. Input these parameters according to the actualcondition during the practical data construction procedure.
TABLE 21 MSCS-HLR INTERCONNECTION DATA COLLECTION
Parameter Items Parameter Values
ZXWN MSCS signaling point code (24-bit) 3.11.1
HLR signaling point code (24-bit) 3.1.1
HLR number 8613907551
Signaling point code type 24-bit signaling point code
SP type SEP
Association type Direct connect
Signaling link code 0
Signaling E1 number E1 9
Start timeslot number of E1 16TS
Quantity of timeslots 1
Data Configura-tion Flow
Table 22 describes the data configuration flow of the HLR adjacentoffice.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 45
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
TABLE 22 DATA FOR INTERCONNECTION WITH THE HLR
Steps Operations Related Command
1 Creating a HLR AdjacentOffice ADD ADJOFC
2 Creating a Signaling Link Set ADD N7LKS
3 Creating an SPB-accessedSignaling Link ADD N7LNKE1
4 Creating a Signaling Route ADD N7ROUTE
5 Creating a Signaling Office ADD N7OFC
6 Creating IMSI Analysis ADD IMSIANA
7 Creating GT TranslationSelector ADD GTT
8 Creating GT Translator Data ADD GT
Generally, the following five types of GT numbers are configuredin ZXWN.
� Local office’s MSC/VLR number GT
� HLR number GT
� Mobile subscriber number (MSISDN) GT
� MSC/VLR number GT with interoffice handover
� IMSI-constructed GT
Here, whether to configure the last number in the E214 formatdepends on the specific result of "IMSI Number Analysis". Forexample, if MCC+MNC (such as 46000) in "IMSI Number Analysis"is configured as CC+NDC (such as 86139) in E214 format, the GTnumber in this E214 format should be configured here. If the IMSInumber analysis is configured as the E164 number in the HLT GTform in "IMSI Number Analysis", the corresponding GT number inthe E164 format should be configured here.
For the above four number forms, the rule to select GT is to startfrom the beginning so as to select this number's minimum prefixthat can identify different office directions for analysis, and to se-lect as few identifiable prefixes as possible so as to simplify the GTconfiguration.
Different carriers have different requirements on whether the GTor the DPC addressing mode is used for transferring the MAP andCAP messages between two signaling points. Some carriers re-quire transferring the MAP and CAP messages between the in-tra-province signaling points in the DPC addressing mode, andthe MAP and CAP messages between the extra-province signal-ing points in the GT addressing mode, and some carriers requiretransfer all the MAP and CAP messages in the GT addressing mode.In case of the DPC addressing mode, the STP has light load, butis configured with more data. In case of the GT addressing mode,the STP has heavy load, but are configure with less data.
46 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
Creating a HLR Adjacent Office
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The E1 line between the MSCS and HLR is well corrected.Meanwhile, the signaling interworking data is planned andnegotiated.
� The configuration of local office data is complete.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
� The range of adjacent office number is configured in the re-source management.
Context Creating the HLR adjacent office means configuring the basic in-formation for the HLR adjacent office.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create a HLR adjacent office. The command is ADD ADJOFC.
Table 23 describes the parameters in the ADD ADJOFC com-mand.
TABLE 23 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD ADJOFC COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instructions
SPCFMT Signaling point codeformat
Select TRIPLE_DEC(888/333 formatDec NumericCharacters).
SPCTYPE Signaling point codetype
Specify it according tothe SPC type of theadjacent office. In thiscase, select 24 (24bit signaling pointcode).
DPC Destination signalingpoint code
It is a mandatoryparameter. Setthe 24-bit signalingpoint code to thisHLR adjacent officeaccording to itssignaling point codetype.
OFCTYPE Adjacent Office Types SelectHLR/HLRe&AUC.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 47
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instructions
BANDFLAG
Broadband attribute,including:
� YES (Supportbroadbandattribute)
� No (Not supportbroadbandattribute)
Select No (Not supportbroadband attribute).
For example, create a HLR adjacent office with the followingrequirements.
� Office ID: 1
� Signaling point code: 3.1.1
� Signaling point code type: 24–bit
� Adjacent office type: HLR/HLRe and AUC
� Association type: Direct connection mode
The specific command is as follows.
ADD ADJOFC:ID=1,NAME="HLR",NET=1,OFCTYPE="HLR/HLRe"&"AUC",SPCFMT=TRIPLE_DEC,SPCTYPE=24,DPC="3.1.1",RC="25",ASSOTYPE=AM_SURE,SPTYPE=SEP,SSF=NATIONAL,SUBPROTTYPE=DEFAULT,TEST=YES,BANDFLAG=NO,PRTCTYPE=CHINA,CLST=65535,INFO="CIC_PCM",RELATEDOFC1=0;
END OF STEPS
Signaling Data Configuration
Creating a Signaling Link Set
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The adjacent office configuration is completed.
� The data configuration of local office is completed.
� The range of signaling link set is configured in the resourcemanagement.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Perform this procedure to configure a narrowband signaling link setto the adjacent office, including 64k signaling link set, 2M signalinglink set, N×64k signaling link set.
When configuring the signaling link set connected by TDM, youmay select N64, NN64, and N2M.
48 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
� 64k indicates that the narrow-band signaling link in this sig-naling link set only seizures one time slot on one E1 line, with64 Kbps bandwidth.
� N×64K indicates that the narrow-band signaling link in thissignaling link set seizures N consecutive time slots on one E1line (8≤n≤25).
� 2M indicates that the narrow-band signaling link in this signal-ing link set seizures all 31 time slots on one E1 line (time slot0 is unavailable), with 1.984Mbps bandwidth.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create a signaling link set. The command is ADD N7LKS.
Table 24 describes the main parameters in the ADD N7LKScommand.
TABLE 24 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD N7LKS COMMAND
ParameterName
Parameter Descrip-tion Instruction
OFCID Direct-associated officeof the signaling link set
It is a mandatoryparameter. Type theadjacent office ID ofthis signaling link set,which is specified inthe adjacent officeconfiguration.
ID Signaling link set ID
It is a mandatoryparameter. Itdesignates the signalinglink set No. fordistinguishing signalinglink sets, ranging from1 to 1024.
NAME Alias
It is a mandatoryparameter describingthe name of thissignaling link set foreasy identification.
TYPE Signaling link set type
This parameter indicatesthe types of thesignaling links in thissignaling link set. SelectN64 for a 64K signalinglink, NN64 for ann×64K signaling link,and N2M for a 2Msignaling link.
LECM Link error revision, This parameter
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 49
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
Parameter Descrip-tion Instruction
including:
BASIC (basic errorrevision, transit delay ≤15 ms): all the signalinglinks use this methodfor relatively shorttransit delay, except forsatellite links.
PCR (Preventive CyclicRetransmission: transitdelay≥15 ms): Satellitelinks use this methodfor it has a relativelylong transit delay.
designates the errorcorrection method ofthe signaling links inthis set. In general,select BASIC. Ingeneral,BASICisselected when theline transit delay is lessthan 15ms, and PCR isselected when the linetransit delay is greaterthan 15ms.For a 2Msignaling link, BASICmust be selected. Thisparameter shall beconsistent with thatof the opposite endthrough negotiation.
Example: Create a signaling link set connected by HLR office104 with the following requirements.
� HLR office ID: 1
� Signaling link set No.: 1
� Group type: 64K narrowband link set
� Link error revision: Basic error revision
� Alias: HLR-1.
The specific command is as follows.
ADD N7LKS:OFCID=1,TYPE=N64,ID=1,LECM=BASIC,NAME="HLR-1";
END OF STEPS
Creating an SPB-Accessed Signaling Link
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The signaling link group configuration is completed.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Signaling link is the physical channel carrying signaling messages.The narrow-band signaling link used on the MSCS is an SPB-ac-cessed signaling link.
50 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
Note:
In order to evenly distribute the traffic load to an office on eachlink that is selected in the dynamic routing table correspondedby the SLC, usually the number of links in a link set to a direct-associated office is configured as 2n, namely, 2, 4, 8, or 16 linksare configured. Make sure that load onto each link is not too heavyto cause it breakdown.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create an SPB-accessed signaling link. The command is ADDN7LNKE1
Table 25 describes the main parameters in the ADD N7LNKE1command.
TABLE 25 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD N7LNKE1 COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
LKSID Signaling linkset ID
It is a mandatory parameter,designating the signaling linkset No. of this signaling link.It is associated with the ID ofthe signaling link set that isconfigured.
SLC Signaling LinkCode (SLC)
This parameter designates theSLC of this signaling link, rangingfrom 0 to 15. It needs tobe consistent with the SLC ofthe same signaling link of theopposite-end office.
MODULESignalingmanagementmodule No.
It is a mandatory parameter.Select a signaling module.Several signaling links of thesame office should be configuredto different physical boards.In addition, the signaling linksmanaged by each SMP moduleshould share load.
NAME Alias
It is a mandatory parameterdesignating the name ofthe signaling link for easyidentification, with a lengthranging from 1 to 50 characters.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 51
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
SPBUNT SPB unitnumber
CPU CPU ID of SPB
It is a mandatory parameter.The CPU ID ranges from 1 to 4.Several signaling links of the sameoffice should be configured todifferent SPB boards. In addition,the signaling links processed bythe CPUs on SPB board shouldshare load.
E1 E1 number ofthe SPB board
This parameter designates thenumber of the E1 where thesignaling link is located, rangingfrom 9 to 25. By default, it isnumbered from 9
TS Start timeslotnumber of E1
64k signaling link: the time slotnumber of the signaling link is 16
N×64k signaling link: its starttime slot ranges from 1 to 31
2M signaling link: Its start timeslot is 1
TSNUM Quantity oftimeslots
Configure the number of the timeslots occupied by the signalinglink.
64K signaling link: Its time slotamount is 1.
N×64K signaling link: Its timeslot amount is N.
2M signaling link: Its time slotamount is 31.
INFO
Miscellaneousinformation,including:
E1: Thislink usesthe E1-typeinterface.
N64KT1:This link usesthe T1-typeinterface, with64K normalcoding mode.
I64KT1: Thislink usesthe T1-typeinterface, with64K reversalphase codingmode.
56KT1: Thislink usesthe T1-typeinterface, with54K codingmode.
Configure the interface type andcoding mode of this link. Ingeneral, it is an E1 link.
52 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
Example: Create an SPB-accessed signaling link with the fol-lowing requirements.
� Signaling link set No.: 1
� Signaling link No.: 0
� SMP module No.: 3
� Signaling link alias: HLR-1-1
� SPB board unit No.: 721
� Start time slot number of E1: 9
� Time slot amount: 1
� Other parameters: default.
The specific command is as follows.
ADD N7LNKE1:LKSID=1,SLC=0,MODULE=3,NAME="HLR-1-1",ID=1,SPBUNT=721,CPU=1,E1=9,TS=16,TSNUM=1,LOOP=NO,INFO=E1,FCPLTHR=255;
END OF STEPS
Creating a Signaling Route
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The signaling link group configuration is completed.
� The range of signaling route ID is configured in the resourcemanagement.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context The signaling routing configuration is used for specifying the sig-naling link set to be selected and the method when the signalingselects a route. The signaling route to a direct-associated officeonly contains the signaling link sets to this office. The signalingroute to a quasi-associated office contains one or two signalinglink sets to the intermediate office.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create a signaling route. The command is ADD N7ROUTE.
Table 26 describes the main parameters in the ADD N7ROUTEcommand.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 53
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
TABLE 26 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD N7ROUTE COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
NAME AliasIt is a mandatory parameterdesignating a signaling routefor easy identification.
LKSID1 Signaling link set 1
The signaling route containsthe first signaling link set.Type the serial number of thesignaling link set 1.
LKSID2 Signaling link set 2
It is the second signalinglink set contained by thesignaling route. At leasteither LKSID1 or LKSID2is not equal to zero andcontains signaling links. Ifonly one signaling link setexists, type 0
ID Signaling routenumber
This parameter designatesthe serial number of thesignaling route, ranging from1 to 2000. When thereis only one signaling linkset, this parameter may beconfigured to be consistentwith the signaling link setnumber.
LPM
Arrangement modeof signaling linksets. Refer to Table27 for its options.
This parameter designatesthe rules that should beobeyed when the signalinglinks of two signaling linksets are sorted. When twolink sets have the samesignaling links, and the totalnumber is not more than16, RAND (random order) isrecommended
LPMIN
Arrangement modein a signaling linkset. Refer to Table27 for its options.
This parameter designatesthe rules that should beobeyed when the signalinglinks in a signaling link setare sorted. RAND (randomorder) is recommended
MANUAL
Sort manually,including NO(NeedNot Manual)and YES(NeedManual)
The parameter indicateswhether to manually sort thesignaling routes of the twolink groups
LINKS Link list
The maximum numberof instance is 16. Theformat is <INDEX>-<LINK>,representing the alignmentorder and link numberrespectively.
54 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
TABLE 27 ARRANGEMENT MODE OF SIGNALING SETS
Mode Meanings Instruction
RANDRandomarrangementmode
Random arrangement mode
SLS0 Select OnSLS_BIT0
Selecting links between twolink sets according to Bit 0 ofSLS
SLS1 Select OnSLS_BIT1
Selecting links between twolink sets according to Bit 1 ofSLS
SLS2 Select OnSLS_BIT2
Selecting links between twolink sets according to Bit 2 ofSLS
SLS3 Select OnSLS_BIT3
Selecting links between twolink sets according to Bit 3 ofSLS
SLS01 Select OnSLS_BIT0-1
Selecting links between twolink sets according to Bits 0and 1 of SLS
SLS12 Select OnSLS_BIT1-2
Selecting links between twolink sets according to Bits 1and 2 of SLS
SLS23 Select OnSLS_BIT2-3
Selecting links between twolink sets according to Bits 2and 3 of SLS
Example: Create a signaling route with the following require-ments.
� Alias: HLR
� Signaling link set No.: 1
� Signaling route No.: 1
� Other parameters: default.
The specific command is as follows.
ADD N7ROUTE:NAME="HLR",LKSID1=1,LKSID2=0,ID=1,LPM=RAND,LPMIN=RAND,MANUAL=NO;
END OF STEPS
Creating a Signaling Office
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The signaling route configuration is completed.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 55
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Context Perform this procedure for configuring the correspondence be-tween the destination signaling office and the signaling route.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create a signaling office. The command is ADD N7OFC.
Table 28 describes the main parameters in the ADD N7OFCcommand.
TABLE 28 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD N7OFC COMMAND
ParameterName
Parameter Descrip-tion Instruction
ID Signaling route office
It is a mandatoryparameter. Type theadjacent office No. ofthe destination office
RT1
This parameterdesignates the serialnumber of the directroute to the destinationadjacent office.
It is a mandatoryparameter. Configurethe serial number of thedirect route to this office,ranging from 1 to 2000
RT2
Alternate route 1,indicating the serialnumber of the firstalternate route to thedestination adjacentoffice.
RT3
Alternate route 2,indicating the serialnumber of the secondalternate route to thedestination adjacentoffice. This parameteris configured when onlythe first alternate routeis already configured.
RT4
Alternate route 3,indicating the serialnumber of the thirdalternate route to thedestination adjacentoffice. This parameter isconfigured when only thesecond alternate route isalready configured.
This parameter rangesfrom 0 to 2000.Select up to threeavailable alternateroutes according to theactual conditions. Whenthere is no alternateroute, configure it as 0.
NAME Alias
It is a mandatoryparameter. Thisparameter designatesthe name of thesignaling office foreasy identification
56 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
Example: Create a signaling office to a HLR adjacent officewhose office ID is 1 and the direct-associated route number is1. The specific command is as follows.
ADD N7OFC:ID=1,RT1=1,RT2=0,RT3=0,RT4=0,NAME="HLR";
END OF STEPS
Creating IMSI Analysis
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The No. of the exchange to be configured is given.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context The UE brings with an IMSI number in the E212 format when orig-inating a location update request. The MSC/VLR builds the GTaccording to this IMSI for addressing the HLR. The IMSI numberanalysis is used to convert the IMSI number to a number that canaddress to the HLR.
There are two types of analysis result indications: ISDN formatand HLR format.
1. ISDN
The corresponding number prefix in the IMSI is convertedinto specified analysis result, and the rest digits are addedbehind the analysis result. For example, if the analyzednumber is 46000, the network-accepted IMSI number is460001234567890, the corresponding Country Code (CC) is86 and the Network Destination Code (NDC) is 139. In theanalysis of ISDN mode, 46000 can be analyzed into 86139.This number is analyzed into 861391234567890. Based onthis, the typical application of this mode is to convert theMCC+MNC in the IMSI into the CC+NDC, and keep the restpart, thus forming the E214 number format.
2. HLR
The corresponding number prefix in the IMSI is converted intospecified analysis result, and the rest digits are deleted. Forexample, if the analyzed number is 46000, the conversion re-sult is HLR’s GT number 8613907551, and the network-ac-cepted IMSI number is 460001234567890. In the HLR mode,this IMSI number is analyzed into 8613907551234, namely theHLR’s GT number. Based on this, the typical application of thismode is to convert the IMSI headed by specific MCC+MNC intothe GT number of a HLR.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create an IMSI analysis. The command is ADD IMSIANA.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 57
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Table 29 describes the parameters in the ADD IMSIANA com-mand.
TABLE 29 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD IMSIANA COMMAND
Parame-ters Explanation Instruction
IMSI IMSI prefix
It is a mandatory parameter,specifying the IMSI prefix tobe analyzed. It is an integer,consisting of 1~20 digits.
HDSTCODE Home destinationcode
It is a mandatory parameter,which is an integer consistingof 1~16 digits. It is thenumber converted from anIMSI number. It may be“CC+NDC” or “HLR’s GTnumber”. In this case, enterthe GT number of the HLR.
HDSTCO-DET
Destination codetype, includingHLR and ISDN.
In this case, enter HLR.
NAME Alias
It is an optional parameter,consisting of 1~50 characters.It is used to specificallydescribe an IMSI analysisrecord to make it easilyrecognized.
SM Short message ID Enter the default 0.
OPID Operator ID Enter the default 0.
INDADC Independent ADC Enter the default 0.
For example, create the IMSI number analysis with the follow-ing requirements.
� Analyzed number: 460001234
� Home destination code: 8613907551
� Analysis result: HLR
� Alias: HLR
The specific command is as follows.
ADD IMSIANA:IMSI="460001234",HDSTCODE="8613907551",HDSTCODET=HLR,NAME="HLR",SM=0,OPID=0,INDADC=NO;
END OF STEPS
58 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
SCCP Data Configuration
Creating GT Translation Selector
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The No. of the exchange to be configured is given.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context The GT translation selector and the GT translation data config-uration both belong to the SCCP data configuration. The SCCPdata configuration serves the SCCP routing. In the R4 system,the MAP signaling between such entities as MSCS/VLR and HLR inthe network is transferred through the SCCP. All the entities maybe directly connected, or forwarded by a signaling transfer point.When the SCCP receives messages from the MAP application layer,it will send, receive and forward these messages according to theroute labels in the messages. The SCCP is of two message routingmodes, GT routing and DPC+SSN routing.
These two routing modes are different when the STP exists be-tween the originating signaling point and the destination signalingpoint. The DPC+SSN routing mode requires that all the signal-ing points in the network (including originating signaling points,destination signaling points, and STP) can identify this destinationsignaling point code (DPC). The signaling is directly transferredthrough the MTP layer after reaching the intermediate node, with-out passing the SCCP layer. In this case, more DPC data are con-figured for the originating signaling point and STPs. The GT rout-ing method may be used in case that the originating SP and someSTPs do not know the final DPC of this signaling. In this address-ing method, when the signaling reaches the STP, the GT shouldbe translated into the destination signaling point, or the DPC ofSTP of the next hop GT translation at first through the SCCP, andthen messages are transferred to the MTP for transmission. In theGT routing mode, the originating signaling point only sends thesignaling to the STP of the next hop GT translation according tothe GT number prefix. The STP translates it and decides whetherto send it the next STP or the destination signaling point. In thiscase, less DPC data are configured for the originating signalingpoint and STPs.
Before configuring the GT translation data, configure the GT trans-lation selector to determine the basic attribute of the GT transla-tion. In general, two GT translation selectors are required, respec-tively corresponding to E164 and E214 coding plans. Pay attentionto the configurations of numbering plan, address attributes, coun-try code and bit length during configuration.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create a GT translation selector. The command is ADD GTT.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 59
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Table 30 describes the parameters in the ADD GTT command.
TABLE 30 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD GTT COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
GTT GT type
It is a mandatory parameter,raging from 1 to 4. When itis 1, the GT contains addressattributes. When it is 2, theGT contains translation type.When it is 3, the GT containstranslation type, numberingplan, and coding design.When it is 4, the GT containstranslation type, numberingplan, coding design, andaddress attributes. GT4 isselected by default
TT Translation type
It is a mandatory parameter,ranging from 0 to 255. It isthe translation type of theGT number, with the defaultvalue as 0
PLAN
Numbering plan,including
� NULL (idle)
� E.164(ISDN/phonenumberingplan)
� E.214(ISDN/mobilenumberingplan)
� RES(reserved)
� X.121 (Datanumberingplan)
� F.69 (Telexnumberingplan)
� E.210(Mari-time mobilenumberingplan)
� E.212 (Landmobilenumberingplan)
� Reserved(2),Re-served(8)Re-served (255):Reserved
It is a mandatory parameter.Select E.164 for the E164format, and select E.214for the E214 format. Forexample, if the mobilenumber is analyzed as HLR,select E.164 for GT analysisof this number. If the mobilenumber is analyzed as ISDN,select E.214 for GT analysisof this number
60 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
NATURE
Address attribute,including
� NULL(idle)
� SUB (addressattributes issubscribernumber)
� INT (addressattributes isinternationalnumber)
� NATRSV(addressattributesis nationalreservednumber)
� NATSIGN(addressattributes isnational validnumber)
� CAMEL(addressattributes isintelligentnetworkservicenumber)
� VACANT0,VA-CANT7 VA-CANT255: va-cancy
It is a mandatory parameter.Select INT
ID GT translationselector
It is an optional parameter,ranging from 0 to 1023. It isthe global number of the GTtranslation selector
CC Country codeIt is an optional parameter,consisting of 0~4 digits. It is86 in China
NMIN National minimumdigit length
They are optional parameters,which are integers, rangingfrom 1 to 20. Theyrespectively correspond to thenational minimum GT numberlength, and national maximumGT number length configuredin the GT translation dataconfiguration. In general, thenational minimum digit lengthis set to 5, while the nationalmaximum digit length is setto 15
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 61
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
NMAX National maximumbit length
IMINInternationalminimum digitlength
IMAXInternationalmaximum digitlength
They are optional parameters,which are integers, rangingfrom 1 to 20. Theyrespectively correspondto the international minimumGT number length, andinternational maximum GTnumber length configuredin the GT translation dataconfiguration. In general, theinternational minimum digitlength is set to 1, while theinternational maximum digitlength is set to 5
CTRL
GT translationattributes,including R_L(intercepting digitsfrom the numberto be analyzedfrom right to leftfor alignment,correspondingto the maximummatching policy),and L_R((interceptingdigits from thenumber to beanalyzed fromleft to rightfor alignment,correspondingto the minimummatching policy)
It is an optional parameter,with the default choice asR_L. Maximum Matchingmeans match the numberfrom right to left. Whenanalyzing a GT number,search the matched optionswith the maximum length.GT numbers are analyzed inthe descending order of theirlengths, facilitating reducingthe workload of GT dataconfiguration
NAME User alias
It is a mandatory parameter,consisting of 1~50 characters.
It is used to identify a GTtranslation selector to make iteasily recognized
For example, create a GT translation selector with the followingrequirements.
� GT type: 4
� Translation type: 0
� Numbering plan: ISDN/phone numbering plan
� Address attribute: international number
� GT translation selector ID: 1
62 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
� Alias: E164
The specific command is as follows.
ADD GTT:GTT=4,TT=0,PLAN=E.164,NATURE=INT,GTTOPT=0,ID=1,CC="86",NMIN=5,NMAX=9,IMIN=2,IMAX=5,CTRL=R_L,NAME="E164";
For example, create a GT translation selector with the followingrequirements.
� GT type: 4
� Translation type: 0
� Numbering plan: ISDN/mobile numbering plan
� Address attribute: international number
� GT translation selector ID: 2
� Alias: E214
The specific command is as follows.
ADD GTT:GTT=4,TT=0,PLAN=E.214,NATURE=INT,GTTOPT=0,ID=2,CC="86",NMIN=5,NMAX=9,IMIN=2,IMAX=5,CTRL=R_L,NAME="E214";
END OF STEPS
Creating GT Translation Data
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The No. of the exchange to be configured is given.
� The GT translation selector is configured.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context The GT data are used for location update, call, and inter-officehandover. Configuring GT translation data should follow this prin-ciple: Understanding the service signaling flow and making clearthe signaling route. To response every message sent to the oppo-site end, the GT translation data both of the source address anddestination address of signaling must be configured at every endpoint or transfer point.
When configuring the location update data, the local office’s GTnumber is translated to office 0, namely, the local office, and theHLR’s GT number is translated to the HLR or the STP. Therefore,at least two types of the GT translation data are configured on theMSCS. In general, the following two kinds of GT translation dataare required.
E164 number: it requires configuring the local office’s MSC/VLRGT, MSISDN number, and MSC/VLR GT with location-area adjacentrelation.
E214 number: it requires configuring E214 format number corre-sponded by IMSI number (E212 format).
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 63
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the GT translation data. The command is ADD GT.
Table 31 describes the parameters in the ADD GT command.
TABLE 31 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD GT COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription
Instruction
GT Called GT number
It is a mandatory parameter,consisting of 1~20 digits. It isused to query the destinationGT number of messagerouting
OPGT Calling GT number
It is an optional parameter,consisting of 0~20 digits. Itis the number of the virtualMSC where the subscriber islocated during GT translation.During GT routing, querywhere there are matched dataaccording to the VMSC wherethe subscriber is located andthe target GT number. If thereare matched data, performGT translation based on thematched data. If there isno matched data, performtranslation again based onthat the calling GT number is0
GTSL GT translationselector
It is a mandatory parameter,ranging from 0 to 1023. Selectthe GT translation selectorrespectively according toconfigured E164 and E214numbers
GTDI Number changeID
It ranges from 0 to 256,with the default value as0. It is the ID of flexiblepolicy template change. Thetarget GT number can beflexibly changed based onit. When the GT translationresult contains a new GT,this parameter does not takeeffect
64 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
ParameterDescription
Instruction
OFCIDS Office ID and polllist
It is a mandatory parameter.The number of instance is1~4 when office ID groupingis supported. The numberof instance is 1~16 whenoffice ID grouping is notsupported. The formatis <OFCID>-<SELNUM>,representing the office ID tobe polled and the number ofpoll respectively.
GRPWhether tosupport groupingof office ID
It is an optional parameter,with a default of NO
OFCGRP2
The office ID andpoll number of themultiple signalingpoints for thesecond group
It is an optional parameter.The number of instance is1~4 when office ID groupingis supported. The userdoes not need to type whenthe office ID grouping issupported. The formatis <OFCID>-<SELNUM>,representing the office ID tobe polled and the number ofpoll respectively.
OFCGRP3
The office ID andpoll number of themultiple signalingpoints for the thirdgroup
It is an optional parameter.The number of instance is1~4 when office ID groupingis supported. The userdoes not need to type whenthe office ID grouping issupported. The formatis <OFCID>-<SELNUM>,representing the office ID tobe polled and the number ofpoll respectively.
OFCGRP34
The office ID andpoll number of themultiple signalingpoints for thefourth group
It is an optional parameter.The number of instance is1~4 when office ID groupingis supported. The userdoes not need to type whenthe office ID grouping issupported. The formatis <OFCID>-<SELNUM>,representing the office ID tobe polled and the number ofpoll respectively.
SSN
Subsystem No.Refer to Table 32for the optionsinvolved
It is an optional parameter. Inthe GT routing mode, selectthe default value for SSN. Inthe DPC+SSN routing mode,select the corresponding SSN
NGT New GT number
It is an optional parameter,ranging from 0 to 20 ofcharacters. It represents thenew GT translation type.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 65
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription
Instruction
NTRNTYPE New GTtranslation type
It is an optional parameter,ranging from 0 to 255.It represents the new GTtranslation type.
TRNRLT
Whether thetranslation resultcontains DPCand SSN. Theoptions includesNULL (neitherDPC nor SSN is inthe result), DPC(containing DPCin the result), andSSN (containingSSN in the result)
It is an optional parameter. Inthe GT routing mode, selectthe default value for TRNRLT.In the DPC+SSN routingmode, select the DPC andSSN for TRNRLT
RTTYPE
Routing mode,including GT(routing basedon GT) and DPC(routing based onDPC+SSN)
It is an optional parameter. Ingeneral, select GT for directconnection, and DPC+SSNfor non-direct connection
NGTTAG
Attribute of thenew GT , includingthe followingoptions:
NGT (No newGT in the GTtranslationresult): The GTnumber in the GTtranslation resultis still the calledGT number.
NAI: The GTnumber in theGT translationresult is the newGT number in theNGT parameter,only containingNature Of AddressIndicator (NAI).
NTT: The GTnumber in theGT translationresult is the newGT number in theNGT parameter,only containingtranslation type.
NTTES: The GTnumber in the GTtranslation resultis the new GTnumber in theNGT parameter,only containing
It is an optional parameter.It is the attribute of thenew GT contained in the GTtranslation result. NGT(Nonew GT in the GT translationresult) is selected by default
66 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
ParameterDescription
Instruction
translation type,numbering plan,and coding design.
NTTNAI: The GTnumber in the GTtranslation resultis the new GTnumber in theNGT parameter,containingtranslation type,numbering plan,coding design,and NAI
SCCP
SCCP coding type,including:
INT (internationalcoding) andUSA(USA coding)
It is an optional parameter.It indicates the standard typereferred to by the SCCP codingin the GT translation result.The default value is INT
VGT
GT varyingwith differentoffice IDs,including NO (notsupported), andYES (supported)
It is an optional parameter,with NO as the default value
TT
TT conversion,including NO (notsupported), andYES (supported)
It is an optional parameter,with NO as the default value
NAME Alias The alias of the GT translationdata for easy memory.
TABLE 32 SSN
SSN Meaning
NO_SSN Not containing SSN
SCCP SCCP
ISUP ISDN user part
OMAP Operation and maintenance application part
MAP Mobile user part
HLR Home location register
VLR Visitor location register
MSC Mobile switching center
EIR Equipment identity register
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 67
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
SSN Meaning
AUC Authentication center
ISDN/ASE ISDN_ASE(11)
INAP/OTA INAP/OTA subsystem
USSD USSD
VLRA VLRA
SGSN_BSCAP SGSN BSCAP
RANAP RANAP
RNSAP RNSAP
GMLC_MAP GMLCMAP
CAP CAP
GSMSCF_MAP GSMSCFMAP
SIWF_MAP SIWFMAP
SGSN_MAP SGSNMAP
GGSN_MAP GGSNMAP
IP IP
SMC SMC subsystem
SSP_SCP SSPSCP subsystem
BSC_BSSAP_LE-/MPC BSC_BSSAP_LE/MPC
MSC_BSSAP_LE MSC_BSSAP_LE
SMLC_BSSAP_LE SMLC_BSSAP_LE
BSS_O_M_A BSS_O_M_A
BSSAP_A BSSAP_A
NPDB NPDB
ATER ATER
UDS_DMCC UDS_DMCC
Other Reserved Reserved
For example, create the GT translation data with the followingrequirements.
� GT number: 8613907551
� GT translation selector ID: 1
� Office poll: 1-1
68 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
� Subsystem’s SSN number: SCCP
The specific command is as follows.
ADD GT:GT="8613907551",GTSL=1,GTDI=0,OFCIDS="1"-"1",GRP=NO,SSN=NO_SSN,NTRNTYPE=0,TRNRLT="DPC"&"SSN",RTTYPE=GT,NGTTAG=NGT,SCCP=INT,VGT=NO,TT=NO,NPFLAG=NO,NPLAN=NULL,SRVTYPE=NULL;
END OF STEPS
STP Data ConfigurationOverview
TypicalNetworking
ZXWN CS may interconnect with the STP in one of the followingtwo ways.
� ZXWM MSCS is directly connected to the STP.
� The built-in SG of ZXWN MGW forwards the signaling.
In the current networking environment, the STP is usually directlyconnected to the ZXWN MSCS in the TDM mode. This section in-troduces this configuration method.
NetworkingDiagram
Figure 5 shows the typical networking between ZXWN CS and theSTP.
FIGURE 5 TYPICAL NETWORKING BETWEEN THE ZXWN CS AND THE STP
Data Collection Before data configuration, it is supposed to complete collecting andnegotiating the related data from the MSCS to the STP adjacentoffice. Table 33 lists the data to be collected. Where, the param-eter values are just examples. Enter these parameters according
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 69
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
to the actual condition during the practical data construction pro-cedure.
TABLE 33 MSCS-STP DATA COLLECTION
Parameter Items Parameter Values
ZXWN MSCS signaling point code(24-bit) 3.11.1
STP signaling point code (24-bit) 3.2.1
Signaling point code type 24-bit signaling point code
SP type STP
Association type Direct connect
Signaling link code 1
Signaling E1 number E1 10
Start timeslot number of E1 16TS
Quantity of timeslots 1
Data Configura-tion Flow
Table 34 describes the configuration flow.
TABLE 34 MSCS-STP DATA CONFIGURATION FLOW
Steps Operations Related Command
1 Creating an STP adjacentoffice ADD ADJOFC
2 Creating a signaling link setto the STP ADD N7LKS
3 Creating a signaling link tothe STP ADD N7LNKE1
4 Creating a signaling route tothe STP ADD N7ROUTE
5 Creating a signaling office tothe STP ADD N7OFC
6 Creating a GT translationdata ADD GT
� In the above configuration flow table, the SSN subsystem ofthe SCCP is generated automatically according to the adjacentoffice type specified in the adjacent office configuration. Youmay query the generated subsystem with the SHOW N7SSNcommand.
� In general, all the GT numbers except the local office are trans-mitted to the corresponding STP for forwarding, when the GTnumber is configured in the current network. In operationmethod, analyze the subdivided GT number in the local officeto the local office direction, and then analyze the smallest GT
70 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
prefix (such as 86139) in the network to the STP, thus greatlysimplify the working load of data configuration.
Creating an STP Adjacent Office
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The E1 line between the MSCS and the STP is well connected.Meanwhile, the signaling interworking data is planned and ne-gotiated.
� The configuration of local office data is complete.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
� The range of adjacent office number is configured in the re-source management.
Context Creating an STP adjacent office means configuring the basic infor-mation for the opposite STP office.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create an STP adjacent office. The command is ADD ADJOFC.
Table 35 describes the parameters in the ADD ADJOFC com-mand.
TABLE 35 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD ADJOFC COMMAND
Parame-ter Name
ParameterDescription Instruction
ID Office ID
It is a mandatory parameter,indicating the ID of the adjacentoffice, and ranging from 1 to3000. It is usually configuredas the exchange ID of theadjacent office during theall-network planning.
NAME AliasIt is a mandatory parameter.Enter a character string todescribe an STP adjacent office.
NET Network type
It is a mandatory parameter,indicating the network type ofthe SPC used for connectingthe local office to the adjacentoffice when the local officeis configured with severalSignaling Points (SP). Thedefault is the network type ofthis SP when there is only oneSP in the local office.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 71
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Parame-ter Name
ParameterDescription Instruction
OFCTYPE Adjacent OfficeTypes
Configure the adjacent officetype. Select MSCSERVER forthe STP adjacent office.
SPCFMT Signaling pointcode format
Select TRIPLE_DEC(888/333 format Dec NumericCharacters).
SPCTYPE Signaling pointcode type
Specify it according to the SPCtype of the adjacent office. Inthis case, select 24 (24 bitsignaling point code).
DPCDestinationsignaling pointcode
It is a mandatory parameter.Set the 24-bit signaling pointcode to this STP adjacent officeaccording to its signaling pointcode type.
RC Area code Indicates the local toll zonecode of the adjacent office
ASSOTYPE Association type Select AM_SURE (directconnection mode) in this case.
SPTYPE Signaling pointtype
If this signaling point forwardsmessages through this adjacentoffice, it is configured as STPor STEP. Otherwise, it isconfigured as SEP. In this case,select STP.
SSF Subservice type In this case, select National(National signaling point code).
BANDFLAG
Broadbandattribute,including:
� YES (Supportbroadbandattribute)
� No (Notsupportbroadbandattribute)
Since the MSCS is connectedto the STP through the TDM,select NO (Not supportbroadband attribute).
PRTCTYPE Protocol type Select CHINA.
For example, create an STP adjacent office with the followingrequirements.
� Office ID: 2
� Signaling point code: 3.2.1
� Signaling point code type: 24-bit
� Adjacent office type: MSCSERVER
� Association type: Direct connection mode
72 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
The specific command is as follows.
ADD ADJOFC:ID=2,NAME="STP",NET=1,OFCTYPE="MSCSERVER",SPCFMT=TRIPLE_DEC,SPCTYPE=24,DPC="3.2.1",RC="25",ASSOTYPE=AM_SURE,SPTYPE=STP,SSF=NATIONAL,SUBPROTTYPE=DEFAULT,TEST=YES,BANDFLAG=NO,PRTCTYPE=CHINA,CLST=65535,INFO="CIC_PCM",RELATEDOFC1=0;
END OF STEPS
Signaling Data Configuration
Creating a Signaling Link Set to the STP
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The adjacent office is configured.
� The configuration of local office data is complete.
� The range of signaling link set is configured in the resourcemanagement.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Perform this procedure to add an MTP link set to the STP adjacentoffice.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create a signaling link set to the STP adjacent office. The com-mand is ADD N7LKS.
Table 36 describes the parameters in the ADD N7LKS com-mand.
TABLE 36 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD N7LKS COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
OFCID Office ID
It is a mandatory parameter,designating the adjacent officedirectly connected to this signalinglink set. It is the STP adjacentoffice ID specified in the ADDADJOFC command. Note thatevery adjacent office can only hasone link set.
TYPE Linkset type,including:
It is a mandatory parameter.Select N64, NN64, or N2M for
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 73
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
� N64K (64Knarrowbandsignalinglink set)
� NN64K(n×64Knarrowbandsignalinglink set)
� N2M (2Mnarrowbandsignalinglink set)
� ATM(Broadbandsignalinglink set)
� M2PA (M2PAsignalinglink set)
the signaling link set connectedthrough the TDM.
64k indicates that thenarrow-band signaling linkin this signaling link set onlyseizures one time slot on one E1line, with 64 Kbps bandwidth.
N×64K indicates that thenarrow-band signaling link inthis signaling link set seizures Nconsecutive time slots on one E1line (8≤n≤25).
2M indicates that the narrowbandsignaling links in this link setseizures all 31 time slots of oneE1 line, with the bandwidth as1.984Mbps.
Select ATM for the signaling linkset connected through ATM.
Select M2PA for the signaling linkset connected through IP.
Generally, select N64 for thesignaling link set to the STP.
This parameter should benegotiated by the two ends of theconnection for consistency.
ID Linkset ID
It is an optional parameter,designating the unique No. of thissignaling link set. It is numberedfrom 1. It is suggested to be thesame as the adjacent office ID.
LECM
Link errorrevision,including:
� BASIC(basic errorrevision)
� PCR (pre-ventive cy-clic retrans-mission)
BASIC (basic error revision,transit delay ≤ 15 ms): all thesignaling links except satellitelinks uses this method.
PCR (Preventive CyclicRetransmission: transit delay≥15ms): Satellite links use thismethod for it has a relatively longtransit delay.
In this case, select BASIC (basicerror revision).
NAME AliasIt is a mandatory parameter fornaming this signaling link set foreasy identification.
For example, create a signaling link set to the STP office withthe following requirements.
� STP office ID: 2
� Signaling link set number: 2
� Signaling link set type: 64K narrowband link set
� Link error revision: Basic error revision
74 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
� Alias: TOSTP
The specific command is as follows.
ADD N7LKS:OFCID=2,TYPE=N64,ID=2,LECM=BASIC,NAME="TOSTP";
END OF STEPS
Creating a Signaling Link to the STP
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The signaling link set configuration is complete.
� The SPB board configuration is complete.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Signaling links are the physical channels bearing signaling mes-sages. Configuring an MTP link to the STP means creating an sig-naling link borne on the E1.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create an E1 signaling link. The command is ADD N7LNKE1.
Table 37 describes the parameters in the ADD N7LNKE1 com-mand.
TABLE 37 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD N7LNKE1 COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
LKSID Linkset ID
It is a mandatory parameter,indicating the signaling linkset belonged by this signalinglink, and using the signalinglink set ID configured in theADD N7LKS command.
SLC Signaling linkcode
It is the link selecting code,ranging from 0 to 15. Onesignaling link set has up to16 narrowband signalinglinks. This parameter mustbe consistent with that ofthe opposite end office. Thesignaling link codes in thesame signaling link set cannotbe repeated.
MODULE SMP module No.
It is a mandatory parameter,designating the modulenumber of the SMP managingthis signaling link.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 75
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
NAME AliasIt is a mandatory parameter,which is the alias customizedby the user.
ID Signaling Link
It is the global number of asignaling link. In general, itranges from 1 to 1000 fora narrowband signaling link,and from 1001 to 1920 for abroadband signaling link. Itis suggested that this numbershould be consistent with theadjacent office ID.
SPBUNT SPB unit No.
It is a mandatory parameter,designating the unit numberof the SPB board specified inthe physical configuration.
CPU SPB CPU
It is the CPU number of theSPB board that has fourCPUs. There is no fixedcorrespondence between theE1 No. of this signaling linkand the SPB subunit No..Since an SPB board provides16 E1 lines, and supports upto 64 64Kbps narrowbandlinks, the narrowband linksshould be distributed evenlyin the subunit.
E1 SPB E1
An SPB board has 16 E1 linesnumbered from 9 to 24. E1numbers are corresponded tothe E1 lines on the rear boardof the SPB board. Select theE1 number correspondingto the E1 line actuallyconnected.
TS SPB E1 time slotstart number
It is the start time slotnumber of the SPB E1 subunitused by this E1 signalinglink for outgoing the office.This parameter should beconsistent with the oppositeend through negotiation.It ranges from 1 to 31 for64Kbps signaling links.
TSNUM SPB E1 timeslotamount
It is the quantity ofconsecutive timeslots onthe E1 subunit of the SPBboard. These timeslots areused by this E1 signalinglink for outgoing the office.This parameter should beconsistent with that ofthe opposite end throughnegotiation. It is fixed as 1for 64Kpbs signaling link
76 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
LOOP Self loop In general, select NO.
INFO
Link info,including:
� E1: Thislink usesthe E1-typeinterface.
� N64KT1(supportT1-64 normalcode): Thislink usesthe T1-typeinterface, with64K normalcoding mode.
� I64KT1(supportT1-64invertedcode): Thislink usesthe T1-typeinterface, with64K inversecoding mode.
� 56KT1(supportT1-64K): Thislink usesthe T1-typeinterface, with56K codingmode.
Select E1.
For example, create a signaling link with the following require-ments.
� Signaling link set: 2
� Signaling link code: 0
� SMP module manages this signaling link: 3
� Unit No. of the SPB board: 721
� SPB E1: 10
� Initial time slot of E1: 16
� Number of time slot: 1
The specific command is as follows.
ADD N7LNKE1:LKSID=2,SLC=0,MODULE=3,NAME="TOSTP",ID=2,SPBUNT=721,CPU=1,E1=10,TS=16,TSNUM=1,LOOP=NO,INFO=E1,FCPLTHR=255;
END OF STEPS
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 77
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Creating a Signaling Route to the STP
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The signaling link set configuration is complete.
� The range of signaling route ID is configured in the resourcemanagement.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context The signaling routing configuration is used for specifying the sig-naling link set to be selected and the method when the signalingselects a route.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the signaling route to the STP. The command is ADDN7ROUTE.
Table 38 describes the parameters in the ADD N7ROUTE com-mand.
TABLE 38 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD N7ROUTE COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
NAME Alias
It is a mandatory parameterfor naming a signaling officefor easy recognition, consistingof 1~50 characters.
LKSID1 Linkset 1 ID
It is an optional parameter,designating the first signalinglink set used by this route. Ituses the signaling link set IDspecified in the ADD N7LKScommand, ranging from 0 to1024.
LKSID2 Linkset 2 ID
It is an optional parameter,designating the secondsignaling link set used by thisroute. In general, a routeto a directly connected officeonly has one signaling linkset. Then, enter 0 for thisparameter. If there are twoSTPs between the local officeand a quasi-associated office,respectively select the ID of thesignaling link sets to these twoSTPs, ranging from 0 to 1024.
ID Signaling routeID
It is a mandatory parameter,designating the global numberof the signaling route, rangingfrom 1 to 2000. This parameter
78 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
is used for selecting a signalingroute in the signaling officeconfiguration.
LPM Line modeamong linkset
In general, select RAND, whichmeans that link sets are sortedat random. The links in thestatic route table are sorted byturns. For example, there aretwo signaling links, link a andlink b. The sorting method is:a, b, b, a, a, b, b, a, a, b, b, a,a, b, b, a.
LPMIN Line mode in alink set
In general, the RAND option isselected, namely being sortedat random.
MANUAL Sort manually Select NO (Need not manual).
For example, create a signaling route with the following re-quirements.
� STP office ID: 2
� Alias: TOSTP
� Signaling link set No.: 2
� Signaling route No.: 2
The specific command is as follows.
ADD N7ROUTE:NAME="TOSTP",LKSID1=2,LKSID2=0,ID=2,LPM=RAND,LPMIN=RAND,MANUAL=NO;
END OF STEPS
Creating a Signaling Office to the STP
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The signaling route is configured.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Creating a signaling office to the STP means configuring the map-ping relationship between the destination signaling office and thesignaling route.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the signaling office to the STP. The command is ADDN7OFC.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 79
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Table 39 describes the parameters in the ADD N7OFC com-mand.
TABLE 39 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD N7OFC COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
ID Signaling office ID
It is a mandatoryparameter, designatingthe destination officewhere the signaling arrivesfinally. It is the HLRadjacent office ID specifiedin the ADD ADJOFCcommand, ranging from 1to 3000.
RT1
This parameterdesignates theserial number ofthe direct routeto the destinationadjacent office.
It is a mandatoryparameter, designatingthe route preferentiallyselected for sending thesignaling message tothe destination office.It is the signaling routeID specified in the ADDN7ROUTE command,ranging from 1 to 2000.
RT2
Alternate route1, indicating theserial number of thefirst alternate routeto the destinationadjacent office.
It is an optional parameter.The first alternative routeis selected when thesignaling message fails toreach the destination officethrough the direct route.It is the signaling routeID specified in the ADDN7ROUTE command,ranging from 0 to 2000.
RT3
Alternate route2, indicating theserial numberof the secondalternate routeto the destinationadjacent office.
It is an optional parameter,corresponding to the linkroute already configured.It is configured only whenthe first alternative routeis configured, ranging from0 to 2000.
RT4
Alternate route 3,indicating the serialnumber of the thirdalternate routeto the destinationadjacent office.
It is an optional parameter,corresponding to the linkroute already configured.It is configured only whenthe second alternativeroute is configured,ranging from 0 to 2000.
NAME AliasIt is a mandatoryparameter for naminga signaling office.
For example, create a signaling office with the following re-quirements.
� STP office ID: 2
80 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
� Direct-connected route number: 2
� Alias: TOSTP
The specific command is as follows.
ADDN7OFC:ID=2,RT1=2,RT2=0,RT3=0,RT4=0,NAME="TOSTP";
END OF STEPS
Creating a GT Translation Data
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The No. of the exchange to be configured is given.
� The GT translation selector is configured.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context The GT data are used for location update, call, and inter-officehandover. Configuring GT translation data should follow this prin-ciple: Understanding the service signaling flow and making clearthe signaling route. To response every message sent to the oppo-site end, the GT translation data both of the source address anddestination address of signaling must be configured at every endpoint or transfer point.
When configuring the location update data, the local office’s GTnumber is translated to office 0, namely, the local office, and theHLR’s GT number is translated to the HLR or the STP. Therefore,at least two types of the GT translation data are configured on theMSCS. In general, the following two kinds of GT translation dataare required.
E164 number: it requires configuring the local office’s MSC/VLRGT, MSISDN number, and MSC/VLR GT with location-area adjacentrelation.
E214 number: it requires configuring E214 format number corre-sponded by IMSI number (E212 format).
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the GT translation data. The command is ADD GT.
Table 40 describes the parameters in the ADD GT command.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 81
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
TABLE 40 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD GT COMMAND
Parame-ter Name
ParameterDescription
Instruction
GT Called GT number
It is a mandatory parameter,consisting of 1~20 digits. It isused to query the destinationGT number of message routing
OPGT Calling GT number
It is an optional parameter,consisting of 0~20 digits. It isthe number of the virtual MSCwhere the subscriber is locatedduring GT translation. DuringGT routing, query where thereare matched data according tothe VMSC where the subscriberis located and the target GTnumber. If there are matcheddata, perform GT translationbased on the matched data.If there is no matched data,perform translation again basedon that the calling GT numberis 0
GTSL GT translationselector
It is a mandatory parameter,ranging from 0 to 1023. Selectthe GT translation selectorrespectively according toconfigured E164 and E214numbers
GTDI Number change ID
It ranges from 0 to 256, withthe default value as 0. It is theID of flexible policy templatechange. The target GT numbercan be flexibly changed basedon it. When the GT translationresult contains a new GT, thisparameter does not take effect
OFCIDS Office ID and polllist
It is a mandatory parameter.The number of instance is1~4 when office ID groupingis supported. The numberof instance is 1~16 whenoffice ID grouping is notsupported. The formatis <OFCID>-<SELNUM>,representing the office ID to bepolled and the number of pollrespectively.
GRPWhether to supportgrouping of officeID
It is an optional parameter, witha default of NO
82 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
Parame-ter Name
ParameterDescription
Instruction
OFCGRP2
The office ID andpoll number of themultiple signalingpoints for thesecond group
It is an optional parameter. Thenumber of instance is 1~4 whenoffice ID grouping is supported.The user does not need to typewhen the office ID groupingis supported. The formatis <OFCID>-<SELNUM>,representing the office ID to bepolled and the number of pollrespectively.
OFCGRP3
The office ID andpoll number of themultiple signalingpoints for the thirdgroup
It is an optional parameter. Thenumber of instance is 1~4 whenoffice ID grouping is supported.The user does not need to typewhen the office ID groupingis supported. The formatis <OFCID>-<SELNUM>,representing the office ID to bepolled and the number of pollrespectively.
OFCGRP34
The office ID andpoll number of themultiple signalingpoints for the fourthgroup
It is an optional parameter. Thenumber of instance is 1~4 whenoffice ID grouping is supported.The user does not need to typewhen the office ID groupingis supported. The formatis <OFCID>-<SELNUM>,representing the office ID to bepolled and the number of pollrespectively.
SSN Subsystem No.
It is an optional parameter. Inthe GT routing mode, select thedefault value for SSN. In theDPC+SSN routing mode, selectthe corresponding SSN
NGT New GT number
It is an optional parameter,ranging from 0 to 20 ofcharacters. It represents thenew GT translation type.
NTRNTYPE New GT translationtype
It is an optional parameter,ranging from 0 to 255.It represents the new GTtranslation type.
TRNRLT
Whether thetranslation resultcontains DPCand SSN. Theoptions includesNULL (neitherDPC nor SSN is inthe result), DPC(containing DPCin the result), andSSN (containingSSN in the result)
It is an optional parameter. Inthe GT routing mode, select thedefault value for TRNRLT. In theDPC+SSN routing mode, selectthe DPC and SSN for TRNRLT
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 83
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Parame-ter Name
ParameterDescription
Instruction
RTTYPE
Routing mode,including GT(routing basedon GT) and DPC(routing based onDPC+SSN)
It is an optional parameter. Ingeneral, select GT for directconnection, and DPC+SSN fornon-direct connection
NGTTAG
Attribute of the newGT , including thefollowing options:
NGT (No new GT inthe GT translationresult): The GTnumber in the GTtranslation result isstill the called GTnumber.
NAI: The GTnumber in the GTtranslation resultis the new GTnumber in theNGT parameter,only containingNature Of AddressIndicator (NAI).
NTT: The GTnumber in the GTtranslation resultis the new GTnumber in theNGT parameter,only containingtranslation type.
NTTES: The GTnumber in the GTtranslation resultis the new GTnumber in theNGT parameter,only containingtranslation type,numbering plan,and coding design.
NTTNAI: The GTnumber in the GTtranslation resultis the new GTnumber in theNGT parameter,containingtranslation type,numbering plan,coding design, andNAI
It is an optional parameter. Itis the attribute of the new GTcontained in the GT translationresult. NGT(No new GT inthe GT translation result) isselected by default
84 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
Parame-ter Name
ParameterDescription
Instruction
SCCP
SCCP coding type,including:
INT (internationalcoding) andUSA(USA coding)
It is an optional parameter.It indicates the standard typereferred to by the SCCP codingin the GT translation result. Thedefault value is INT
VGT
GT varying withdifferent office IDs,including NO (notsupported), andYES (supported)
It is an optional parameter, withNO as the default value
TT
TT conversion,including NO (notsupported), andYES (supported)
It is an optional parameter, withNO as the default value
NAME Alias The alias of the GT translationdata for easy memory.
For example, create the GT translation data with the followingrequirements.
� GT number: 861390010
� GT translation selector ID: 1
� Office poll: 2-1
� Subsystem’s SSN number: SCCP
The specific command is as follows.
ADD GT:GT="861390010",GTSL=1,GTDI=0,OFCIDS="2"-"1",GRP=NO,SSN=SCCP,NTRNTYPE=0,TRNRLT="DPC"&"SSN",RTTYPE=GT,NGTTAG=NGT,SCCP=INT,VGT=NO,TT=NO,NPFLAG=NO,NPLAN=NULL,SRVTYPE=NULL;
END OF STEPS
SCP Data Configuration(Destination Network)Overview
TypicalNetworking
In the existing networks, the SCP is usually connected with theMSCS (SSP) through the STP in the signaling network. The pro-tocol stack structure at both the MSCS side and the SCP side areCAP/TCAP/SCCP/MTP. Figure 6 shows the networking diagram.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 85
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
FIGURE 6 NETWORKING BETWEEN THE ZXWN CS AND THE SCP
Data Collection Before data configuration, it is supposed to complete collectingand negotiating the related data from the MSCS to the SCP office.Table 41 lists the data to be collected. The parameter values arejust examples. Input these parameters according to the actualcondition during the practical data construction procedure.
TABLE 41 DATA COLLECTION TABLE
Parameter Items Parameter Values
ZXWN MSCS signaling point code(24-bit) 3.11.1
STP signaling point code (24-bit) 3.2.1
STP Signaling point code type 24-bit signaling point code
SP type STP
Association type Direct connect
Signaling link code 0
Signaling E1 number E1 10
Start timeslot number of E1 16TS
Quantity of timeslots 1
SCP GT 8613907552
CAMEL version CAMEL3
Definition of SCP service key Service key values of varioussubscribers
Data Configura-tion Flow
The SCP adjacent office data configuration contains the followingthree parts.
1. Creating a direct-connected link to the STP.
86 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
2. Creating the GT translation data to the SCP.
3. Creating intelligent service data.
Table 42 describes the SCP adjacent office data configuration flow.
TABLE 42 MSCS-SCP DATA CONFIGURATION FLOW
Steps Operations Related Command
1 Creating an STP adjacentoffice ADD ADJOFC
2 Creating a signaling link setto STP ADD N7LKS
3 Creating an MTP Link to theSTP ADD N7LNKE1
4 Creating a signaling route tothe STP ADD N7ROUTE
5 Creating a signaling office tothe STP ADD N7OFC
6 Creating a signalingsubsystem ADD N7SSN
7 Creating GT translationselector ADD GTT
8 Creating GT translation datato the SCP ADD GT
9 Creating the CAMELconfiguration ADD CAMEL
10 Creating CAMEL accesssubscription information ADD CAINFO
11 Creating called numberanalysis ADD TPDNAL
12 Creating interconnectionconversion for service keys ADD SVRTRANSKEY
13 Creating tone keys on theMGW tone board ADD TONESVC
Creating a Signaling Subsystem
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The No. of the exchange to be configured is given.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Perform this procedure for configuring a No.7 signaling subsys-tem. According to the subsystem, the lower-layer signaling is dis-tributed to the upper-layer service module for processing.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 87
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
In general, a subsystem is automatically generated during the ad-jacent office configuration. In this networking system, since SCPis forwarded through STP, configuring SCP adjacent office data isnot required. Therefore, it is required to create the subsystemmanually on the MML Terminal of NMS system.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create a signaling subsystem. The command is ADD N7SSN.
Table 43 describes the parameters in the ADD N7SSN com-mand.
TABLE 43 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD N7SSN COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
OFCID Office ID
Enter the office IDcorresponded by thesignaling point. 0represents the localoffice ID.
SSN Signaling pointsubsystem.
In this case, selectSSP_SCP.
ID N7SSN ID
This parameter identifiesthe serial number of thissubsystem, ranging from0 to 32784.
TAG With backup SSN Select No (Withoutbackup SSN) by default.
NAME AliasThe name of this signalingsubsystem to make iteasily recognized.
For example, create a subsystem with the following require-ments.
� Office ID: 0
� Signaling point subsystem: SSP_SCP
� Subsystem ID: 1
� Alias: SCPSSN
The specific command is as follows.
ADD N7SSN:OFCID=0,SSN=SSP_SCP,ID=1,TAG=NO,NAME="SCPSSN";
END OF STEPS
88 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
Creating GT Translation Data
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The No. of the exchange to be configured is given.
� The GT translation selector is configured.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Create the SCP GT data. The GT of the SCP is sent to the SCCPlayer of the STP office for it to convert the GT into the DPC + SSNof the SCP for addressing.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the GT translation data. The command is ADD GT.
Table 44 describes the parameters in the ADD GT command.
TABLE 44 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD GT COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instructions
GT Called GT number
It is a mandatoryparameter, consistingof 1~20 digits. It is usedto query the destinationGT number of messagerouting
GTSL GT translationselector
It is a mandatoryparameter, ranging from0 to 1023. Select theGT translation selectorrespectively accordingto configured E164 andE214 numbers
GTDI Number change ID
It ranges from 0 to 256,with the default value as0. It is the ID of flexiblepolicy template change.The target GT numbercan be flexibly changedbased on it. When theGT translation resultcontains a new GT, thisparameter does not takeeffect
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 89
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instructions
OFCIDS Office ID and poll list
It is a mandatoryparameter. The numberof instance is 0~3000when office ID grouping issupported. The numberof instance is 1~64 whenoffice ID grouping is notsupported. The formatis <OFCID>-<SELNUM>,representing the officeID to be polled andthe number of pollrespectively.
GRP Whether to supportgrouping of office ID
It is an optionalparameter, with a defaultof NO
OFCGRP2
The office ID andpoll number of themultiple signalingpoints for the secondgroup
It is an optionalparameter. The numberof instance is 1~4 whenoffice ID grouping issupported. The user doesnot need to type whenthe office ID grouping issupported. The formatis <OFCID>-<SELNUM>,representing the officeID to be polled andthe number of pollrespectively.
OFCGRP3
The office ID andpoll number of themultiple signalingpoints for the thirdgroup
It is an optionalparameter. The numberof instance is 1~4 whenoffice ID grouping issupported. The user doesnot need to type whenthe office ID grouping issupported. The formatis <OFCID>-<SELNUM>,representing the officeID to be polled andthe number of pollrespectively.
OFCGRP34
The office ID andpoll number of themultiple signalingpoints for the fourthgroup
It is an optionalparameter. The numberof instance is 1~4 whenoffice ID grouping issupported. The user doesnot need to type whenthe office ID grouping issupported. The formatis <OFCID>-<SELNUM>,representing the officeID to be polled andthe number of pollrespectively.
90 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instructions
SSN Subsystem No.
It is an optionalparameter. In the GTrouting mode, selectthe default value forSSN. In the DPC+SSNrouting mode, select thecorresponding SSN
NGT New GT number
It is an optionalparameter, ranging from0 to 20 of characters. Itrepresents the new GTtranslation type.
NTRNTYPE New GT translationtype
It is an optionalparameter, ranging from0 to 255. It representsthe new GT translationtype.
TRNRLT
Whether thetranslation resultcontains DPC andSSN. The optionsincludes NULL(neither DPC norSSN is in the result),DPC (containing DPCin the result), andSSN (containing SSNin the result)
It is an optionalparameter. In the GTrouting mode, select thedefault value for TRNRLT.In the DPC+SSN routingmode, select the DPCand SSN for TRNRLT
RTTYPE
Routing mode,including GT (routingbased on GT) andDPC (routing basedon DPC+SSN)
It is an optionalparameter. In general,select GT for directconnection, andDPC+SSN for non-directconnection
NGTTAG
Attribute of the newGT , including thefollowing options:
NGT (No new GT inthe GT translationresult): The GTnumber in the GTtranslation result isstill the called GTnumber.
NAI: The GT numberin the GT translationresult is the newGT number in theNGT parameter, onlycontaining NatureOf Address Indicator(NAI).
NTT: The GT numberin the GT translationresult is the newGT number in the
It is an optionalparameter. It is theattribute of the newGT contained in theGT translation result.NGT(No new GT in theGT translation result) isselected by default
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 91
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instructions
NGT parameter,only containingtranslation type.
NTTES: The GTnumber in the GTtranslation resultis the new GTnumber in theNGT parameter,only containingtranslation type,numbering plan, andcoding design.
NTTNAI: The GTnumber in the GTtranslation resultis the new GTnumber in theNGT parameter,containingtranslation type,numbering plan,coding design, andNAI
SCCP
SCCP coding type,including:
INT (internationalcoding) andUSA(USA coding)
It is an optionalparameter. It indicatesthe standard typereferred to by theSCCP coding in theGT translation result. Thedefault value is INT
VGT
GT varying withdifferent office IDs,including NO (notsupported), and YES(supported)
It is an optionalparameter, with NOas the default value
TT
TT conversion,including NO (notsupported), and YES(supported)
It is an optionalparameter, with NOas the default value
NAME AliasThe alias of the GTtranslation data for easymemory.
For example, create the GT translation data with the followingrequirements.
� GT number: 8613907552
� GT translation selector ID: 1
� Office poll: 2-1 (here, the office is STP)
� Subsystem’s SSN number: SCCP
The specific command is as follows.
ADD GT:GT="8613907552",GTSL=1,GTDI=0,OFCIDS="2"-"1",GRP=NO,SSN=SCCP,NTRNTYPE=0,TRNRLT="DPC"&"S
92 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
SN",RTTYPE=GT,NGTTAG=NGT,SCCP=INT,VGT=NO,TT=NO,NPFLAG=NO,NPLAN=NULL,SRVTYPE=NULL;
END OF STEPS
Creating the CAMEL Configuration
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The No. of the exchange to be configured is given.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
� The support capability of local office is configured as "NULL" inthe local office mobile data configuration.
� The No.7 signaling subsystem of the local office is generatedproperly. (Query it with the SHOW N7SSN command.)
Context Creating the CAMEL configuration is to make the intelligent sub-scriber subscribed OCSI in the HLR properly trigger the IN service,and make and receive a call.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the CAMEL configuration. The command is ADDCAMEL.
Table 45 describes the parameters in the ADD CAMEL com-mand.
TABLE 45 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD CAMEL COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
VER
CAMEL phase,including:
� None: Notsupported
� CAMEL1: SupportCAMEL1
� CAMEL2: SupportCAMEL2
� CAMEL3: SupportCAMEL3
� CAMEL4: SupportCAMEL4
It is an optionalparameter. The CAMELversion supported bythe local office mustbe consistent with thatsupported by the SCP.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 93
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
CNMACT
Approach of highversion CAMELsubscription info,including:
� REJ (Reject)
� Ignore (Ignore)
Type the default valueREJ (REJ).
C1ACT
Approach of CAMEL1subscription info,including:
� REJ (Reject)
� Ignore (Ignore)
� ACPT (Accept)
Select ACPT, by default.
INAPTYPE INAP protocol type Select CHINA, bydefault.
For example, create the CAMEL configuration with the followingrequirements.
� CAMEL phase: CAMEL3
� Approach of high version CAMEL subscription information:REJ (reject)
� Approach of CAMEL1 subscription information: ACPT (ac-cept)
The specific command is as follows.
ADD CAMEL:VER=CAMEL3,CNMACT=REJ,C1ACT=ACPT,INAPTYPE=CHINA;
END OF STEPS
Recharge and Query Configuration
Creating CAMEL Access Subscription Information
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The No. of the exchange to be configured is known.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
� The support capability of local office is configured as "NULL" inthe local office mobile data configuration.
� The No.7 signaling subsystem of the local office is generatedproperly. (Query it with the SHOW N7SSN command.)
Context The access code of the call service can trigger the intelligent net-work service.
94 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the CAMEL subscription information. The command isADD CAINFO.
Table 46 describes the main parameters in the command.
TABLE 46 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD CAINFO COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
CAMELIDX CAMEL informationindex
It is a mandatory parameter,which is an integer,ranging from 1 to 255.It is used to set theintra-system number ofthis configuration for usingin the configuration of thenumber analysis result. Itis not to be repeated withany other.
CIC Carrier identitycode
It is a mandatory parameter,consisting of 1~6 numericcharacters.
SCPSCP address(Country code +National Number)
It is a mandatory stringparameter with a lengthranging from 1 to 16 digits.It is the GT number ofthe SCP. It must be in theinternational format.
SKEY External servicekey
It is a mandatory parameter,which is an integer, rangingfrom 1 to 4294967295. It isuniquely identify the serviceafter the negotiation withthe SCP.
NAME Alias
It is a mandatory parameter,consisting of 1~50characters. It is usedto describe the CAMELaccess subscription type tomake it easily recognized.
ID CAMELconfiguration ID
It is an optional parameter,which is an integer, rangingfrom 1 to 65535.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 95
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
NUMPLAN
Numbering plan,including:
� E164(ISDN/phonenumberingplan E164)
� X121 (Datanumberingplan X121)
� F69 (Telegraphnumberingplan F69)
It is an optional parameter.Select E164.
VER
CAMEL phase,including:
� None: Notsupported
� CAMEL1:SupportCAMEL1
� CAMEL2:SupportCAMEL2
� CAMEL3:SupportCAMEL3
� CAMEL4:SupportCAMEL4
It is an optional parameter.This parameter is set afterthe negotiation with theSCP. Currently, the versionCAMEL3 is frequently used.
DCH
Default callhandling,including:
� HOLD (Holdcall)
� RELEASE(Release call)
It is an optional parameter.Configure it according to theactual service requirements.Select HOLD by default.
For example, create the CAMEL access subscription informationwith the following requirements.
� CAMEL index: 1
� SCP address: 8613907552
� External service key: 1
� Alias: PPS
� Number plan: ISDN/phone numbering plan E164
The command is as follows.
96 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ADD CAINFO:CAMELIDX=1,CIC="111",SCP="8613907552",SKEY=1,NAME="PPS",NUMPLAN=E164,VER=CAMEL3,DCH=HOLD;
END OF STEPS
Creating Called Number Analysis
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The No. of the exchange to be configured is given.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
� The CAMEL access subscription information is configured.
� The number analyzer entry is configured.
Context The subscriber must dial special service access number to triggerthe IN services, and then the system performs the number analy-sis. If the number analysis result is the IN service, the IN serviceflow is triggered. Therefore, in the ZXWN MSCS system, the num-ber analysis result corresponded by the called number must beconfigured as the IN service type. In this way, the IN service canbe triggered.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the called number analysis. The command is ADDTPDNAL.
Table 47 describes the parameters in the ADD TPDNAL com-mand.
TABLE 47 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TPDNAL COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
ENTR Analyzer entry
It is a mandatory parameter,which is an integer, rangingfrom 1 to 1000. Select thecorresponding analyzer entryof the analyzed numberprefix. This analyzer entry isconfigured by the ADD ENTRcommand.
DIGIT AnalyzedNumber
It is a character string,consisting of 0~9, *, #, D, orE.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 97
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
NAME Alias
It is a mandatory parameter,consisting of 0~50 characters.It is used to specificallydescribe the called numberanalysis to make it easilyrecognized.
CAT Call service types
It is an optional parameter,with a default of NULL. It isused to specify the service typetriggered by this number, anddetermine the direction of thiscall. Select an IN service type.Select SSP in this case.
RST1 Number analysisresult 1
It is an optional integer-typeparameter, ranging from 0 to2147483647. Keep the default,because this configuration doesnot take effect here.
RST2 Number analysisresult 2
It is an optional integer-typeparameter, ranging from 0 to255. Select the CANELIDX(CAMEL information index)already configured in theCAMEL access subscriptioninformation.
RST3 Number analysisresult 3
It is an optional integer-typeparameter, ranging from 0to 2147483647. Select theCANELIDX (CAMEL informationindex) already configured inthe CAMEL access subscriptioninformation.
CHAINAL Chain analysisindex
It is used to specify theanalysis index number of therouting chain. This parametermust be defined by the ADDCHAINAL command at first.Then it can be indexed here.This parameter takes effectonly when the call service typeis outgoing service (includingvarious outgoing services).
RNLEN MNP routingnumber length
It is an optional parameter.Enter an integer ranging from0 to 40.
98 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
MINLEN Minimumnumber length
It is an optional parameter,which is an integer rangingfrom 0 to 255, with a defaultof 3. It is used to specify theminimum digit length of thecalled number. If the callednumber is shorter than thislength, the call failure occurs.In general, it is configured as6.
MAXLEN Maximumnumber length
It is an optional parameter,which is an integer rangingfrom 0 to 255, with a defaultof 20. It is used to specify themaximum digit length of thedialed number. If the callednumber exceeds this length,the call failure occurs. Ingeneral, it is configured as 11.
For example, create the called number analysis for the SSPrecharge query service with the following requirements.
� Analyzed number: 13800138000
� SN of number analyzer entry: 1
� Service type: SSP
� Number analysis result 1: 1
The specific command is as follows.
ADD TPDNAL:ENTR=1,DIGIT="13800138000",NAME="Recharge Service",SPECRST=0,SPECIDX=0,CAT=SSP,RST1=1,RST2=0,RST3=0,CHAINAL=0,RNLEN=0,MINLEN=3,MAXLEN=20,OVLYPRI=NO,REL=NO,NET=1,NAT=DEF,OPDDICONT=NO,TPDDICONT=NO,OPDDI=0,TPDDI=0,OPDLYDDI=0,TPDLYDDI=0,DDIOVERB=0,IWVIDEO=LSUP,TIMELMT=0,AUXDAS=0,A6=0,PFXLEN=0,INSRV=INM,FAXIDX=0,AVIDX=0,DVIDX=0,ADATAIDX=0,DDATAIDX=0,DDCPLAY=NONE,VAD=INVALID,CALLSERVPRILVL=INVALID,RERTS=0,INCHAIN=NO,BICT=NO,ICT=0,ICTT=10,GNM=NORMAL,STBILL=INVALID,HOPDAS=0,MCA=NO,IVVR=NO,WANTL=0,IMSCENTR=NO;
END OF STEPS
Configuration Related to IntelligentTone Play
The data related to the basic tone and the intelligent tone are cre-ated during the tone-related configuration is created in batches.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 99
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
The intelligent tone play requires attention to the configuration ofservice keys. Service key divides into the internal service keys andthe external service keys. External key code is delivered by theSCP, while internal service key code is the corresponded internalservice code.
Therefore, the intelligent tone play configuration includes the in-terconnection conversion configuration of external service keysand the service key configuration of the MGW tone board.
The internal service keys of the ZXWN MSCS are described in Table48.
TABLE 48 INTERNAL SERVICE KEYS
Service Service Key Value
Basic services 1
PPS services 2
VPMN services 3
17951 IP services 4
Mobile phone rechargeable card services 5
Calling/called party paid services 6
Mobile Eight Hundred services 8
Zone– and time-dependent services 41
Creating Interconnection Conversion for ServiceKeys
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The conversion of service key to service tone ID is created inbatches on the MSCS.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Creating the CAMEL tone play data is to configure the mappingrelationship between the internal and external service keys, thusto convert the external service key into the internal one. After theintelligent service is triggered, the MSCS can implement the ser-vice processing flow properly, and the MGW can play the intelligentservice tone correctly.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the interconnection conversion for service keys. Thecommand is ADD SVRTRANSKEY.
100 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
Table 49 describes the parameters in the ADD SVRTRANSKEYcommand.
TABLE 49 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD SVRTRANSKEY COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
ID Configuration ID
It is an optionalinteger-type parameter,ranging from 0 to4294967295. This IDis used inside the system.It is not to be repeated withany other.
SVCKEYService key coding.Refer to Table 50 forthe options involved.
It is a mandatoryparameter. Select itaccording to the actuallyconfigured service type.
NAME Alias
It is a mandatoryparameter, consistingof 1~50 characters. Itis used to describe anservice-key interconnectionconversion to make it easilyrecognized.
SCPTYPE SCP type
It is an optionalinteger-type parameter,ranging from 0 to 255. Itidentifies the SCP type.Currently, it is configuredas 0.
TABLE 50 SERVICE KEY CODES
Options Meanings
TRDT Traditional services
PPS PPS services
VPMN VPMN services
17951IP 17951IP services
MBCARD Handset voucher card services
PAY Calling/called payment services
MB800 Mobile 800 services
SMSPPS SMSPPS
IVC New voucher service tone
IGWVPMN IGWVPMN services
IGWPPS IGWPPS services
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 101
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Options Meanings
UPTANN1.2 Universal one number
ONS One Number
ES Universal in students service
IPVN2 IPVN2
CLTM Cell and time division service
IPZHTC IP direct-bus service
LTIC All-purpose IC service
MS Universal in multi-cities
121V1 Uniform showing incoming call
ACC_200 ACC_200
200V1 Changing number acknowledgment serv-ice
RC Different phone handling tone
ACC_300 ACC_300
VOT VOT
VPN VPN
UPT UPT
FPH FPH
For example, create a service-key interconnection conversionwith the following requirements.
� External service key code: 11
� Service key code: PPS service
� Alias: PPS service
� ID: 1
� SCP type: 0
The command is as follows.
ADD SVRTRANSKEY:EXSVCKEY=11,SVCKEY=PPS,NAME="PPS Service",ID=1,SCPTYPE=0;
END OF STEPS
Creating Tone Keys on the MGW Tone Board
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The corresponded MRB unit is created on the MGW.
102 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Perform this procedure for configuring the service keys on theMGW tone board.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create a service key on the tone board. The command is ADDTONESVC.
Table 51 describes the parameters in the ADD TONESVC com-mand.
TABLE 51 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TONESVC COMMAND
Parame-ter Name
ParameterDescription Instruction
UNIT Tone unit number
It is a mandatory integer-typeparameter, ranging from 1 to2000. Select the MRB unitnumber of the intelligent tone.
SUNIT Tone subunitnumber
It is a mandatory integer-typeparameter, ranging from 1 to255. Enter the TONE subunitNo. of the MRB.
SKEY1 Service key 1
SKEY2 Service key 2
SKEY3 Service key 3
SKEY4 Service key 4
SKEY5 Service key 5
SKEY6 Service key 6
It is an optional integer-typeparameter, ranging from 0 to65535. Configure the internalservice key delivered by theSCP corresponded by this toneresource.
NAME Alias
It is a mandatory parameter,consisting of 1~50 characters.It is used to describe atone unit to make it easilyrecognized.
For example, create the service key on the tone board with thefollowing requirements.
� Tone unit number: 1209
� Subunit number: 9
The specific command is as follows.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 103
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ADD TONESVC:UNIT=1209,SUNIT=9,SKEY1=1,SKEY2=1,SKEY3=1,SKEY4=1,SKEY5=1,SKEY6=1,NAME="SVC1";
END OF STEPS
SMC Data ConfigurationOverview
TypicalNetworking
In the existing networks, the SMC is usually connected to the MSCSthrough the STP in the signaling network. The protocol stacks atthe MSCS and the SMC sides both use the MAP/TCAP/SCCP/MTPmethod. The MAP protocol is employed between the MSCS andthe SMC. This protocol may be borne either on the TDM or theIP. In general, the current networking mode uses the TDM bearer.Figure 7 shows the networking diagram.
FIGURE 7 NETWORKING BETWEEN ZXWN CS AND SMC
Data Collection Before data configuration, it is supposed to complete collectingand negotiating the related data from the MSCS to the SMC office.Table 52 lists the data to be collected. The parameter values arejust examples. Input these parameters according to the actualcondition during the practical data construction procedure.
104 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
TABLE 52 DATA COLLECTION TABLE
Parameter Items Parameter Values
ZXWN MSCS signaling point code (24-bit) 3.11.1
STP signaling point code (24-bit) 3.2.1
STP Signaling point code type 24-bit signaling pointcode
SP type STP
Association type Direct connect
Signaling link code 0
Signaling E1 number E1 10
Start timeslot number of E1 16 TS
Quantity of timeslots 1
SMC GT 8613907553
Data Configura-tion Flow
Table 53 describes the data configuration flow of the SMC adjacentoffice.
TABLE 53 DATA CONFIGURATION FLOW OF SMC ADJACENT OFFICE
Steps Operations Related Command
1 Creating an STP adjacentoffice ADD ADJOFC
2 Creating a signaling link setto the STP ADD N7LKS
3 Creating a signaling link tothe STP ADD N7LNKE1
4 Creating a signaling route tothe STP ADD N7ROUTE
5 Creating a signaling office tothe STP ADD N7OFC
6 Creating GT translation datato the SMC ADD GT
7 Modifying VLR-supportedSservices SET VLRSRVEN
8 Modifying mobile data oflocal office SET MSCCFG
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 105
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Creating GT Translation Data
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The No. of the exchange to be configured is given.
� The GT translation selector is configured.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Perform this procedure to configure the SMC GT data. The GT ofthe SMC is sent to the SCCP layer of the STP office, and the SCCPlayer of the STP office converts the GT into the DPC + SSN, andthen deliver it to the MTP layer for addressing.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the GT translation data. The command is ADD GT.
Table 54 describes the parameters in the ADD GTT command.
TABLE 54 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD GT COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
GT Called GT number
It is a mandatoryparameter, consistingof 1~20 digits. Itis used to query thedestination GT numberof message routing
GTSL GT translation selector
It is a mandatoryparameter, rangingfrom 0 to 1023. Selectthe GT translationselector respectivelyaccording to configuredE164 and E214numbers
GTDI Number change ID
It ranges from 0 to256, with the defaultvalue as 0. It is theID of flexible policytemplate change. Thetarget GT number canbe flexibly changedbased on it. When theGT translation resultcontains a new GT, thisparameter does nottake effect
106 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
OFCIDS Office ID and poll list
It is a mandatoryparameter. Thenumber of instanceis 0~3000 whenoffice ID grouping issupported. The numberof instance is 1~64when office ID groupingis not supported.The format is<OFCID>-<SELNUM>,representing the officeID to be polled andthe number of pollrespectively.
GRP Whether to supportgrouping of office ID
It is an optionalparameter, with adefault of NO
OFCGRP2
The office ID and pollnumber of the multiplesignaling points for thesecond group
It is an optionalparameter. The numberof instance is 1~4 whenoffice ID grouping issupported. The userdoes not need to typewhen the office IDgrouping is supported.The format is<OFCID>-<SELNUM>,representing the officeID to be polled andthe number of pollrespectively.
OFCGRP3
The office ID and pollnumber of the multiplesignaling points for thethird group
It is an optionalparameter. The numberof instance is 1~4 whenoffice ID grouping issupported. The userdoes not need to typewhen the office IDgrouping is supported.The format is<OFCID>-<SELNUM>,representing the officeID to be polled andthe number of pollrespectively.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 107
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
OFCGRP34
The office ID and pollnumber of the multiplesignaling points for thefourth group
It is an optionalparameter. The numberof instance is 1~4 whenoffice ID grouping issupported. The userdoes not need to typewhen the office IDgrouping is supported.The format is<OFCID>-<SELNUM>,representing the officeID to be polled andthe number of pollrespectively.
SSN Subsystem No.
It is an optionalparameter. In theGT routing mode, selectthe default value forSSN. In the DPC+SSNrouting mode, selectthe corresponding SSN
NGT New GT number
It is an optionalparameter, rangingfrom 0 to 20 ofcharacters. Itrepresents the newGT translation type.
NTRNTYPE New GT translation type
It is an optionalparameter, rangingfrom 0 to 255. Itrepresents the new GTtranslation type.
TRNRLT
Whether the translationresult contains DPCand SSN. The optionsincludes NULL (neitherDPC nor SSN is inthe result), DPC(containing DPC inthe result), and SSN(containing SSN in theresult)
It is an optionalparameter. In theGT routing mode,select the defaultvalue for TRNRLT. Inthe DPC+SSN routingmode, select the DPCand SSN for TRNRLT
RTTYPE
Routing mode,including GT (routingbased on GT) andDPC (routing based onDPC+SSN)
It is an optionalparameter. Ingeneral, select GTfor direct connection,and DPC+SSN fornon-direct connection
108 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
NGTTAG
Attribute of the new GT, including the followingoptions:
NGT (No new GT in theGT translation result):The GT number in theGT translation resultis still the called GTnumber.
NAI: The GT number inthe GT translationresult is the newGT number in theNGT parameter, onlycontaining NatureOf Address Indicator(NAI).
NTT: The GT number inthe GT translationresult is the newGT number in theNGT parameter, onlycontaining translationtype.
NTTES: The GT numberin the GT translationresult is the newGT number in theNGT parameter, onlycontaining translationtype, numbering plan,and coding design.
NTTNAI: The GTnumber in the GTtranslation result isthe new GT numberin the NGT parameter,containing translationtype, numbering plan,coding design, and NAI
It is an optionalparameter. It is theattribute of the newGT contained in theGT translation result.NGT(No new GT in theGT translation result) isselected by default
SCCP
SCCP coding type,including:
INT (internationalcoding) and USA(USAcoding)
It is an optionalparameter. It indicatesthe standard typereferred to by theSCCP coding in the GTtranslation result. Thedefault value is INT
VGT
GT varying withdifferent office IDs,including NO (notsupported), and YES(supported)
It is an optionalparameter, with NOas the default value
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 109
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
TT
TT conversion,including NO (notsupported), and YES(supported)
It is an optionalparameter, with NOas the default value
NAME AliasThe alias of the GTtranslation data foreasy memory.
For example, create the GT translation data with the followingrequirements.
� GT number: 8613907553
� GT translation selector ID: 1
� Office poll: 2-1 (here, the office is STP)
� Subsystem’s SSN number: SCCP
The specific command is as follows.
ADD GT:GT="8613907553",GTSL=1,GTDI=0,OFCIDS="2"-"1",GRP=NO,SSN=SCCP,NTRNTYPE=0,TRNRLT="DPC"&"SSN",RTTYPE=GT,NGTTAG=NGT,SCCP=INT,VGT=NO,TT=NO,NPFLAG=NO,NPLAN=NULL,SRVTYPE=NULL;
END OF STEPS
Modifying VLR-Supported Services
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The No. of the exchange to be configured is given.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context For details about VLR-supported services, refer to ZXWN MSCSMSC Server Data Configuration Guide. Here we only modify therelated parameters for the VLR to support the MO/MT SMS ser-vices.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Modify the VLR-supported services to make the VLR supportingthe MO/MT SMS.
SET VLRSRVEN:TELESRV="TSMS_MTPP"&"OSMS_MOPP";
110 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
Where, TSMS_MTPP means MT SMS, while OSMS_MOPPmeans MO SMS.
END OF STEPS
Modifying Mobile Data of Local Office
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The No. of the exchange to be configured is given.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context For details, refer to “Local Office Data Configuration” in ZXWNMSCS MSC Server Data Configuration Guide. Here, we only modifythe related parameters to make the local office support the SMSservice.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Perform this procedure for modify the mobile data of the localoffice to make it support the SMS service. The command is asfollows.
SET MSCCFG:ENTAG="SMS";
Where, The parameter SMS means that the local office sup-ports the SMS service.
END OF STEPS
PSTN/2G MSC (M3UA)Data ConfigurationOverview
TypicalNetworking
TUP/ISUP signaling is used between ZXWN MSCS and PSTN/MSC.The signaling from MSCS to MGW uses the IP bearer, and MGWimplements the signaling transfer between the IP bearer and theTMD bearer. In the existing network, ZXWN MSCS is usually in-terconnected with the opposite switch in the M3UA mode. Figure8 shows the networking structure and interface protocols.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 111
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
FIGURE 8 INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN ZXWN MSCS AND PSTN/MSC
Data Collection Before data configuration, it is supposed to complete collecting therelated data of MSCS-to-MGW, and MGW-to-PSTN/MSC. Table 55and Table 56 list the data to be collected. The parameter valuesare just examples. Input these parameters according to the actualcondition during the practical data construction procedure.
TABLE 55 DATA FOR INTERCONNECTION WITH THE MGW
Parameter Items Parameter Values
Real interface address of ZXWN MSCS 192.168.1.11
Real interface address of ZXWN MGW 192.168.1.31
ZXWN MSCS signaling point code(24-bit) 3.11.1
Signaling point code (24-bit) of ZXWNMGW (SG) 3.31.1
SCTP port No. of ZXWN MSCS (client) 3001
SCTP port No. of ZXWN MGW (server) 3001
TABLE 56 DATA FOR INTERCONNECTION WITH THE PSTN/MSC OFFICE
Parameter Items Parameter Values
Signaling point code of the PSTN/MSCswitch 3.28.1
Inter-office signaling type ISUP
CIC code of the junction circuit 0~31
Data Configura-tion Flow
This section introduces the data configuration on the MSCS foradding a PSTN/2G MSC adjacent office under the precondition thatthe H248 data between the MGW and the MSCS are configured,and that the MGW is successfully registered to the MSCS. Table
112 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
57 describes the configuration flow of the PSTN/2G MSC adjacentoffice data.
TABLE 57 CONFIGURATION FLOW OF PSTN/2G MSC ADJACENT OFFICEDATA
Steps Operations Related Command
1 Creating 2G MSC/PSTNadjacent office ADD ADJOFC
2 Creating a DT trunk group ADD TG DT
3 Creating a PCM system ADD SPCM
4 Creating an outgoing route ADD RT
5 Creating an outgoing route set ADD RTS
6 Creating an outgoing route link ADD CHAIN
ADD SCTPCONN
ADD ASP
ADD AS7
Creating the associations andthe M3UA data switched by thesignaling
ADD M3UART
8 Creating the SIO-locating-AS ADD SIOLOCAS
Creating 2G MSC/PSTN AdjacentOffice
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The E1 line between the MGW and the 2G MSC/PSTN is wellconnected. Meanwhile, the signaling interworking data isplanned and negotiated.
� The configuration of local office data is complete.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
� The range of adjacent office number is configured in the re-source management.
Context Perform this procedure to configure the basic information of the2G MSC/PSTN adjacent office.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create a 2G MSC/PSTN adjacent office. The command is ADDADJOFC.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 113
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Table 58 describes the parameters in the ADD ADJOFC com-mand.
TABLE 58 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD ADJOFC COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
ASSOTYPE
Association type,including:
� AM_SURE(directconnectionmode)
� AM_QUASI(half directconnectionmode)
� AM_NONE(noneconnectionmode).
Select AM_QUASI.
BANDFLAG
Broadbandattribute,including:
� YES (Supportbroadbandattribute)
� No (Notsupportbroadbandattribute)
Select NO.
OFCTYPE Adjacent OfficeTypes
If the adjacent office is 2GMSC, select MSCSERVERor GMSCSERVERaccording to its functions.If the adjacent office isPSTN, select PSTN.
For example, create a 2G MSC adjacent office with the followingrequirements., with the , , , and the . The 24-bit signaling pointcoding mode and the quasi-associated mode are adopted.
� Office ID: 28
� Network type: 1
� User alias: TO2GMSC
� Destination SPC: 3.28.1
� Adjacent office type: GMSCSERVER
� Association type: half direct connection mode
The specific command is as follows.
ADD ADJOFC:ID=28,NAME="2G MSC",NET=1,OFCTYPE="GMSCSERVER",SPCFMT=TRIPLE_DEC,SPCTYPE=24,DPC="3.28.1",RC="25",ASSOTYPE=AM_SURE,SPTYPE=STEP,SSF=NATIONAL,SUBPROTTYPE=DEFAULT,TEST=YES,BAND
114 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
FLAG=NO,PRTCTYPE=CHINA,CLST=65535,INFO="CIC_PCM",RELATEDOFC1=0;
END OF STEPS
Configuration Related to Trunk andRoute
Creating a DT Trunk Group
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The No. of the exchange to be configured is given.
� The adjacent office pointed by the trunk group is created.
� The range of the trunk group number is configured in the re-source management configuration.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Perform this procedure to create a DT trunk group.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create a DT trunk group by executing command ADD TG DT.
Table 59 describes the parameters in the ADD TG DT com-mand.
TABLE 59 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TG DT COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
TG Trunk group ID
It is a mandatoryparameter. It is usedto define a trunk group,and needs to be planned inthe resource managementsystem in advance
OFCID of the office wherethe trunk groupbelongs
It is a mandatoryparameter. It is used tospecify the correspondingoffice of the trunk group.This parameter must bedefined by command ADDADJOFC at first. Then itcan be indexed here
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 115
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
MODULE Module where thetrunk group belongs
It is a mandatoryparameter. It indicatesa service module. Differenttrunk groups to the sameoffice need to be allocatedto different CMP modules
NDNode No. of the MGWwhere the trunk groupbelongs
It is a mandatoryparameter. Select the MGWtopology node connectedwith the 2G MSC/PSTNnode
NAME User alias
It is an optional parameter,consisting of 0~50characters. It is usedto specifically describe atrunk group to make iteasily recognized
SIGLINE
Inter-office line signalidentification. Optionsinclude:
� BSC: BSC GroundCircuit
� TUP: InterofficeCommon ChannelSignaling TUP
� ISUP: InterofficeCommon ChannelSignaling ISUP
� DLC1: InterofficeChannelAssociatedSignalingDL/DC(1)
� R2: R2 Signaling
� BICC: BICC Type
� ANU: ANUSignaling
� SORMUP: SORMUPSignaling
It is an optional parameter.It is used to identify the linetype of this trunk. Selectit according to inter-officesignaling. For the Aiinterface, select ISUP] orTUP
KIND
Trunk group types,including the followingthree types:
IN (incoming trunkgroup): Indicatesthat the local officeprocesses theincoming calls fromthe peer-end office.
OUT (outgoing trunkgroup): Indicates thatthe local office onlyprocesses the outgoing
It is an optional parameter.If BSC is selected for theinter-office line signalidentification, it must beconfigured to BIDIR
116 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
calls to the peer-endoffice.
BIDIR (Two-waytrunk group):Indicates that the localoffice processes boththe incoming callsfrom the peer-endoffice and the outgoingcalls to the peer-endoffice
BWAY
Bearer establishmentdirection, including thefollowing three types:
NODIR: Theinter-office beareris established withoutdirection.
BACK: The inter-officebearer is establishedbased on the backwardmode.
FORWD: Theinter-office beareris established basedon the forward mode
It is an optional parameter.Select NODIR for DT trunkgroups
THD Overload controlthreshold
It is an optional parameter,ranging from 0 to 100,with a default of 100. Thisparameter takes effectwhen levels of congestionoccur and load control isrequired
CICSEL
Circuit selectingmodes, including:
MIN: Every time whenthe system selects atrunk circuit, it alwaysbegins with the circuitwith the minimumnumber. This modecan implement thepreferred plan of trunkcircuits.
MAX: Every time whenthe system selects atrunk circuit, it alwaysbegins with the circuitwith the maximumnumber. This modecan implement thepreferred plan of trunkcircuits.
CYC: Every time whenthe system selectsa trunk circuit, italways begins with thecircuit next to the one
It is an optional parameter.It is used to specify thetrunk circuit selecting policyof the system within thistrunk group, with a defaultof CYC. If this No.7 trunkgroup is a two-way trunkgroup, it is recommendedto set the circuit selectingmode to ODD/EVEN modeto prevent contentionwhen two exchanges selectcircuits
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 117
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
previously selected.Suppose the numbersof the trunk circuitsin a trunk group inascending order are“TKC0, TKC1, …. ,TKCn”. If TKC0 isselected at the firsttime, the system willselect the trunk circuitin the order of “TKC0®TKC1®…®TKCn®TKC0®TKC1®…®TKCn”.
ODD: Every time whenthe system selects atrunk circuit, it alwaysselects the circuit withan odd number.
EVEN: Every timewhen the systemselects a trunk circuit,it always selects thecircuit with an evennumber.
IDLE: Every timewhen the systemselects a trunk circuit,it always selects theidlest circuit.
BUSY: Every timewhen the systemselects a trunk circuit,it always selects thebusiest circuit
DAS DAS for the callednumber
It is an optional parameter.It is used to analyzethe called number inan incoming call. Thisparameter must be definedby command ADD DASat first. Then it can beindexed here
Example: Create a DT trunk group to the 2G MSC office withthe following requirements:
� Trunk group ID: 28
� ID of the office where the trunk group belongs: 28
� User alias: DT28
� No. of the CMP module where the trunk group belongs: 4
� MGW topology node No.: 101
� Other parameters: Adopt the default values.
The specific command is as follows.
ADD TG DT:TG=28,OFC=28,MODULE=4,ND=101,NAME="DT28",SIGLINE=ISUP,KIND=BIDIR,BWAY=NODIR,THD
118 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
=100,CICSEL=ODD,DAS=0,SIPDAS=0,OPDAS=1,PREDAS=0,DDI=0,OPDDI=0,MINNAT=0,MAXNAT=26,MININT=0,MAXINT=26,INREG=INVALID,OUTREG=INVALID,COLEN=10,BUSYRATE=100,ROAMDAS=0,Q850CCIDX=0,SMENTERID=0,MLPPDM=4294967295,DISINDEX=0;
END OF STEPS
Creating a PCM System
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The No. of the exchange to be configured is given.
� The DT trunk group is configured.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context The PCM system management data associate the resources on thegateway with the signaling on the MSCS.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create a PCM system by executing command ADD SPCM.
Table 60 describes the parameters in the ADD SPCM com-mand.
TABLE 60 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD SPCM COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
TG
No. of the trunkgroup wherethe PCM systembelongs
It is a mandatory parameter,which is an integer, rangingfrom 1~1000. Select thetrunk group where this PCMsystem belongs from the listof configured trunk groups. Itis used to specify the trunkgroup invoking this PCMsystem. This parameter isassociated with the trunkgroup No. in command ADDTG ATM, ADD TG DT, ADDTG PRA, and ADD TG RTP
PCM PCM system No.
It is a mandatory parameter.It is a parameter forinterconnection with thepeer-end office. If theconfigured PCM systembelongs to the inter-officetrunk, the PCM system No. ofthe same circuit between twooffices must be the same.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 119
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
When the inter-office lineidentification of a trunk groupis TUP or ISUP, the PCMsystem No. ranges from 0 to127.
When the inter-office lineidentification of a trunk groupis BICC, the PCM system No.ranges from 0 to 5999.
When the inter-office lineidentification of a trunk groupis BSC or ANU, the PCMsystem No. ranges from 0 to2047
NUM Number of createdPCM systems
It is an optional parameter. IfPCM systems belong to a DTtrunk group, this parameterneeds not be configured. IfPCM systems belong to a RTPor ATM trunk group, selectthe number the created PCMsystems
MGWPCM
PCM No. in theMGW
The correspondingtrunk group caninvoke the PCMresources betweenthe start PCM No.in the MGW and theend PCM No.
It is an optional parameter.If the PCM system belongsto a RTP or ATM trunk group,this parameter needs not beconfigured. If the PCM systembelongs to a DT trunk group,select the corresponding PCMNo. in the MGW
NAME User alias
It is an optional parameter,consisting of 1~50 characters.It is used to specificallydescribe the PCM systemconfiguration to make iteasily recognized
E1 E1 identification
It is an optional parameter,consisting of 1~50 characters.For DT trunk groups,describes the E1 with anycharacters, which can be setto “DTB/SDTB unit No.-E1No.”
DDFDigital DistributionFrame (DDF)location description
It is an optional parameter,consisting of 1~50 characters.For DT trunk groups, the DDFlocation description can be setto “Frame No.-Row No.-PortNo.”
Example: Create a PCM system to the BSC office with the fol-lowing requirements:
� No. of the trunk group where the PCM system belongs: 28
120 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
� PCM system No.: 1
� PCM No. in the MGW: 1–3
The specific command is as follows.
ADD SPCM:TG=28,PCM=1,NUM=3,MGWPCM="1"-"3",INFO=65535;
END OF STEPS
Creating an Outgoing Route
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The No. of the exchange to be configured is given.
� The range of outgoing route ID is configured in the resourcemanagement.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Configuring outgoing routes make every trunk group correspondto an outgoing route.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create an outgoing route by executing command ADD RT.
Table 61 describes the parameters in the ADD RT command.
TABLE 61 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD RT COMMAND
Parame-ter Name
ParameterDescription Instruction
RT Route No.
It is a mandatory parameter,which is an integer, rangingfrom 1~2000. It exclusivelyidentifies a route. To facilitatemanagement, the route No. isconfigured to be consistent withthe trunk group No.
TG Trunk group No.
It is a mandatory parameter,corresponding to the trunkgroup No. in the trunk groupconfiguration
DDI
Called numbertransform indexduring outgoingcalls
It is an optional parameter, whichis an integer ranging from 0 to2048, with a default of 0. Thecalled number is transformedaccording to this index duringoutgoing calls. This index has noinfluence on the incoming callsthrough this trunk
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 121
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Parame-ter Name
ParameterDescription Instruction
OPDDI
Calling numbertransform indexduring outgoingcalls
It is an optional parameter, whichis an integer ranging from 0 to2048, with a default of 0. Thecalling number is transformedaccording to this index duringoutgoing calls. This index has noinfluence on the incoming callsthrough this trunk
DLPFX
Whether to deletethe prefix of thecalling numberduring outgoingcalls, includingNO and YES
It is an optional parameter,with a default of NO. If YES isselected, the prefix of the callingnumber (such as 0/00) will bedeleted during outgoing calls
NAME User alias It is an optional parameter,consisting of 0~50 characters.
Example: Create an outgoing route with the following require-ments.
� Route No.: 28
� Trunk group No.: 28
� User alias: Rout28
The specific command is as follows.
ADD RT:RT=28,TG=28,DDI=0,OPDDI=0,DLPFX=NO,NAME="ROUT28",HOPCNT=0,RERTS=0,CLISETIDX=65535;
END OF STEPS
Creating an Outgoing Route Set
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The No. of the exchange to be configured is given.
� The outgoing route set number is created.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Perform this procedure to create an outgoing route set. Everyroute belongs to a route set, which contains up to 12 routes.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Creat an outgoing route group by executing command ADDRTS.
Table 62 describes the parameters in the ADD RTS command.
122 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
TABLE 62 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD RTS COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
RTS Route group No.
It is a mandatory parameter,which is an integer, rangingfrom 1~3000. It is used toidentify a route group
NAME User alias
It is an optional parameter,consisting of 0~50 characters.It is used to specificallydescribe a route group to makeit easily recognized
RTPERRoute No. andload sharingproportion list
It is an optional parameter. Itis in the format of “No.-RouteNo.-Load sharing proportion.When the percentage is set to0, the poll mode is adopted.
SEQ: No., which is the locationof the route in the route group.
RTVAL: Route No., associatedwith the route group. Thisparameter must be definedby command ADD RT at first.Then it can be indexed here.
PERVAL: Load sharingproportion of each route in theroute group. If it is set to 0for all routes by default, theload is evenly allocated to eachroute
Example: Create an outgoing route group with the followingrequirements.
� Route group No.: 28
� User alias: Rout28
� Locaiton: 1
� Route No.: 28
� Percentage: 0
The specific command is as follows.
ADD RTS:RTS=28,NAME="ROUT28",RTPER="1"-"28"-"0";
END OF STEPS
Creating an Outgoing Route Link
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The No. of the exchange to be configured is given.
� The range of outgoing route link ID is configured in the resourcemanagement.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 123
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Perform this procedure to configure an outgoing route link. Everyoutgoing route set belongs to an outgoing route link, which con-tains up to four route sets.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Creat an outgoing route chain by executing command ADDCHAIN.
Table 63 describes the parameters in the ADD CHAIN com-mand.
TABLE 63 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD CHAIN COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
CHAIN Route chain No.
It is a mandatory parameter,which is an integer, rangingfrom 1 to 3000. It isused to define an outgoingroute chain. When it isconfigured in the numberanalysis configuration, itis associated to the routechain configured here
NAME User alias
It is an optional parameter,consisting of 0~50characters. It is usedto specifically describe aroute chain to make it easilyrecognized
PRND
Whether thepreference policyis supported in theMGW, including:
NO: When 2B occurs,the calls in thesame MGW arenot preferred, androuting is performedaccording to otherrouting policies of thesystem instead.
YES: When 2Boccurs, the calls inthe same MGW arepreferred
It is an optional parameter,with a default of YES. It isa policy for selecting therouging route
124 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
RTS1
No. of route group1, used to set theroute group withthe highest priorityin a route chainduring routing. Oneroute chain can beconfigured with atmost 4 route groups
RTS2
No. of route group 2,used to set the routegroup with the level-2priority in a routechain during routing.One route chain canbe configured with atmost 4 route groups
RTS3
No. of route group 3,used to set the routegroup with the level-3priority in a routechain during routing.One route chain canbe configured with atmost 4 route groups
RTS4
No. of route group 4,used to set the routegroup with the level-4priority in a routechain during routing.One route chain canbe configured with atmost 4 route groups
It is an optional parameter.Select route groupsaccording to the priorityorder. Select route group 1fist. Only when the circuitsin route group 1 are usedup or all the circuits areunavailable, the circuitsin route group 2 can beselected. Only when thecircuits in route group 2 areused up or all the circuitsare unavailable, the circuitsin route group 3 can beselected
RTPLC Route Selection PolicyNumber
It is an optional parameter.Select the route selectionpolicy number configured inADD RTPLC command
TPDAS DAS for the callednumber
It is an optional parameter.It is used to analyzethe called number inan incoming call. Thisparameter must be definedby command ADD DASat first. Then it can beindexed here. It needs to beset only when “Inter-MGWroute chain” is set in thecalled number analysis. Thedefault value is 0
Example: Create an outgoing route chain with the followingrequirements.
� Route chain No.: 28
� User alias: RLink28
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 125
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
� No. of Route group 1: 28
� Other parameters: Adopt the default values.
The specific command is as follows.
ADD CHAIN:CHAIN=28,NAME="RLink28",PRINODE=YES,RTS1=28,RTS2=0,RTS3=0,RTS4=0,RTPLC=0,TPDAS=0;
END OF STEPS
SIGTRAN Configuration
Creating an SCTP
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The physical configuration of the SMP module is complete.
� The range of the SCTP ID is configured in the resource man-agement configuration.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context The configuration of SCTP basic connection is used to configurethe basic information of the SCTP association.
Tip:
SCTP basic connection configuration requires using the real inter-face address or the loop-back IP address. If the IP protocol stackis configured before the configuration of the interconnection datawith MGW, configuring IP protocol stack again is not required. TheIP address of this real interface can be used directly when a newassociation is created. Different associations are distinguished bydifferent SCTP port numbers.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create an SCTP. The command is ADD SCTPCONN.
Table 64 describes the parameters in the ADD SCTPCONNcommand.
126 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
TABLE 64 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD SCTPCONN COMMAND
Parame-ter Name
ParameterDescription Instruction
MODULE Module No.
It is a mandatory parameter,indicating the number of thesignaling module homed by thisSCTP association. Select the SMPmodule number. Each SMP cansupport up to 128 associations.The associations under the sameAS are required sharing loadon SMP modules as more aspossible.
OFCID SCTP oppositeoffice ID
It is a mandatory parameter,designating the office No. of thedirect-associated association.Type the MGW adjacent office No.specified in the adjacent officeconfiguration.
PROT
Bearer protocoltypes, including
� M2UA
� M2PA
� M3UA
� SUA
� H248
� BICC
� IUA
� DHCTRL
� SIP
� DIM
� V5UA
� H245
It is a mandatory parameter. It isused to identify the upper-layerprotocol type borne by the SCTPassociation. In general, M3UA isselected.M2UA is selected whenMGW transfers the signaling withthe M2UA mode.
ROLE
SCTP applicationattributes.Options include:
SVR: SCTP isused as server
CLT: SCTP is usedas client
It is a mandatory parameter. ForMc interface, MSCS is configuredas CLT, and MGW is configuredas SVR. For Nc interface, thisshould be negotiated by bothsides. For example, the smallsignaling point serves as CLT,and the big signaling point servesas SVR
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 127
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Parame-ter Name
ParameterDescription Instruction
LOCADDR Local IP address
It is a mandatory parameter. Itdesignates the service addressof local end of this association,with a format of Local IPaddress type-VPN of local IPaddress-Local IP address
Local IP address type: IPv4 andIPv6;
VPN of local IP address: Rangfrom 0 to 65535;
Local IP address: the format isxxx.yyy.zzz.mmm
LOCPORT Local portnumber
It is a mandatory parameter. Itis the local SCTP port number ofthe association, ranging from 1to 65535.
REMADDR Opposite IPaddress
It is a mandatory parameter. Itdesignates the service address ofopposite end of this association,ranging from 1 to 65535.
REMPORT Opposite portnumber
It is a mandatory parameter. It isthe opposite SCTP port numberof the association, ranging from1 to 65535.
NAME AliasIt is a mandatory parameter witha length ranging from 1 to 50characters.
ID SCTP ID
It is an optional parameter. It isthe global serial number of theSCTP association, ranging from 1to 2048. Configure it accordingto the association planning.
For example, configure the SCTP connection between MSCS 30and MGW 31. Bearer protocol is M3UA, SCTP signaling process-ing module number is 3, local port number is 3001, oppositeport number is 3001, local IP address is 192.168.1.30, oppo-site IP address is 192.168.1.31, and SCTP association ID is 2.
Example: Create the SCTP connection for the Mc interface withthe following requirements.
� MGW office ID: 101
� Bearer protocol: M3UA
� Application attribute: CLT
� SCTP signaling processing module number: 3
� Local port number: 3001
� Opposite port number: 3001
� Local IP address: 192.168.1.11
� Opposite IP address: 192.168.1.31
128 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
� SCTP association ID: 2
� Other parameters: default value.
The specific command is as follows.
ADD SCTPCONN:MODULE=3,OFCID=101,PROT=M3UA,ROLE=CLT,LOCADDR="IPv4"-"0"-"192.168.1.11",LOCPORT=3001,REMADDR="IPv4"-"0"-"192.168.1.31",REMPORT=3001,NAME="PSTN",ID=2,INSTRM=16,OUTSTRM=16,MAXRTRY=5,MAXRTO=500,MINRTO=50,INITRTO=100,HB=500,FIXNH=NO,SCTPMAXRTRYNUM=10,DELAYACK=20,MAXBURST=4,PRIMARYPATH=REMIP1,PMTU=0,BREAKTIME=0,PDTHRESH=0,MINCWND=0,PLTIMER=10,MPPLTHRD=2,DPLEN=MTU,CB=200;
END OF STEPS
Creating an ASP
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The SCTP association information is configured.
� The range of the ASP ID is configured in the resource manage-ment configuration.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context ASP configuration defines the one-to-one relationship between theASP and the association.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the ASP. The command is ADD ASP.
Table 65 describes the parameters in the ADD ASP command.
TABLE 65 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD ASP COMMAND
Parame-ter Name
ParameterDescription Instruction
ASSOCID SCTP ID
It is a mandatory parameter, rangingfrom 1 to 2048
Type the association ID configured inthe SCTP connection configuration.
NAME Alias
It is a mandatory parameter, witha lengthen ranging from 1 to 50characters. It may be named with aformat of “Adjacent office alias-SCTPnumber”.
ID ASP ID It is an optional parameter, rangingfrom 1 to 2048.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 129
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Parame-ter Name
ParameterDescription Instruction
It is recommended to be consistentwith ASSOCID.
ISLOOP ASP self-loopID
It is an optional parameter. It is usedto set whether the ASP is self-looped.
Select the default value NO
ISLOCK ASP blockingflag
It is an optional parameter. It is usedset whether the ASP is in blockingstate.
Blocking is used for management.Select the default value NO
Example: Create the ASP between MSCS and MGW with thefollowing requirements.
� MGW office ID: 101
� SCTP association ID: 2
� ASP configuration ID: 2
� User alias: ISUP.
ADD ASP:ASSOCID=2,NAME="ISUP",ID=2,ISLOOP=NO,ISLOCK=NO;
END OF STEPS
Creating an AS
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The ASP configuration is complete.
� The range of the AS ID is configured in the resource manage-ment configuration.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context AS configuration is used to configure the basic information for theapplication server.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the AS. The command is ADD AS.
Table 66 describes the parameters in the ADD AS command.
130 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
TABLE 66 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD AS COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
PROTSupportedadaptation layerprotocols
It indicates the protocoltype of a bearer. In general,M3UA is selected accordingto the networking planning.It is configured as M2UAwhen MGW transfers thesignaling with M2UA mode.
ASPID ASP IDIt is associated with theASP ID configured in theASP configuration.
NAME AliasIt is a mandatoryparameter. The aliascustomized by the user.
ID AS ID
It is an optionalparameter. It is the uniqueidentification of the AS. Ingeneral, it is the same asthat of the ASP for easymemory. The parameterranges from 1 to 640
EXISTCTX Whether the routingcontext ID exists
CTXID Routing context ID
It is an optional parameter.The routing context isunique in the network.This parameter mustbe consistent with theAS configuration of theopposite-end. Its defaultvalue is NO
ASTAG
Usage tag. Optionsinclude:
SGP
ASP
SRV (IPSP server)
CLT (IPSP client)
It is an optional parameter.
For Mc interface, MSCSgenerally serves asIPSP_Client, and MGWserves as IPSP_Server.When MGW acts as a SGW,the AS at the MSCS sideserves as ASP, and the ASat the SGW side serves asSGP.
For Nc interface, this shouldbe negotiated by bothsides. For example, thesmall signaling point servesas IPSP_Client, and the bigsignaling point serves asIPSP_Server.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 131
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
ASUP
User typessupported by AS.Options include TUP,ISUP, BICC, H.248,ALCAPSCCP, PCA,NNSF and ALL
It is an optional parameter.It defines the upper-layeruser types supported bythe AS. Currently, there areeight types of users.
User type is not configuredwhen MGW transfers thesignaling with the M2UAmode
ASMD Service modessupported
It is an optional parameter.The supported servicemodes include:
� OVERRIDE(Over-ridemode)
� LOAD (Load sharemode).
In the over-ride mode,only one ASP is in theactivated statue. In thiscase, only one ASP needsbe configured. In theload sharing mode, NASPs should be configuredin the activated workingstatue, and K ASPs shouldbe configured in thedeactivated standby statue.
The value of N+K is notmore than the number ofASPs actually configured
SSN
Types of subsystem.Options includeNO_SSN (subsystemSSN excluded(null)), SCCP, REV2(standby), ISUP,OMAP, MAP, HLR,VLR, MSC, EIR, AUC,REV11(standby),INAP, USSD, VLRA,SGSN_BSCAP,RANAP, RNSAP,GMLC_MAP, CAP,GSMSCF_MAP,SIWF_MAP, SGSN_MAP, GGSN_MAP,IP (intelligentperipherals),SMC, SSP_SCP,BSC_BSSAP_LE,MSC_BSSAP_LE,SMLC_BSSAP_LE,BSS_O_M_A ,BSSAP_A andRVE255.
Types of subsystemsupported by applicationserver (AS).
132 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
NVAL The N value in loadsharing mode
The parameter ranges from0 to 16.
The N+K should be equal tothe number of ASP underAS.
The N value indicates thatAS puts into use if N ASPsput into use.
Example: Create the AS between MSCS and MGW with thefollowing requirements.
� MGW office ID: 101
� Supported adaptation layer protocol: M3UA
� AS configuration ID: 2
� Supported user type: ISUP
� ASP ID: 2
� Client: MSCS
� Alias: ISUP
The command is as follows.
ADD AS:PROT=M3UA,ASPID="2",NAME="ISUP",ID=2,EXISTCTX=NO,ASTAG=CLT,ASUP="ISUP",ASMD=LOAD,NVAL=1,KVAL=0;
END OF STEPS
Creating an M3UA Static Route
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The AS configuration is complete.
� The range of M3UA static route ID is configured in the resourcemanagement.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Creating an M3UA static route means configuring the mapping re-lationship between an M3UA static route and an AS.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the M3UA static route. The command is ADDM3UART.
Table 67 describes the main parameters in the ADD M3UARTcommand.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 133
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
TABLE 67 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD M3UART COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
ID ID of M3UAstatic route
It is an optional parameter,indicating the serial number of theM3UA static route ID, ranging from1 to 640. In general, it is the sameas the AS ID.
ASID AS IDIt is a mandatory parameter,corresponding to the AS IDspecified in the ADD AS command.
MODE
Alignmentmode ofroutes.Optionsinclude
� BYTURNS
� LOCAL
� NATURE
Nature: routes are directly sortedaccording by the ASP marshallingsequence in the routing table.
Local: It is unnecessary to realizethe algorithm in the background.The background just needs to makethe alignment according to theNature option.
BYTURNS: in the routing table,the routes at the odd-bit positionare sorted by the serial number ofthe activated ASP, and the routesat the even-bit position are sortedinversely by the serial number ofthe activated ASP
The default is BYTURNS.
NAME AliasIt is a mandatory parameter definedby a user, with a length rangingfrom 1 to 50 characters.
Example: Create an M3UA static route for Mc interface withthe following requirements.
� MGW office ID: 101
� M3UA static route ID: 2
� AS ID: 2
� User alias: ISUP.
The specific command is as follows.
ADD M3UART:ID=2,ASID=2,MODE=BYTURNS,NAME="ISUP";
END OF STEPS
Creating the SIO-Locating-AS
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The M3UA static route configuration is complete.
� The range of the AS ID is configured in the resource manage-ment configuration.
134 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Where, a routing keyword describes the parameters and their val-ues of a group of No.7 signaling messages. The corresponding ASis selected according to the message attributes, serving the pur-pose of selecting route for messages.
The attribute of the message includes DPC+NET+OPC+SIO,where, DPC is the destination signaling point code, NET is thenetwork type, OPC is the originating signaling point code, andSIO is the service indicator octet.
The configuration of SIO-locating-AS is used to locate one serviceto a routing table that is maintained by the ASPs under the AS.Compared with the MTP data configuration of the traditional No.7signaling, the ASP configuration of the SCTP connection and M3UAis similar to the link logic and bearer information configuration inthe MTP configuration, the AS configuration of the M3UA is similarto the link set configuration in the MTP configuration, and the SIO-locating-AS configuration is similar to the signaling office ID androute configuration in the MTP configuration. The difference is thatthe IP route to one subscriber of one office is configured in oneSIO-locating-AS configuration record.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the SIO-locating-AS. The command is ADD SIOLOCAS.
Table 68 describes the parameters in the ADD SIOLOCAScommand.
TABLE 68 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD SIOLOCAS COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
ID SIO-location-AS ID
It is an optional parameter,indicating the serial number ofSIO-locating-AS, ranging from 1 to4096. In general, it is the same asthe AS ID.
NAME Alias It is a mandatory parameter, whichis the alias customized by the user.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 135
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
SIO
Serviceindication.Options include
� TUP
� ISUP
� BICC
� H.248
� ALCAP
� SCCP
� PCA
� NNSF
It is a mandatory parameter,indicating the subscriber typebelonged by the transmittedmessage. Different user types canbe located to the same AS underthe precondition that the MS mustsupport these user types
Select H.248 for Mc interface,BICC for Nc interface, SCCP forthe RNC or BSC office transferredthrough MGW, and TUP or ISUPfor the 2G MSC/PSTN officetransferred through MGW.
OFCIDDestinationadjacent officeID
It is a mandatory parameter,indicating the adjacent office IDcorresponded by the destinationsignaling point of the M3UA.It needs to associate with theadjacent office ID in the adjacentoffice configuration.
OPOFCIDOriginaladjacent officeID
It is the adjacent office IDcorresponding to the M3UAoriginating signaling point. If0 (indicating the local office)is selected, it indicates thatthe message is sent from thelocal office, and the routingcontext is routed according toDPC+NET+OPC+SIO. If 65535(invalid) is selected, it indicatesthat the OPC field is invalid, andthe routing context is routedaccording to DPC+NET+SIO
PCM PCM systemnumber
It is an optional parameter. Itranges from 0 to 65535, with adefault of 65535 (invalid).
RT1 ID 1 of M3UAstatic route
RT2 ID 2 of M3UAstatic route
It corresponds to the IDspecified in the M3UA staticroute configuration. RT1 is amandatory parameter. In general,RT1 is required. When theoptimum route mode is adopted,RT1 is set as an active route, andRT2 is set as a standby route.
Example: Create SIO-locating-AS between MSCS and 2G MSCwith the following requirements.
� 2G MSC office ID: 28
� Service indication: ISUP
136 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
� M3UA static route ID: 2.
The specific command is as follows.
ADD SIOLOCAS:ID=2,NAME="ISUP",SIO=ISUP,OFCID=28,OPOFCID=65535,PCM=65535,RT1=2,RT2=0;
END OF STEPS
BSC Data ConfigurationOverview
TypicalNetworking
BSSAP signaling is used between the ZXWN MSCS and BSC. Thesignaling from the ZXWN MSCS to the MGW uses the IP bearer, andthe MGW completes the signaling switching from the IP bearer tothe TMD bearer. The MGW provides the TDM bearer of the userplane, and the user data are transferred through PCM codes. Inthe existing networks, both the MSCS and the MGW usually usethe same 14-bit SPC for interworking with the BSC. The networkingdiagram is shown in Figure 9.
FIGURE 9 NETWORKING WITH BSC
Data Collection Before data configuration, it is supposed to complete collectingthe related data of MSCS-to-MGW, and MGW-to-BSC. Table 69 andTable 70 list the data to be collected. The parameter values arejust examples. Input these parameters according to the actualcondition during the practical data construction procedure.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 137
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
TABLE 69 DATA FOR INTERCONNECTION WITH THE MGW
Parameter Items Parameter Values
Real interface address of ZXWN MSCS 192.168.1.11
Real interface address of ZXWN MGW 192.168.1.31
Signaling point code (14-bit) of ZXWNMSCS 1.11.1
Signaling point code (14-bit) of ZXWNMGW (SG) 1.31.1
SCTP port No. of ZXWN MSCS (client) 4001
SCTP port No. of ZXWN MGW (server) 4001
TABLE 70 DATA FOR INTERCONNECTION WITH THE BSC
Parameter Items Parameter Values
BSC signaling point code 1.99.1
Inter-office signaling type BSSAP
CIC code of the junction circuit 0~31
Data Configura-tion Flow
This section introduces the data configuration on the MSCS foradding a BSC adjacent office under the precondition that the H248data between the MGW and the MSCS are configured, and that theMGW is successfully registered to the MSCS. Table 71 describes theBSC adjacent office data configuration flow.
TABLE 71 BSC ADJACENT OFFICE DATA CONFIGURATION FLOW
Steps Operations Related Command
1 Creating a BSCadjacent office ADD ADJOFC
2 Creating BSC officedirection ADD BSCOFC
3 Creating a BSCtopology node ADD TOPO
4Creating the topologyrelationship betweenBSC and MGW
ADD RNCMGWTOPO
5 Creating a DT trunkgroup to the BSC ADD TG DT
6 Creating a PCMsystem ADD SPCM
7 Creating theassociations and the
138 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
Steps Operations Related Command
ADD SCTPCONN
ADD ASP
ADD AS
M3UA data switchedby the signaling
ADD M3UART
8 Creating theSIO-locating-AS ADD SIOLOCAS
Office Direction and TopologyConfiguration
Creating a BSC Adjacent Office
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The data configuration of the local office is completed.
� The range of adjacent office number is configured in the re-source management.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Perform this procedure for configuring the basic information of theBSC adjacent office.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the BSC adjacent office. The command is ADD ADJOFC.
Table 72 describes the main parameters in the ADD ADJOFCcommand.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 139
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
TABLE 72 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD ADJOFC COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
ID Office ID
It is a mandatory parameter,indicating the identificationnumber of the adjacent office,and ranging from 1 to 2048.It is usually configured as theexchange ID of the adjacentoffice during the all-networkplanning.
NAME AliasIt is a mandatory parameter,which is the alias customizedby the user.
NET Network type
It is a mandatory parameter,indicating the network type ofthe SPC used for connectingthe local office to the adjacentoffice when the local office isconfigured with several SPs.
The default is the network typeof this SP when there is onlyone SP in the local office.
OFCTYPE Adjacent officetype
It is a mandatory parameter.
Type BSC in this case
SPCFMT SPC format Select TRIPLE_DEC
SPCTYPE SPC type
DPC SPC
It is a mandatory parameter.Specify it based on the SPCtype of the adjacent office. InChina, BSC adopts the 14-bitSPC.
RC Area code When the adjacent office typeis BSC, RC must be empty.
ASSOTYPE
Association type,including
� AM_SURE(directconnectionmode)
� AM_QUASI(half directconnectionmode)
� AM_NONE(n-one connectionmode)
It is an optional parameter.
Select AM_QUASI
140 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
SPTYPE
Signaling pointtype, including
� SEP
� STP
� STEP
It is an optional parameter.
Select SEP
SSF
Subservicefunction, including
� INTERNA-TIONAL (In-ternational sig-naling pointcode)
� INTERNA-TIONALSTANDBY(Internationalstandby sig-naling pointcode)
� NATIONAL(Nationalsignaling pointcode)
� NATIONALSTANDBY(Nationalstandbysignaling pointcode).
It is an optional parameter.In general, select NATIONALSTANDBY for BSC adjacentoffice.
TEST Test flag
It is an optional parameter, forsetting whether the MTP3 linkactively initiates the link testafter entering in the servicestatus.
It is selected by default.
BANDFLAG Broadbandattribute
It is an optional parameter.Select NO
PRTCTYPE
Protocol types,including:
� CHINA (China)
� ITU (Interna-tional Telecom-municationsUnion)
� ANSI(AmericanNationalStandardsInstitute).
It is an optional parameter.
CHINA and ITU are used forthe NO.7 signaling networkingof the ITU standards. ANSIis used for the No.7 signalingnetworking of the Americanstandards.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 141
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
CLST Cluster ID
It is an optional parameter.The cluster number shouldbe configured in ADD CLST.The parameter ranges from0 to 65535, with a default of65535.
INFO
Office Info,including:
� CIC_PCM (CICusing PCMCode ModeStarts LoadControl)
� BLOCK(Manual BlockState)
� EVEN_CIC(OfficeControls EvenCIC if CICResourceCollision)
� CALLING(Allow CallingTransform)
� CALLED(Allow CalledTransform)
� MOD24_CIC(Mod 24 CICMode)
� TEST(Dynamic Test)
It is an optional parameter,with a default of CIC_PCM
RELATE-DOFC1 Related office ID It is an optional parameter,
ranging from 0 from 3000
INFOEX
Office extend info,including
� SIGBRDCST(SupportSignalingBroadcastMessage)
� MTP(HongkongMTP Standard)
� DUPU (Screen DUPUmessage)
� SUA_REC_DT1 (ReceiveSUA messageand handle
It is an optional parameter
142 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
it as DT1message)
� SUA_SND-_DT1 (SendSUA messageand handleit as DT1messagewithout SN.)
� OPEN_TG-_RES (Openoutter trunkgroup re-source)
Example: Create a BSC adjacent office with the following re-quirements.
� BSC office ID: 99
� Network type: 2
� User alias: BSC99
� Destination SPC: 1.99.1
� SPC type: 14-bit
� Sub-service function: National standby SPC
� Adjacent office type: BSC
� Association type: Quasi-associated mode.
The specific command is as follows.
ADD ADJOFC:ID=99,NAME="BSC99",NET=2,OFCTYPE="BSC",SPCFMT=TRIPLE_DEC,SPCTYPE=14,DPC="1.99.1",ASSOTYPE=AM_QUASI,SPTYPE=SEP,SSF=NATIONALSTANDBY,SUBPROTTYPE=DEFAULT,TEST=YES,BANDFLAG=NO,PRTCTYPE=CHINA,CLST=65535,INFO="CIC_PCM",RELATEDOFC1=0;
END OF STEPS
Creating BSC Office Direction
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� You know the ID of the exchange to be configured.
� The BSC adjacent office is created.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Perform this procedure to configure some additive attributes of theBSC adjacent office.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 143
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the BSC office direction. The command is ADD BSCOFC.
Table 73 describes the main parameters in the ADD BSCOFCcommand.
TABLE 73 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD BSCOFC COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
BSCOFCID BSC office ID It is a mandatory parameterranging from 1 to 256.
MCC Mobile countrycode
It is a mandatory parameterwith the length ranging from 1to 3 characters.
MNC Mobile networkcode
It is a mandatory parameterwith a length ranging from 1to 3 characters.
INFO Service identifier
It is an optional parameter.Type it according to the actualconditions. In general, allthe options can be selected,except SUPCELLLOAD(Support load-based switch)and ALL (Support all).
SELTYPE
A interface loadshare mode,including
� EXCELLENT(excellentchoice priority)
� LOAD (loadshare priority)
It is an optional parameter.Select EXCELLENT in thiscase.
NAME AliasIt is an optional parameterwith a length ranging from 0to 50 characters.
RAS BSC officere-assignment
It is an optional parameter.Select YES or NO according tothe actual conditions
CICINMGW
MGW manage BSCCIC, includingoptions: NO(NO)and YES(YES)
The default is NO(NO)
BEARTYPE
BSC bearer type,including options:TDM(TDM),IPV4(IPV4) andIPV6(IPV6)
It is an optional parameter,with a default of TDM(TDM)
144 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
Example: Create the BSC office direction with the followingrequirements.
� BSC office ID: 99
� Mobile country code: 460
� Mobile network code: 00
� Service identifier: "BSCRST"&"MSCRST"&"BSCRCIC"&"M-SCRCIC"&"BLOCKCIC"&"BLOCKCICG"&"UNBLOCKCIC"&"UNBLOCKCICG"&"RESINDN"&"CHARGEINDN"&"FLUXCON-TROL"&"BSCTRACK"&"MSCTRACK"&"QUEUEINDN"&"CALL-REBUILD"&"SUPCELLLOAD"&"UNBLOCKCICINS"&"SupCo-mID"&"SupEmlpp"&"SupChnNed"&"SupCIResMode"&"Su-pLCS"
� Alias: BSC99.
The specific command is as follows.
ADD BSCOFC:BSCOFCID=99,MCC="460",MNC="00",INFO="BSCRST"&"MSCRST"&"BSCRCIC"&"MSCRCIC"&"BLOCKCIC"&"BLOCKCICG"&"UNBLOCKCIC"&"UNBLOCKCICG"&"RESINDN"&"CHARGEINDN"&"FLUXCONTROL"&"BSCTRACK"&"MSCTRACK"&"QUEUEINDN"&"CALLREBUILD"&"SUPCELLLOAD"&"UNBLOCKCICINS"&"SupComID"&"SupEmlpp"&"SupChnNed"&"SupCIResMode"&"SupLCS",SELTYPE=EXCELLENT,NAME="BSC99",RAS=NO,CICINMGW=NO,CICATTR="TFRV1"&"THRV1"&"TFRV2"&"THRV2"&"TFRV3"&"THRV3"&"DFR14"&"DFR12"&"DFR6"&"DFR3"&"DHR6"&"DHR3"&"HSCSD14x2"&"HSCSD12x2"&"HSCSD6x2"&"HSCSD14x4"&"HSCSD12x4"&"HSCSD6x4"&"HSCSD12x6"&"HSCSD6x6",BEARTYPE=TDM,PROTYPE=PRIVATE,IPCODECMODE=CC,SETPRE=SET1;
END OF STEPS
Creating a BSC Topology Node
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� You know the number of the exchange to be configured.
� The encoding and decoding speech template is added.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Perform this procedure to configure the adjacent NE information,including equipment type, bearer type and attributes, user planeversion, encoding and decoding template, and other information.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create a BSC topological node. The command is ADD TOPO.
Table 74 describes the main parameters in the ADD TOPOcommand.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 145
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
TABLE 74 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TOPO COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
ID Topology nodeID
It is a mandatory parameterranging from 1 to 2048. It isused for defining a topologicalnode. It is recommended thatthis ID is consistent with theoffice ID of this node.
OFCID Office ID
It is a mandatory parameterfor specify the office ID of thistopological node, ranging from 1to 2048. This parameter mustbe defined by the ADD ADJOFCcommand first. Type the BSCoffice ID according to actualconditions.
NAME Alias
It is a mandatory parameter fornaming this topological node,with a length ranging from 1 to50 characters.
CODECID CODEC identity
It is a mandatory parameterfor specifying the Encoding anddecoding speech Template usedby this topological node. Thisparameter must be defined bythe ADD CODECTPL commandfirst.
Type it according to the actualconditions.
ETYPE Equipment type
It is an optional parameter forspecifying the NE type of thistopological node.
Select BSC for an BSC node.
IPVER IP version ofthe node
It is an optional parameter,indicating the IP protocol versionsupported between nodes.Select IPV4 or IPV6 accordingto the actual conditions. Ingeneral, it is set as IPV4
ATTR Bearerattributes
This parameter is only validfor the node with the typeof R4GW (MGW). You neednot to configure it for an BSCtopological node.
UPVER User planeprotocol version
It is an optional parameter. Thisparameter is not configured fora BSC node
146 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
ATTR2
Extendedattributes(tunnel mode),including
� NOTUNL(Nonetunnelmode)
� RTUNL(Rapidtunnelmode)
� DTUNL(Delaytunnelmode)
This parameter sets whichtunnel mode is used for settingup a bearer when this nodesupports the IP/RTP bearer, witha default of NOTUNL (Nonetunnel mode).
TRFMOD
Transmissionmode, includingMCINTF (Mcinterface signaltransfer mode)
This parameter is used to setthat mode used by the topologyfor reporting the detected CNGor CED fax signals, with a defaultof MCINTF (Mc interface signaltransfer mode).
UPERRCTRL Error SDUcontrol
YES: The user plane entityimplements error inspection,and sets the FQC bit positionaccording to the result. It willtransmit all frames includesthe error frames to the userplane layer. During a call,the error packet controlparameter delerrsdu=Yes,which is delivered by theterminal established by MGWon the Mc interface. Theerror packet control parameterdeliveryOfErroneousSDU is YES,NA, NA during RAB assignment.
NO: The user plane entityimplements the error inspection.It will directly discard theerror frame. During a call, theerror packet control parameterdelerrsdu=No, which is deliveredby the terminal established byMGW on the Mc interface. Theerror packet control parameterdeliveryOfErroneousSDU is NO,NA, NA during RAB assignment.
INVALIDTION: The user planeentity does not implement theerror inspection. During acall, the error packet controlparameter delerrsdu=NA,which is delivered by theterminal established by MGWon the Mc interface. Theerror packet control parameter
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 147
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
deliveryOfErroneousSDU is NA,NA, NA during RAB assignment.
This parameter regulates thehandling method of the userplane for error frames. It isonly valid for MGW-type andRNC-type topological node. Thedefault value is YES
DTMFTC
Tandem officesend DTMFuse TC mode,containing twooptions:
� NO
� YES
This parameter is used to setwhether the tandem office usesthe TC resources during DTMFnumber delivery.
The default value is NO
MGWCON
MGWcongestionreportingcapability
It contains the following options.
� SMGWCON (Standard MGWcongestion event)
� CMGWCON (Custom MGWcongestion event).
The default value is SMGWCON.
Example: Create a BSC topological node with the followingrequirements.
� BSC office ID: 99
� Topological node ID: 99
� Alias: BSC99
� CODEC ID: 1
The specific command is as follows.
ADD TOPO:ID=99,OFCID=99,NAME="BSC99",CODECID=1,ETYPE=BSC,PROTTYPE=H248,DMNAME="RNC",IPVER=IPV4,UPVER="V2",ATTR2=NOTUNL,TRFMOD=MCINTF,UPERRCTRL=YES,DTMFTC=NO,MGWCON=SMGWCON,AUTOFAX=YES,OOBTC=NO,BCUID=0,SENDCAP=NO,G711TRAN=NO,BICCDTMF=TRANSPARENT,IPBCP2833=BYMGW,BICCDTMPPER=0,AOIPPRO=PRIVATE;
END OF STEPS
Creating the Topology Relationship between BSCand MGW
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� You know the number of the exchange to be configured.
� The BSC topological node is configured.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
148 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
Context Perform this procedure to configure the topological relationshipbetween BSC and MGW, thus to associate the MGW node with theBSC node.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the topological relationship between BSC and MGW. Thecommand is ADD RNCMGWTOPO.
Table 75 describes the main parameters in the ADD RNCMGWTOPO command.
TABLE 75 MAIN PARAMETERS IN THE ADD RNCMGWTOPOCOMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
MGWID MGW node ID
It is a mandatory parameterranging from 1 to 2048.
It is the node ID specifiedduring the MGW topologicalnode configuration
RANTYPE Office type It is a mandatory parameter.Select BSC for BSC access.
RANID RNC/BSC nodenumber
It is a mandatory parameterranging from 1 to 2048.
It is the node ID specifiedduring the BSC topologicalnode configuration.
SHMODE
Load SharingMode, including:
� NONE (NOTLoad Sharing)
� BEARLOAD(Bear LoadSharing)
� MBLOAD(Master-Backup LoadSharing)
The parameter is used toset the multiple load sharingmodes, with a default of NONE
BTYPE1
Bearer Type 1,including:
� ATM (ATM)
� IP (IP)
The parameter indicates thefirst bearer type, with a defaultof ATM
BRATIO1 Bearer Type 1Ratio
The parameter is used to theset the proportion of the firstbearer type, with a default of 1
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 149
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
BTYPE2
Bearer Type 2,including:
� NONE (NONE)
� ATM (ATM)
� IP (IP)
The parameter indicates thesecond bearer type, with adefault of NONE
BRATIO2 Bearer Type 2Ratio
The parameter is used tothe set the proportion of thesecond bearer type, with adefault of 1
BPER Ratio of bearerfrom MGW to BSC
It is an optional parameter,ranging from 1 to 10.
It is used for setting the trafficload-sharing ratio when theBSC accesses several MGWs.If the BSC only connects toone MGW, this parameter is setas 1 by default
NAME AliasIt is an optional parameterwith a length ranging from 0to 50 characters.
Example: Create the topology relationship between BSC andMGW with the following requirements.
� MGW node ID: 101
� Office type: BSC
� BSC node ID: 99.
The specific command is as follows.
ADD RNCMGWTOPO:MGWID=101,RANTYPE=BSC,RANID=99,SHMODE=NONE,BTYPE1=ATM,BRATIO1=1,BTYPE2=NONE,BRATIO2=1,BPER=1;
END OF STEPS
Trunk and PCM Configuration
Creating a DT Trunk Group
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The exchange ID to be configured is given.
� The adjacent office to which the trunk group points is created.
� The trunk group No. range is set in the resource managementsystem.
150 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context When the A interface or Ai interface adopts the TDM bearer, orwhen MGWs are interconnected through the TDM bearer, DT trunkgroups need to be configured. The circuit status in each trunkgroup is managed by the corresponding trunk management mod-ule, so it is required to configure multiple trunk groups to eachBSC office (4~8 trunk groups are recommended). To implementload sharing, it is required to allocate roughly the same number ofBSC circuits to each CMP module.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create a DT trunk group by executing command ADD TG DT.
The explanation of the main parameters in command ADD TGDT is shown in Table 76.
TABLE 76 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TG DT COMMAND
ParameterName
Parameter Descrip-tion Instruction
TG Trunk group ID
It is a mandatoryparameter. It is usedto define a trunkgroup, and needs to beplanned in the resourcemanagement system inadvance
OFC ID of the office wherethe trunk group belongs
It is a mandatoryparameter. It isused to specify thecorresponding office ofthe trunk group. Thisparameter must bedefined by commandADD ADJOFC at first.Then it can be indexedhere
MODULE Module where the trunkgroup belongs
It is a mandatoryparameter. It indicatesa service module.Different trunk groupsto the same officeneed to be allocated todifferent CMP modules
NDNode No. of the MGWwhere the trunk groupbelongs
It is a mandatoryparameter. Select theMGW topology nodeconnected with the 2GMSC/PSTN node
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 151
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
Parameter Descrip-tion Instruction
NAME User alias
It is an optionalparameter, consistingof 0~50 characters. Itis used to specificallydescribe a trunk groupto make it easilyrecognized
SIGLINE
Inter-office line signalidentification. Optionsinclude:
� BSC: BSC GroundCircuit
� TUP: InterofficeCommon ChannelSignaling TUP
� ISUP: InterofficeCommon ChannelSignaling ISUP
� DLC1: InterofficeChannel AssociatedSignaling DL/DC(1)
� R2: R2 Signaling
� BICC: BICC Type
� ANU: ANU Signaling
� SORMUP: SORMUPSignaling
It is an optionalparameter. It is usedto identify the line typeof this trunk. Select itaccording to inter-officesignaling. For the Aiinterface, select ISUP]or TUP
KIND
Trunk group types,including the followingthree types:
IN (incoming trunkgroup): Indicatesthat the local officeprocesses the incomingcalls from the peer-endoffice.
OUT (outgoing trunkgroup): Indicates thatthe local office onlyprocesses the outgoingcalls to the peer-endoffice.
BIDIR (Two-way trunkgroup): Indicatesthat the local officeprocesses both theincoming calls from thepeer-end office and theoutgoing calls to thepeer-end office
It is an optionalparameter. If BSCis selected for theinter-office line signalidentification, it must beconfigured to BIDIR
152 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
Parameter Descrip-tion Instruction
BWAY
Bearer establishmentdirection, including thefollowing three types:
NODIR: The inter-officebearer is establishedwithout direction.
BACK: The inter-officebearer is establishedbased on the backwardmode.
FORWD: Theinter-office bearer isestablished based onthe forward mode
It is an optionalparameter. SelectNODIR for DT trunkgroups
THD Overload controlthreshold
It is an optionalparameter, ranging from0 to 100, with a defaultof 100. This parametertakes effect when levelsof congestion occur andload control is required
CICSEL
Circuit selecting modes,including:
MIN: Every time whenthe system selects atrunk circuit, it alwaysbegins with the circuitwith the minimumnumber. This mode canimplement the preferredplan of trunk circuits.
MAX: Every time whenthe system selects atrunk circuit, it alwaysbegins with the circuitwith the maximumnumber. This mode canimplement the preferredplan of trunk circuits.
CYC: Every time whenthe system selectsa trunk circuit, italways begins withthe circuit next to theone previously selected.Suppose the numbersof the trunk circuits in atrunk group in ascendingorder are “TKC0, TKC1,…. , TKCn”. If TKC0is selected at the firsttime, the system willselect the trunk circuitin the order of “TKC0®TKC1®…®TKCn®TKC0®TKC1®…®TKCn”.
ODD: Every time whenthe system selects a
It is an optionalparameter. It is used tospecify the trunk circuitselecting policy of thesystem within this trunkgroup, with a default ofCYC. If this No.7 trunkgroup is a two-waytrunk group, it isrecommended to set thecircuit selecting modeto ODD/EVEN modeto prevent contentionwhen two exchangesselect circuits
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 153
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
Parameter Descrip-tion Instruction
trunk circuit, it alwaysselects the circuit withan odd number.
EVEN: Every time whenthe system selects atrunk circuit, it alwaysselects the circuit withan even number.
IDLE: Every time whenthe system selects atrunk circuit, it alwaysselects the idlest circuit.
BUSY: Every time whenthe system selects atrunk circuit, it alwaysselects the busiestcircuit
DAS DAS for the callednumber
It is an optionalparameter. It is usedto analyze the callednumber in an incomingcall. This parametermust be defined bycommand ADD DAS atfirst. Then it can beindexed here
SIPDAS
DAS for the domainname of the callednumber during a SIPoutgoing call
It is used get the nameof the IMS domainwhere the called partyis located throughanalyzing the callednumber during a SIPoutgoing call. It isonly used for RTP trunkgroups
OPDAS DAS for the callingnumber
It is used to analyzethe calling number inan incoming call. Thisparameter must bedefined by commandADD DAS at first. Thenit can be indexed here
PREDAS DAS for pre-analyzingthe called number
It is used to pre-analyzethe called number inan incoming call. Thisparameter must bedefined by commandADD PREDAS at first.Then it can be indexedhere
154 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
Parameter Descrip-tion Instruction
DDI Incoming called numbertransform ID
It is the index ofthe incoming callednumber transform. Thisparameter must bedefined by commandADD DDI at first. Thenit can be indexed here
OPDDI Incoming callingnumber transform ID
It is the index ofthe incoming callingnumber transform. Thisparameter must bedefined by commandADD DDI at first. Thenit can be indexed here
MINNAT Minimum nationalnumber length
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer ranging from0 to 26, with a defaultof 0. It is used tospecify the minimumdigit length of thecalled number during anational incoming call
MAXNAT Maximum nationalnumber length
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer ranging from0 to 26, with a defaultof 26. It is used tospecify the maximumdigit length of thecalled number during anational incoming call
MININT Minimum internationalnumber length
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer ranging from0 to 26, with a defaultof 0. It is used tospecify the minimumdigit length of thecalled number during aninternational incomingcall
MAXINT Maximum internationalnumber length
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer ranging from0 to 26, with a defaultof 26. It is used tospecify the maximumdigit length of thecalled number during aninternational incomingcall
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 155
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
Parameter Descrip-tion Instruction
INREG
Incoming registersignaling flag, includingoptions: INVALID,MFC, MFP, DTMF, DPand MF
It is an optionalparameter, with adefault of INVALID
OUTREG
Outgoing registersignaling flag, includingoptions: INVALID,MFC, MFP, DTMF, DPand MF
It is an optionalparameter, with adefault of INVALID
COLEN The maximum length ofCAS calling number end
It is an optionalparameter. It rangesfrom 1 to 32, with adefault of 10.
BUSYRATE Trunk circuit usage
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer rangingfrom 1 to 100, with adefault of 100. Afterthe trunk circuit usageis configured, when theratio of busy circuits toall circuits in this trunkgroup exceeds thisvalue, congestion occursin this trunk group.After the congestionis relieved, report thetrunk congestion timesand congestion durationin the performancestatistics. Thisparameter does nottake effect when it isconfigured to 100
ROAMDAS DAS for roamingnumbers
It is an optionalparameter. After thisDAS is configured, ifthe local office servesas a GMSC, this DASis preferred for thereturned roamingnumbers. Otherwise,the roaming numberDAS configured inthe number analysistemplate is used
156 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
Parameter Descrip-tion Instruction
Q850CCIDX Q850 customizationindex
It is an optionalparameter. It rangesfrom 0 to 65535, with adefault of 0.
SMENTERID ID of signalingmodification entrance
It is an optionalparameter, associatedwith the inter-officesignaling modificationentrance. It rangesfrom 0 to 65535, with adefault of 0
Example: Create a DT trunk group to the BSC office with thefollowing requirements:
� Trunk group ID: 99
� ID of the office where the trunk group belongs: 99
� User alias: BSC99
� No. of the CMP module where the trunk group belongs: 3
� MGW topology node No.: 101
� Other parameters: Adopt the default values.
The command is:
ADD TG DT:TG=99,OFC=99,MODULE=4,ND=101,NAME="BSC99",SIGLINE=BSC,KIND=BIDIR,BWAY=NODIR,THD=100,CICSEL=ODD,DAS=0,SIPDAS=0,OPDAS=0,PREDAS=0,DDI=0,OPDDI=0,MINNAT=0,MAXNAT=26,MININT=0,MAXINT=26,INREG=INVALID,OUTREG=INVALID,COLEN=10,BUSYRATE=100,ROAMDAS=0,Q850CCIDX=0,SMENTERID=0,MLPPDM=4294967295,DISINDEX=0;
END OF STEPS
Creating a PCM System
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The No. of the exchange to be configured is given.
� The DT trunk group is configured.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context The PCM system management data associate the resources on thegateway with the signaling on the MSCS.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 157
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
2. Create a PCM system by executing command ADD SPCM.
Table 77 describes the parameters in the ADD SPCM com-mand.
TABLE 77 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD SPCM COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
PCM TG PCM-belonged trunk group ID
NUM Number
It is an optional integer-typeparameter, ranging from 1 to100. In general, select thedefault value.
MGWPCM MGW PCMnumber
It is an optional parameter,consisting of MGWPCM_S andMGWPCM_F. The start andend numbers of the MGWPCM mean that the trunkscorresponded by PCM resourcesof this number section can beinvoked. This parameter is leftblank when the PCM-belongedtrunk number is an interofficeBICC.
INFO Self-loop PCMnumber
It is an optional parameter,with a default of 65535.Enter an integer rangingfrom 0 to 65535. In general,select the default value. Thecorresponding self-loop PCMnumber is required in case ofconfiguring a self-loop office.
NAME Alias It is an optional parameter,consisting of 1~50 characters.
Example: Create a PCM system to the BSC office with the fol-lowing requirements:
� No. of the trunk group where the PCM system belongs: 99
� PCM system No.: 1
� PCM No. in the MGW: 4–6
� User alias: BSC1-1.
The specific command is as follows.
ADD SPCM:TG=99,PCM=1,NUM=3,MGWPCM="4"-"6",INFO=65535,NAME="BSC1-1";
END OF STEPS
158 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
SIGTRAN Configuration
Creating an SCTP
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The physical configuration of the SMP module is complete.
� The range of the SCTP ID is configured in the resource man-agement configuration.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context The configuration of SCTP basic connection is used to configurethe basic information of the SCTP association.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the SCTP connection. The command is ADD SCTPCONN.
Table 78 describes the parameters in the ADD SCTPCONNcommand.
TABLE 78 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD SCTPCONN COMMAND
Parame-ter Name
ParameterDescription Instruction
MODULE Module No.
It is a mandatory parameter,indicating the number of thesignaling module homed by thisSCTP association. Select the SMPmodule number. Each SMP cansupport up to 128 associations.The associations under the sameAS are required sharing loadon SMP modules as more aspossible.
OFCID SCTP oppositeoffice ID
It is a mandatory parameter,designating the office No. of thedirect-associated association.Type the MGW adjacent office No.specified in the adjacent officeconfiguration.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 159
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Parame-ter Name
ParameterDescription Instruction
PROT
Bearer protocoltypes, including
� M2UA
� M2PA
� M3UA
� SUA
� H248
� BICC
� IUA
� DHCTRL
� SIP
� DIM
� V5UA
� H245
It is a mandatory parameter. It isused to identify the upper-layerprotocol type borne by the SCTPassociation. In general, M3UA isselected.M2UA is selected whenMGW transfers the signaling withthe M2UA mode.
ROLE
SCTP applicationattributes.Options include:
SVR: SCTP isused as server
CLT: SCTP is usedas client
It is a mandatory parameter. ForMc interface, MSCS is configuredas CLT, and MGW is configuredas SVR. For Nc interface, thisshould be negotiated by bothsides. For example, the smallsignaling point serves as CLT,and the big signaling point servesas SVR
LOCADDR Local IP address
It is a mandatory parameter. Itdesignates the service addressof local end of this association,with a format of Local IPaddress type-VPN of local IPaddress-Local IP address
Local IP address type: IPv4 andIPv6;
VPN of local IP address: Rangfrom 0 to 65535;
Local IP address: the format isxxx.yyy.zzz.mmm
LOCPORT Local portnumber
It is a mandatory parameter. Itis the local SCTP port number ofthe association, ranging from 1to 65535.
REMADDR Opposite IPaddress
It is a mandatory parameter. Itdesignates the service address ofopposite end of this association,ranging from 1 to 65535.
REMPORT Opposite portnumber
It is a mandatory parameter. It isthe opposite SCTP port numberof the association, ranging from1 to 65535.
160 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
Parame-ter Name
ParameterDescription Instruction
NAME AliasIt is a mandatory parameter witha length ranging from 1 to 50characters.
ID SCTP ID
It is an optional parameter. It isthe global serial number of theSCTP association, ranging from 1to 2048. Configure it accordingto the association planning.
Example: Create the SCTP connection for the Mc interface withthe following requirements.
� MGW office ID: 101
� Bearer protocol: M3UA
� Application attribute: CLT
� SCTP signaling processing module number: 3
� Local port number: 4001
� Opposite port number: 4001
� Local IP address: 192.168.1.11
� Opposite IP address: 192.168.1.31
� SCTP association ID: 3
� Other parameters: default value.
The command is as follows.
ADD SCTPCONN:MODULE=3,OFCID=101,PROT=M3UA,ROLE=CLT,LOCADDR="IPv4"-"0"-"192.168.1.11",LOCPORT=4001,REMADDR="IPv4"-"0"-"192.168.1.31",REMPORT=4001,NAME="BSC",ID=3,INSTRM=16,OUTSTRM=16,MAXRTRY=5,MAXRTO=500,MINRTO=50,INITRTO=100,HB=500,FIXNH=NO,SCTPMAXRTRYNUM=10,DELAYACK=20,MAXBURST=4,PRIMARYPATH=REMIP1,PMTU=0,BREAKTIME=0,PDTHRESH=0,MINCWND=0,PLTIMER=10,MPPLTHRD=2,DPLEN=MTU,CB=200;
END OF STEPS
Creating an ASP
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The SCTP association information is configured.
� The range of the ASP ID is configured in the resource manage-ment configuration.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context ASP configuration defines the one-to-one relationship between theASP and the association.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 161
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the ASP. The command is ADD ASP.
Table 79 describes the parameters in the ADD ASP command.
TABLE 79 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD ASP COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
ASSOCID SCTP ID
It is a mandatory parameter,ranging from 1 to 2048
Type the association IDconfigured in the SCTPconnection configuration.
NAME Alias
It is a mandatory parameter,with a lengthen ranging from1 to 50 characters. It maybe named with a format of“Adjacent office alias-SCTPnumber”.
ID ASP ID
It is an optional parameter,ranging from 1 to 2048.
It is recommended to beconsistent with ASSOCID.
ISLOOP ASP self-loop ID
It is an optional parameter. It isused to set whether the ASP isself-looped.
Select the default value NO
ISLOCK ASP blocking flag
It is an optional parameter. It isused set whether the ASP is inblocking state.
Blocking is used formanagement. Select thedefault value NO
Example: Create the ASP between MSCS and MGW with thefollowing requirements.
� MGW office ID: 101
� SCTP association ID: 3
� ASP configuration ID: 3
� User alias: SCCP.
The command is as follows.
162 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ADD ASP:ASSOCID=3,NAME="SCCP",ID=3,ISLOOP=NO,ISLOCK=NO;
END OF STEPS
Creating an AS
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The ASP configuration is complete.
� The range of the AS ID is configured in the resource manage-ment configuration.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context AS configuration is used to configure the basic information for theapplication server.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create an AS. The command is ADD AS.
Table 80 describes the parameters in the ADD AS command.
TABLE 80 AS PARAMETERS
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
PROT Adaptation layerprotocol
It is a mandatoryparameter. It is requiredto be consistent with thatat the adjacent office side.Configure it according tothe actual conditions. Ingeneral, select M3UA.
ASPID ASP IDIt is associated with theASP ID configured in theASP configuration.
NAME Alias
It is a mandatoryparameter, which iscustomized by the userfor easy recognition.
ID AS ID
It is an optionalparameter. It is theunique ID of the AS. Ingeneral, it is the same asthat of the ASP for easymemory.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 163
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
EXISTCTX
If routing contextexists, including:
� NO: Routingcontext does notexist
� YES: Routingcontext exists
This parameter mustbe consistent with theAS configuration of theopposite-end.
CTXID Routing context ID
It is an integer parameter.If the YES (Routingcontext exists) optionis selected for theEXISTCTX parameter,this parameter mustbe consistent with theAS configuration of theopposite-end.
ASTAG Usage tag In this case, select CLT(IPSP Client).
ASUP User typesIt is an optionalparameter. In this case,select SCCP.
ASMD
Service mode,including:
� OVERRIDE(Over-ride mode)
� LOAD (Load sharemode)
In the over-ride mode,only one ASP is activated.In this case, only one ASPneeds to be configured. Inthe load sharing mode, NASPs should be configuredto be in activated workingstatus, and K ASPs shouldbe configured to be indeactivated standbystatus. Make sure thatthe value of N+K is notmore than the number ofASPs actually configured.This parameter should benegotiated between bothends for consistency.
NVAL N value of load sharemode
It is an integer parameter,ranging from 0 to 16.
N+K should be equalto the number of ASPsconfigured under this AS.
N indicates that this ASis in service as soon as NASPs are in service.
KVAL K value of load sharemode
It is an integer parameter,ranging from 0 to 16.
N+K should be equalto the number of ASPsconfigured under this AS.
K indicates that this AS isout of service as soon asK ASPs are out of service.
164 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
Example: Create the AS between MSCS and MGW with thefollowing requirements.
� Supported adaptation layer protocol: M3UA
� AS ID: 3
� Supported user type: SCCP
� ASP ID: 3
� Client: MSCS
� Alias: BSSAP
The command is as follows.
ADD AS:PROT=M3UA,ASPID="3",NAME="BSSAP",ID=3,EXISTCTX=NO,ASTAG=CLT,ASUP="SCCP",ASMD=LOAD,NVAL=1,KVAL=0;
END OF STEPS
Creating an M3UA Static Route
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The AS configuration is complete.
� The range of M3UA static route ID is configured in the resourcemanagement.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Configuring an M3UA static route means configuring the mappingrelationship between an M3UA static route and an AS.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the M3UA static route. The command is ADDM3UART.
Table 81 describes the main parameters in the ADD M3UARTcommand.
TABLE 81 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD M3UART COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
ID ID of M3UAstatic route
It is an optional parameter,indicating the serial number of theM3UA static route ID, ranging from1 to 640. In general, it is the sameas the AS ID.
ASID AS IDIt is a mandatory parameter,corresponding to the AS IDspecified in the ADD AS command.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 165
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
MODE
Alignmentmode ofroutes.Optionsinclude
� BYTURNS
� LOCAL
� NATURE
Nature: routes are directly sortedaccording by the ASP marshallingsequence in the routing table.
Local: It is unnecessary to realizethe algorithm in the background.The background just needs to makethe alignment according to theNature option.
BYTURNS: in the routing table,the routes at the odd-bit positionare sorted by the serial number ofthe activated ASP, and the routesat the even-bit position are sortedinversely by the serial number ofthe activated ASP
The default is BYTURNS.
NAME AliasIt is a mandatory parameter definedby a user, with a length rangingfrom 1 to 50 characters.
Example: Create an M3UA static route for Mc interface withthe following requirements.
� M3UA static route ID: 3
� AS ID: 3
� User alias: SCCP.
The specific command is as follows.
ADD M3UART:ID=3,ASID=3,MODE=BYTURNS,NAME="SCCP";
END OF STEPS
Creating the SIO-Locating-AS
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The M3UA static route configuration is complete.
� The range of the AS ID is configured in the resource manage-ment configuration.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Where, a routing keyword describes the parameters and their val-ues of a group of No.7 signaling messages. The corresponding ASis selected according to the message attributes, serving the pur-pose of selecting route for messages. The attribute of the messageincludes DPC+NET+OPC+SIO, where, DPC is the destination sig-naling point code, NET is the network type, OPC is the originatingsignaling point code, and SIO is the service indicator octet.
The configuration of SIO-locating-AS is used to locate one serviceto a routing table that is maintained by the ASPs under the AS.Compared with the MTP data configuration of the traditional No.7
166 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
signaling, the ASP configuration of the SCTP connection and M3UAis similar to the link logic and bearer information configuration inthe MTP configuration, the AS configuration of the M3UA is similarto the link set configuration in the MTP configuration, and the SIO-locating-AS configuration is similar to the signaling office ID androute configuration in the MTP configuration. The difference is thatthe IP route to one subscriber of one office is configured in oneSIO-locating-AS configuration record.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the SIO-locating-AS. The command is ADD SIOLOCAS.
Table 82 describes the parameters in the ADD SIOLOCAScommand.
TABLE 82 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD SIOLOCAS COMMAND
Parame-ter Name
ParameterDescription Instruction
ID SIO-locating-AS ID
It is an optional parameter,indicating the serial numberof SIO-locating-AS, rangingfrom 1 to 4096. In general,it is the same as the AS ID.
NAME The name of theSIO-locating-AS
It is customized by users foridentification.
OFCID Destination office ID
The ID of the adjacentoffice corresponded by thedestination signaling pointof M3UA. It correspondsto the adjacent officeID specified in the ADDADJOFC command.
SIO Service indication Select SCCP.
RT1 M3UA static route ID 1It is the static route IDconfigured by the ADDM3UART command.
Example: Create SIO-locating-AS between MSCS and BSC withthe following requirements.
� BSC office ID: 99
� Destination adjacent office ID: 99
� Service indication: SCCP
� M3UA static route ID: 3.
The specific command is as follows.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 167
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ADD SIOLOCAS:ID=3,NAME="SCCP",SIO=SCCP,OFCID=99,OPOFCID=65535,PCM=65535,RT1=3,RT2=0;
END OF STEPS
RNC Data ConfigurationOverview
TypicalNetworking
In the R4 phase, the interface between the RNC and the CS domainuses the ATM bearer, and the MSCS processes the control planeof the Iu_CS interface. The signaling is based on the AAL5 andis transmitted by the SCCP. MGW processes the user plane andthe bearer control plane of the Iu-CS interface. The user dataare based on the AAL2, and transferred on the AAL2 connection.The ALCAP controls the establishment and release of user planeconnections. In the existing networks, the signaling interworkingbetween the MSCS and the RNC is implemented by the built-in SG(SG) in the MGW. Figure 10 shows the networking mode and theinterface protocol stack.
FIGURE 10 NETWORKING BETWEEN MGW AND RNC
The ATM bearer is used between the MGW and the RNC, and theIP bearer is used between the MGW and MSCS. Working in theswitching mode, the built-in SG in the MGW performs the signalingswitching between the MSCS and the RNC.
Data Collection Before data configuration, it is supposed to complete collectingthe related data of MSCS-to-MGW, and MGW-to-RNC. Table 83 andTable 84 list the data to be collected. The parameter values arejust examples. Input these parameters according to the actualcondition during the practical data construction procedure.
168 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
TABLE 83 DATA FOR INTERCONNECTION WITH THE MGW
Parameter Items Parameter Values
Real interface address of ZXWN MSCS 192.168.1.11
Real interface address of ZXWN MGW 192.168.1.31
Signaling point code (14-bit) of ZXWNMSCS 1.11.1
Signaling point code (14-bit) of ZXWNMGW (SG) 1.31.1
SCTP port No. of ZXWN MSCS (client) 4001
SCTP port No. of ZXWN MGW (server) 4001
TABLE 84 DATA FOR INTERCONNECTION WITH THE RNC
Parameter Items Parameter Values
The type of the local signaling point 14-bit
SPC of the local office 1.100.1
RNCID 1
Location area code 12FB
Service area code 1
AMR codec rate (newly added) 122
ATM address/coding type (the codingtype is NSAP)
00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.06
MCC+MNC 46007
Path ID 1
Signaling link code (SLC) in a signalinglink set 0
Data Configura-tion Flow
This section introduces the data configuration on the MSCS foradding a RNC adjacent office under the precondition that the MGWis successfully registered to the MSCS, including the configurationsof signaling-forwarded data to and through the RNC. Table 85 de-scribes the configuration flow.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 169
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
TABLE 85 RNC ADJACENT OFFICE DATA CONFIGURATION FLOW
Steps Operations Related Command
1 Creating a RNC adjacentoffice ADD ADJOFC
2 Creating RNC officedirection ADD RNCOFC
3 Creating a RNC topologynode ADD TOPO
4Creating the topologyrelationship between RNCand MGW
ADD RNCMGWTOPO
5 Creating an ATM trunkgroup ADD TG ATM
6 Creating a PCM system ADD SPCM
ADD SCTPCONN
ADD ASP
ADD AS7
Creating the associationsand the M3UA data switchedby the signaling
ADD M3UART
8 Creating the SIO-Locating-AS ADD SIOLOCAS
Creating an RNC Adjacent Office
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The data configuration of the local office is completed.
� The range of adjacent office number is configured in the re-source management.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Perform this procedure for configuring the basic information of theRNC adjacent office.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the RNC adjacent office. The command is ADD ADJOFC.
Table 86 describes the main parameters in the ADD ADJOFCcommand.
170 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
TABLE 86 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD ADJOFC COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
ID Office ID
It is a mandatory parameter,indicating the identificationnumber of the adjacent office,and ranging from 1 to 2048.It is usually configured as theexchange ID of the adjacentoffice during the all-networkplanning.
NAME AliasIt is a mandatory parameter,which is the alias customizedby the user.
NET Network type
It is a mandatory parameter,indicating the network type ofthe SPC used for connectingthe local office to the adjacentoffice when the local office isconfigured with several SPs.
The default is the network typeof this SP when there is onlyone SP in the local office.
OFCTYPE Adjacent office typeIt is a mandatory parameter.
Type RNC in this case
SPCFMT SPC format Select TRIPLE_DEC
SPCTYPE SPC type
DPC SPC
It is a mandatory parameter.Specify it based on the SPCtype of the adjacent office
RC Area code When the adjacent office typeis RNC, RC must be empty.
ASSOTYPE
Association type,including
� AM_SURE(directconnectionmode)
� AM_QUASI(half directconnectionmode)
� AM_NONE(noneconnectionmode)
It is an optional parameter.
Select AM_QUASI
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 171
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
SPTYPE
Signaling pointtype, including
� SEP
� STP
� STEP
It is an optional parameter.
Select SEP
SSF
Subservicefunction, including
� INTERNA-TIONAL (In-ternational sig-naling pointcode)
� INTERNA-TIONALSTANDBY(Internationalstandby signal-ing point code)
� NATIONAL(Nationalsignaling pointcode)
� NATIONALSTANDBY(Nationalstandbysignaling pointcode)
It is an optional parameter. Ingeneral, select NATIONAL fordomestic use.
TEST Test flag
It is an optional parameter, forsetting whether the MTP3 linkactively initiates the link testafter entering in the servicestatus.
It is selected by default.
BANDFLAG Broadbandattribute
It is an optional parameter.Select YES when all the linksbetween two SPs are SIGTRANor ATM signaling links.
PRTCTYPE
Protocol types,including:
� CHINA (China)
� ITU (Interna-tional Telecom-municationsUnion)
� ANSI(AmericanNationalStandardsInstitute).
It is an optional parameter.
CHINA and ITU are used forthe NO.7 signaling networkingof the ITU standards. ANSIis used for the No.7 signalingnetworking of the Americanstandards.
172 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
CLST Cluster ID
It is an optional parameter.The cluster number shouldbe configured in ADD CLST.The parameter ranges from0 to 65535, with a default of65535.
INFO
Office Info,including:
� CIC_PCM (CICstarts theload sharingaccording tothe PCM codemode)
� BLOCK(Manual blockstatus)
� EVEN_CIC(The officecontrols theeven CIC whenCIC resourcecontentionoccurs)
� CALL-ING(Callingtransform is al-lowed)
� CALLED(Calledtransform isallowed)
� MOD24_CIC(CIC mode with24 mode)
� TEST(Dynamic test)
It is an optional parameter,with a default of CIC_PCM(CIC using PCM Code ModeStarts Load Control)
RELATE-DOFC1 Related office ID It is an optional parameter,
ranging from 0 from 3000
INFOEX
Office extend info,including
� SIGBRDCST(SupportSignalingBroadcastMessage)
� MTP(HongkongMTP Standard)
� DUPU (Screen DUPUmessage)
It is an optional parameter
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 173
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
� SUA_REC_DT1 (ReceiveSUA messageand handle it asDT1 message)
� SUA_SND-_DT1 (SendSUA messageand handle it asDT1 messagewithout SN.)
� OPEN_TG-_RES (Openoutter trunkgroup re-source)
Example: Create an RNC adjacent office with the following re-quirements.
� RNC office ID: 100
� Network type: 2
� User alias: RNC100
� Destination SPC: 1.100.1
� SPC type: 14-bit
� Adjacent office type: RNC
� Association type: Quasi-associated mode.
The specific command is as follows.
ADD ADJOFC:ID=100,NAME="RNC100",NET=2,OFCTYPE="RNC",SPCFMT=TRIPLE_DEC,SPCTYPE=14,DPC="1.100.1",ASSOTYPE=AM_QUASI,SPTYPE=SEP,SSF=NATIONALSTANDBY,SUBPROTTYPE=DEFAULT,TEST=YES,BANDFLAG=NO,PRTCTYPE=CHINA,CLST=65535,INFO="CIC_PCM",RELATEDOFC1=0;
END OF STEPS
Office Direction and TopologyConfiguration
Creating RNC Office Direction
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� You know the number of the exchange to be configured.
� The RNC adjacent office is created.
174 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Perform this procedure to configure some additive attributes of theRNC adjacent office, thus to associate the RNCID with the RNCoffice.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the RNC office direction. The command is ADD RNCOFC.
Table 87 describes the main parameters in the ADD RNCOFCcommand.
TABLE 87 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD RNCOFC COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
OFCID RNC office ID
It is a mandatory parameterranging from 1 to 256.
It is the RNC office IDspecified in the RNC officeconfiguration.
MCC Mobile country code
It is a mandatory parameter,ranging from 1 to 4characters. For China,it is 460.
MNC Mobile network codeIt is a mandatory parameterwith a length ranging from 2to 3 characters.
RNCID RNC IDIt is a mandatory parameter,ranging from 0 to 4095. It isprovided by the RNC side.
RABDLY RAB Delay(ms)The parameter ranges from0 to 65535, with a default of100
SDUERA
Class A SDU ErrorRatio. The optionsinclude:
� ERRRATIO1(1*10^(-2)
� ERRRATIO2(7*10^(-3)
� ERRRATIO3(1*10^(-3)
� ERRRATIO4(1*10^(-4)
� ERRRATIO5(1*10^(-5)
The default value isERRRATIO2 (7*10^(-3)
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 175
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
RBERA
Class A Residual BER.The options include:
� ERRRATIO1(5*10^(-2))
� ERRRATIO2(1*10^(-2))
� ERRRATIO3(5*10^(-3))
� ERRRATIO4(1*10^(-3))
� ERRRATIO5(1*10^(-4))
� ERRRATIO6(1*10^(-5))
� ERRRATIO7(1*10^(-6))
The default value isERRRATIO7 (1*10^(-6))
RBERB
Class B Residual BER.The options include:
� ERRRATIO1(5*10^(-2))
� ERRRATIO2(1*10^(-2))
� ERRRATIO3(5*10^(-3))
� ERRRATIO4(1*10^(-3))
� ERRRATIO5(1*10^(-4))
� ERRRATIO6(1*10^(-5))
� ERRRATIO7(1*10^(-6))
The default value isERRRATIO4 (1*10^(-3))
RBERC
Class C Residual BER.The options include:
� ERRRATIO1(5*10^(-2))
� ERRRATIO2(1*10^(-2))
� ERRRATIO3(5*10^(-3))
� ERRRATIO4(1*10^(-3))
� ERRRATIO5(1*10^(-4))
� ERRRATIO6(1*10^(-5))
� ERRRATIO7(1*10^(-6))
The default value isERRRATIO3 (5*10^(-3))
176 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
SELMGTYPE
Iu Interface LoadShare Mode. Theoptions include:
� EXCELLENT(Ex-cellent choicepriority)
� LOAD(Load sharepriority)
The default value isEXCELLENT (Excellentchoice priority)
ATMADDR RNC ATM Address
ADDRPLAN
ATM AddressPlan, includingE.164(E.164) andNSAP(NSAP)
It is an optional parameter.Configure the ATM addressand coding plan of thecorresponding RNC.
ATM address code can adoptthe NSAP that has a fixedlength of 20 bytes) or E.164(that is an extendable BCDcode).
The configuration hereshould be consistent withthe RNC office ID parametersat the MGW side.
BTRY1
First Rebear Mode.The options include:
� NO(NO RETRY);
� BEARER(TRYOTHER REBEARMODES;
� MGW(TRY OTHERMGW)
The default is NO(NORETRY)
BTRY2
Second Rebear Mode.The options include:
� NO(NO RETRY);
� BEARER(TRYOTHER REBEARMODES;
� MGW(TRY OTHERMGW)
The default is NO(NORETRY)
RAS RNC OfficeReAssignment.Options include:
� NO(NO);
� YES(YES)
The default value is NO(NO)
Example: Create the RNC office direction with the followingrequirements.
� RNC office ID: 100
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 177
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
� Mobile country code: 460
� Mobile network code: 00
� RNC ID: 1
� ATM address of RNC: 12.3456.7890.abcd.efff.ffff.ffff.ffff.ff-ff.ffff.ff
� ATM address plan: E164.
The specific command is as follows.
ADD RNCOFC:OFCID=100,MCC="460",MNC="00",RNCID=1,RABDLY=100,SDUERA=ERRRATIO2,RBERA=ERRRATIO7,RBERB=ERRRATIO4,RBERC=ERRRATIO3,SELMGTYPE=EXCELLENT,ATMADDR="12.3456.7890.abcd.efff.ffff.ffff.ffff.ffff.ffff.ff",ADDRPLAN=E164,BTRY1=NO,BTRY2=NO,RAS=NO;
END OF STEPS
Creating an RNC Topology Node
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� You know the number of the exchange to be configured.
� The voice CODEC template is created.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Perform this procedure to create the adjacent NE information, in-cluding equipment type, bearer type and attributes, user planeversion, encoding and decoding template, and other information.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create an RNC topology node. The command is ADD TOPO.
Table 88 describes the main parameters in the ADD TOPOcommand.
TABLE 88 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TOPO COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
ID Topologicalnode ID
It is a mandatory parameter,ranging from 1 to 2,048. It is usedfor defining a topological node. Itis recommended that this ID isconsistent with the office ID of thisnode.
OFCID Office IDIt is a mandatory parameterfor specify the office ID of thistopological node, ranging from 1
178 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
to 3,000. This parameter mustbe defined by the ADD ADJOFCcommand first. Type the RNC officeID according to actual conditions.
NAME Alias
It is a mandatory parameter fornaming this topological node, witha length ranging from 1 to 50characters.
CODECID CODECidentity
It is a mandatory parameterfor specifying the Encoding anddecoding speech Template usedby this topological node. Thisparameter must be defined by theADD CODECTPL command first.
Type it according to the actualconditions.
ETYPE Equipmenttype
It is an optional parameter forspecifying the NE type of thistopological node.
Select RNC for an RNC node.
IPVER IP version ofthe node
It is an optional parameter,indicating the IP protocol versionsupported between nodes. SelectIPV4 or IPV6 according to theactual conditions. In general, it isset as IPV4
ATTR Bearerattributes
This parameter is only valid forthe node with the type of R4GW(MGW). You need not to configureit for an RNC topology node.
UPVERUser planeprotocolversion
It is an optional parameter toregulate the user plane versionof this node, ranging from V1to V16. It can support one ormore of these user plane versions.This parameter is only valid forRNC-type or MGW-type NE.
In general, V2 is selected (meaningsupporting Version 2) according tothe user-plane version supportedby RNC.
ATTR2
Extendedattributes(tunnelmode),including
� NOTUNL(Nonetunnelmode)
� RTUNL(Rapidtunnelmode)
This parameter sets which tunnelmode is used for setting up abearer when this node supportsthe IP/RTP bearer, with a default ofNOTUNL (None tunnel mode).
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 179
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
� DTUNL(Delaytunnelmode)
TRFMOD
Transmissionmode,includingMCINTF (Mcinterfacesignal transfermode)
This parameter is used to set thatmode used by the topology forreporting the detected CNG orCED fax signals, with a defaultof MCINTF (Mc interface signaltransfer mode).
UPERRCTRL Error SDUcontrol
YES: The user plane entityimplements error inspection, andsets the FQC bit position accordingto the result. It will transmit allframes includes the error frames tothe user plane layer. During a call,the error packet control parameterdelerrsdu=Yes, which is deliveredby the terminal established byMGW on the Mc interface. Theerror packet control parameterdeliveryOfErroneousSDU is YES,NA, NA during RAB assignment.
NO: The user plane entityimplements the error inspection.It will directly discard the errorframe. During a call, theerror packet control parameterdelerrsdu=No, which is deliveredby the terminal established byMGW on the Mc interface. Theerror packet control parameterdeliveryOfErroneousSDU is NO,NA, NA during RAB assignment.
INVALIDTION: The user planeentity does not implement theerror inspection. During a call,the error packet control parameterdelerrsdu=NA, which is deliveredby the terminal established byMGW on the Mc interface. Theerror packet control parameterdeliveryOfErroneousSDU is NA, NA,NA during RAB assignment.
This parameter regulates thehandling method of the userplane for error frames. It is onlyvalid for MGW-type and RNC-typetopological node. The default valueis YES
180 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
DTMFTC
Tandem officesend DTMFuse TC mode,containing twooptions: Noand YES
This parameter is used to setwhether the tandem office uses theTC resources during DTMF numberdelivery.
The default value is NO
MGWCON
MGWcongestionreportingcapability
It contains the following options.
� SMGWCON (Standard MGWcongestion event)
� CMGWCON (Custom MGWcongestion event).
The default value is SMGWCON.
Example: Create a topology node with the following require-ments.
� RNC office ID: 100
� Topology node ID: 100
� Alias: RNC100
� CODEC ID: 1
� RNC-supported user-plane version: V2.
The specific command is as follows.
ADD TOPO:ID=100,OFCID=100,NAME="RNC100",CODECID=1,ETYPE=RNC,PROTTYPE=H248,DMNAME="RNC",IPVER=IPV4,UPVER="V2",ATTR2=NOTUNL,TRFMOD=MCINTF,UPERRCTRL=YES,DTMFTC=NO,MGWCON=SMGWCON,AUTOFAX=YES,OOBTC=NO,BCUID=0,SENDCAP=NO,G711TRAN=NO,BICCDTMF=TRANSPARENT,IPBCP2833=BYMGW,BICCDTMPPER=0,AOIPPRO=PRIVATE;
END OF STEPS
Creating the Topology Relationship between RNCand MGW
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� You know the number of the exchange to be configured.
� The RNC topology node is created.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Perform this procedure to configure the topological relationshipbetween RNC and MGW, thus to associate the MGW node with theRNC node.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 181
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create the topology relationship between RNC and MGW. Thecommand is ADD RNCMGWTOPO.
Table 89 describes the main parameters in the ADD RNCMGWTOPO command.
TABLE 89 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD RNCMGWTOPO COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
MGWID MGW node ID
It is a mandatory parameter,ranging from 1 to 2048.
It is the node ID specifiedduring the MGW topologicalnode configuration
RANTYPE Office type It is a mandatory parameter.Select RNC for RNC access.
RANID RNC/BSC nodenumber
It is a mandatory parameter,ranging from 1 to 2048.
It is the node ID specifiedduring the RNC topologicalnode configuration.
SHMODE
Load SharingMode, including:
� NONE (NOTLoad Sharing)
� BEARLOAD(Bear LoadSharing)
� MBLOAD(Master-Backup LoadSharing)
The parameter is used toset the multiple load sharingmodes, with a default ofNONE
BTYPE1
Bearer Type 1,including:
� ATM (ATM)
� IP (IP)
The parameter indicatesthe first bearer type, with adefault of ATM
BRATIO1 Bearer Type 1Ratio
The parameter is used to theset the proportion of the firstbearer type, with a default of1
BTYPE2
Bearer Type 2,including:
� NONE (NONE)
� ATM (ATM)
� IP (IP)
The parameter indicates thesecond bearer type, with adefault of NONE
182 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
BRATIO2 Bearer Type 2Ratio
The parameter is used tothe set the proportion of thesecond bearer type, with adefault of 1
BPER Ratio of bearerfrom MGW to RNC
It is an optional parameter,ranging from 1 to 10.
It is used for setting thetraffic load-sharing ratiowhen the RNC accessesseveral MGWs. If the RNConly connects to one MGW,this parameter is set as 1 bydefault
NAME AliasIt is an optional parameterwith a length ranging from 0to 50 characters.
Example: Create the topology relationship between RNC andMGW with the following requirements.
� MGW node ID: 101
� RNC node ID: 100.
The specific command is as follows.
ADD RNCMGWTOPO:MGWID=101,RANTYPE=RNC,RANID=100,SHMODE=NONE,BTYPE1=ATM,BRATIO1=1,BTYPE2=NONE,BRATIO2=1,BPER=1;
END OF STEPS
Trunk and PCM Configuration
Creating an ATM Trunk Group
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The exchange ID to be configured is given.
� The trunk group No. range is set in the resource managementsystem.
� The adjacent MGW office to which the trunk group points iscreated.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context When the ATM bearer is adopted between MGWs, configure ATMtrunk groups.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 183
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create an ATM trunk group by executing command ADD TGATM.
The explanation of the main parameters in command ADD TGATM is shown in Table 90.
TABLE 90 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TG ATM COMMAND
ParameterName
Parameter Descrip-tion Instruction
TG Trunk group ID
It is a mandatoryparameter. It is usedto define an ATM trunkgroup, and needs to beplanned in the resourcemanagement system inadvance. It is a globalunified number
OFC ID of the office wherethe trunk group belongs
It is a mandatoryparameter, rangingfrom 1 to 256. It isused to specify thecorresponding office ofthe trunk group. Thisparameter must bedefined by commandADD ADJOFC at first.Then it can be indexedhere
NAME User alias
It is an optionalparameter, consistingof 0~50 characters.
It is used to specificallydescribe a trunk group tomake it easily recognized
MODULE Module where the trunkgroup belongs
It is a mandatoryparameter, which isan integer, ranging from1 to 127. It is used tospecify the SMP moduleof processing traffic onthis trunk group
NDNode No. of the MGWwhere the trunk groupbelongs
It is a mandatoryparameter, which isan integer, ranging from1~2048. It is used tospecify the topologynode No. of the MGWproviding bearer, whichis controlled by the localMGCF
184 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
Parameter Descrip-tion Instruction
SIGLINEInter-office line signalidentification, includingBICC (BICC signaling)
It is an optionalparameter. It is used toidentify the line type ofthis trunk, with a defaultof BICC
KIND
Trunk group types,including the followingthree types:
IN (incoming trunkgroup): Indicates thatthe local office processesthe incoming calls fromthe peer-end office.
OUT (outgoing trunkgroup): Indicates thatthe local office onlyprocesses the outgoingcalls to the peer-endoffice.
BIDIR (Two-way trunkgroup): Indicates thatthe local office processesboth the incoming callsfrom the peer-end officeand the outgoing calls tothe peer-end office
It is an optionalparameter. It is usedto specify the callconnection directionin this trunk group inthe local office, witha default of BIDIR. Itshould be negotiatedwith the peer-end office
BWAY
Bearer establishmentdirection, including thefollowing three types:
NODIR (No direction):The inter-office beareris established withoutdirection.
BACK: The inter-officebearer is establishedbased on the backwardmode.
FORWD: Theinter-office bearer isestablished based on theforward mode
It is an optionalparameter. It is used tospecify the inter-officebearer establishmentdirection, with a defaultof NODIR
THD Overload controlthreshold
It is an optionalparameter, ranging from0 to 100, with a defaultof 100. This parametertakes effect when levelsof congestion occur andload control is required
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 185
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
Parameter Descrip-tion Instruction
CICSLTP
Circuit selecting modes,including:
MIN: Every time whenthe system selects atrunk circuit, it alwaysbegins with the circuitwith the minimumnumber. This mode canimplement the preferredplan of trunk circuits.
MAX: Every time whenthe system selects atrunk circuit, it alwaysbegins with the circuitwith the maximumnumber. This mode canimplement the preferredplan of trunk circuits.
CYC: Every time whenthe system selectsa trunk circuit, italways begins withthe circuit next to theone previously selected.Suppose the numbersof the trunk circuits in atrunk group in ascendingorder are “TKC0, TKC1,…. , TKCn”. If TKC0is selected at the firsttime, the system willselect the trunk circuit inthe order of “TKC0®TKC1®…®TKCn®TKC0®TKC1®…®TKCn”.
ODD: Every time whenthe system selects atrunk circuit, it alwaysselects the circuit withan odd number.
EVEN: Every time whenthe system selects atrunk circuit, it alwaysselects the circuit withan even number.
IDLE: Every time whenthe system selects atrunk circuit, it alwaysselects the idlest circuit.
BUSY: Every time whenthe system selects atrunk circuit, it alwaysselects the busiest circuit
It is an optionalparameter. It is used tospecify the trunk circuitselecting policy of thesystem within this trunkgroup, with a defaultof CYC. If this trunkgroup is a two-waytrunk group, it isrecommended to set thecircuit selecting modeto ODD/EVEN mode toprevent contention whentwo exchanges selectcircuits
186 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
Parameter Descrip-tion Instruction
DAS DAS for the callednumber
It is an optionalparameter. It is usedto analyze the callednumber in an incomingcall. This parametermust be defined bycommand ADD DAS atfirst. Then it can beindexed here
SIPDAS
DAS for the domainname of the callednumber during SIPoutgoing calls
It is used get the nameof the IMS domainwhere the called partyis located throughanalyzing the callednumber during a SIPoutgoing call. It isonly used for RTP trunkgroups
OPDAS DAS for the callingnumber
It is used to analyzethe calling number inan incoming call. Thisparameter must bedefined by commandADD DAS at first. Thenit can be indexed here
PREDAS DAS for pre-analyzingthe called number
It is used to pre-analyzethe called number inan incoming call. Thisparameter must bedefined by commandADD PREDAS at first.Then it can be indexedhere
DDI Incoming called numbertransform ID
It is the index ofthe incoming callednumber transform. Thisparameter must bedefined by commandADD DDI at first. Thenit can be indexed here
OPDDI Incoming calling numbertransform ID
It is the index ofthe incoming callingnumber transform. Thisparameter must bedefined by commandADD DDI at first. Thenit can be indexed here
MINNAT Minimum nationalnumber length
It is an optionalparameter, which is aninteger ranging from 0 to26, with a default of 0.It is used to specify theminimum digit length ofthe called number duringa national incoming call
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 187
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
Parameter Descrip-tion Instruction
MAXNAT Maximum nationalnumber length
It is an optionalparameter, which is aninteger ranging from 0 to26, with a default of 26.It is used to specify themaximum digit length ofthe called number duringa national incoming call
MININT Minimum internationalnumber length
It is an optionalparameter, which is aninteger ranging from 0 to26, with a default of 0.It is used to specify theminimum digit lengthof the called numberduring an internationalincoming call
MAXINT Maximum internationalnumber length
It is an optionalparameter, which is aninteger ranging from 0 to26, with a default of 26.It is used to specify themaximum digit lengthof the called numberduring an internationalincoming call
INREG
Incoming registersignaling flag. Optionsinclude:
INVALID
It is an optionalparameter, with a defaultvalue of INVALID
OUTREG
Outgoing registersignaling flag. Optionsinclude:
INVALID
It is an optionalparameter, with a defaultvalue of INVALID
COLEN The maximum length ofCAS calling number end
It is an optionalparameter. It rangesfrom 1 to 32, with adefault of 10.
BUSYRATE Trunk circuit usage
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer rangingfrom 1 to 100, with adefault of 100. Afterthe trunk circuit usageis configured, when theratio of busy circuitsto all circuits in thistrunk group exceeds thisvalue, congestion occursin this trunk group.After the congestionis relieved, report thetrunk congestion timesand congestion durationin the performancestatistics. This
188 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
ParameterName
Parameter Descrip-tion Instruction
parameter does nottake effect when it isconfigured to 100
ROAMDAS DAS for roamingnumbers
It is an optionalparameter. After thisDAS is configured, ifthe local office servesas a GMSC, this DASis preferred for thereturned roamingnumbers. Otherwise,the roaming numberDAS configured inthe number analysistemplate is used
Q850CCIDX Q850 customizationindex
It is an optionalparameter. It rangesfrom 0 to 65535, with adefault of 0.
SMENTERID ID of signalingmodification entrance
IIt is an optionalparameter, associatedwith the inter-officesignaling modificationentrance. It rangesfrom 0 to 65535, with adefault of 0
Example: Create an ATM trunk group with the following re-quirements.
� Trunk group ID: 100
� ID of the office where the trunk group belongs: 100
� User alias: RNC
� No. of the module processing the trunk group: 3
� MGW topology node No.: 101
� Inter-office line signal identification: BICC
� Other parameters: Adopt the default values.
The command is:
ADD TG ATM:TG=100,OFC=100,MODULE=4,ND=101,NAME="RNC",SIGLINE=BICC,KIND=BIDIR,BWAY=NODIR,THD=100,CICSEL=ODD,DAS=0,SIPDAS=0,OPDAS=0,PREDAS=0,DDI=0,OPDDI=0,MINNAT=0,MAXNAT=26,MININT=0,MAXINT=26,INREG=INVALID,OUTREG=INVALID,COLEN=10,BUSYRATE=100,ROAMDAS=0,Q850CCIDX=0,SMENTERID=0,MLPPDM=4294967295,DISINDEX=0;
END OF STEPS
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 189
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Creating a PCM System
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The No. of the exchange to be configured is given.
� The ATM trunk group is configured.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context The PCM system management data associate the resources on thegateway with the signaling on the MSCS.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create a PCM system by executing command ADD SPCM.
Table 91 describes the parameters in the ADD SPCM com-mand.
TABLE 91 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD SPCM COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
PCM TG PCM-belonged trunk group ID
NUM Number
It is an optional integer-typeparameter, ranging from 1 to100. In general, select the defaultvalue.
MGWPCM MGW PCMnumber
It is an optional parameter,consisting of MGWPCM_S andMGWPCM_F. The start and endnumbers of the MGW PCM meanthat the trunks corresponded byPCM resources of this numbersection can be invoked. Thisparameter is left blank when thePCM-belonged trunk number is aninteroffice BICC.
INFO Self-loop PCMnumber
It is an optional parameter, with adefault of 65535. Enter an integerranging from 0 to 65535. Ingeneral, select the default value.The corresponding self-loop PCMnumber is required in case ofconfiguring a self-loop office.
NAME Alias It is an optional parameter,consisting of 1~50 characters.
Example: Create a PCM system to the RNC office with the fol-lowing requirements:
190 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 1 Data Making for New Commissioning
� No. of the trunk group where the PCM system belongs:100
� PCM system No.: 1
� PCM No. in the MGW: 7–9
� User alias: RNC.
The specific command is as follows.
ADD SPCM:TG=100,PCM=1,NUM=3,MGWPCM="7"-"9",INFO=65535,NAME="RNC";
END OF STEPS
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 191
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
This page is intentionally blank.
192 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
C h a p t e r 2
Access DataConfiguration
Table of ContentsOverview........................................................................ 193Creating Emergency Call Center ........................................ 194Special Serivce Configuration ............................................ 196LAI and GCI/Service Area Configuration.............................. 201
OverviewDescription This chapter describes how to configure the location area and the
cell data on the MSCS. When a base station is added on the radioside, the corresponding cell data need to be configured on theMSCS. When the adjacent MSC is added on the network side, theadjacent location area data need to be configured on MSCS for theproper handover between the offices.
When the MSCS is interconnected with the BSC, the special ser-vice number dialed in different cells requires to converting to dif-ferent numbers for connection. When the MSCS is interconnectedwith the RNC, the special service number dialed in different cellspossibly also requires conversion. Therefore, configuring differentspecial service attendant consoles and special service group datais required.
ConfigurationFlow
Table 92 describes the access configuration flow.
TABLE 92 ACCESS CONFIGURATION FLOW
Steps Operations Related Command
1 Creating emergency call center ADD ECC
2 Creating a special-servicephone group ADD SSPN
3 Creating the special servicephone called number analysis ADD TPDNAL
4 Creating a LAI controlled bythe local office ADD LAI
5 Creating an adjacenet LAI ADD LAI
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 193
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Steps Operations Related Command
6 Creating a global cell ADD GCI
7 Creating a service area ADD SAI
Creating Emergency CallCenter
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The exchange ID to be configured is given.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context The emergency call function does not analyze the emergency callnumber. After the subscriber dials a specified emergency call num-ber in one location area, the core network will obtain the emer-gency call center index according to the location area where theemergency call is received. After that, it will find the correspond-ing number of the emergency call center number according to thethe emergency call center index, and then analyze this number.
This topic describes how to create emergency call center.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create emergency call center with the command ADD ECC.
The explanation of the main parameters in command ADD ECCis shown in Table 93.
TABLE 93 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD ECC COMMAND
ParameterName Parameter Description Instruction
ECC Emergency Call CenterNumber
It is a mandatoryparameter, consistingof 1~32 digits
ECCIDX Emergency Call CenterIndex
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer, ranging from0 to 255
SERVTYPE
Emergency Call ServiceType, including
� DFT: DefaultEmergency CallCenter Number
It is an optionalparameter with thedefault value DFT
194 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 2 Access Data Configuration
ParameterName Parameter Description Instruction
� POLICE: PoliceEmergency CallCenter Number
� AMBULANCE:AmbulanceEmergency CallCenter Number
� FIRE: Fire-fightingEmergency CallCenter Number
� MARINE: MarineEmergency CallCenter Number
� MOUTAIN: MountainArea Emergency CallCenter Number
NAT
Configuration NumberType, including
� UNKNOWN:Unknown
� INTERNATIONAL:International
� NATIONAL: National
� SPECIAL: SpecialNumber Of TheNetwork
� SHORT: AbbreviatedNumber
It is an optionalparameter withethe default valueUNKNOWN
NAME AliasIt is an optionalparameter, consistingof 0~50 characters
For example, create the emergency call center. The emergencycall number is 112, the emergency call center index is 1, theemergency call service type is DFT, the configuration numbertype is international, and the alias is Emergency1. The com-mand is as follows:
ADD ECC:ECC="112",ECCIDX=1,SERVTYPE="DFT",NAT=INTERNATIONAL,NAME="Emgergency1";
END OF STEPS
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 195
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Special SerivceConfigurationCreating a Special Service PhoneGroup
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The exchange ID to be configured is given.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context In the case of the MSCS being connected with the BSC, when youdial a special-service number in different cells, it is required toconvert this number to different numbers for connection.
In the case of the MSCS being connected with the RNC, when youdial a special-service number in different service areas, it is alsorequired to convert this number to different numbers for connec-tion.
Therefore, different special-service attendant consoles need to beconfigured.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create a special service phone group with the command ADDSSPN.
The explanation of the main parameters in command ADDSSPN is shown in Table 94.
TABLE 94 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD SSPN COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
SSPGID
SpecialServicePhone GroupID
It is a mandatory parameter,which is an integer, ranging form1 to 65535. It is associated withthe special-service phone groupID in the special-service groupconfiguration, exclusively defines anattendant console together with thespecial-service number
SSPGNAME
SpecialServicePhone GroupName
It is an optional parameter, consistingof 0~50 characters. It is used toidentify a special-service group
196 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 2 Access Data Configuration
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
SSNUM 1SpecialServiceNumber 1
It is a mandatory parameter, whichis an integer, ranging form 1 to2147483647. It is the special-servicenumber, such as 114. It exclusivelydefines an attendant console togetherwith the special-service traffic groupID
PNUM1 PhoneNumber 1
It is a mandatory parameterindicating the phone console numbercorresponding to the special servicephone group ID and the specialservice number. It ranges from 0 to40
SSNUM 2SpecialServiceNumber 2
It is a mandatory parameter, whichis an integer, ranging form 1 to2147483647. It is the special-servicenumber, such as 114. It exclusivelydefines an attendant console togetherwith the special-service traffic groupID
PNUM2 PhoneNumber 2
It is a mandatory parameterindicating the phone console numbercorresponding to the special servicephone group ID and the specialservice number. It ranges from 0 to40
SSNUM 3SpecialServiceNumber 3
It is a mandatory parameter, whichis an integer, ranging form 1 to2147483647. It is the special-servicenumber, such as 114. It exclusivelydefines an attendant console togetherwith the special-service traffic groupID
PNUM3 PhoneNumber 3
It is a mandatory parameterindicating the phone console numbercorresponding to the special servicephone group ID and the specialservice number. It ranges from 0 to40
SSNUM 4SpecialServiceNumber 4
It is a mandatory parameter, whichis an integer, ranging form 1 to2147483647. It is the special-servicenumber, such as 114. It exclusivelydefines an attendant console togetherwith the special-service traffic groupID
PNUM4 PhoneNumber 4
It is a mandatory parameterindicating the phone console numbercorresponding to the special servicephone group ID and the specialservice number. It ranges from 0 to40
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 197
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
SSNUM 5SpecialServiceNumber 5
It is a mandatory parameter, whichis an integer, ranging form 1 to2147483647. It is the special-servicenumber, such as 114. It exclusivelydefines an attendant console togetherwith the special-service traffic groupID
PNUM5 PhoneNumber 5
It is a mandatory parameterindicating the phone console numbercorresponding to the special servicephone group ID and the specialservice number. It ranges from 0 to40
SSNUM 6SpecialServiceNumber 6
It is a mandatory parameter, whichis an integer, ranging form 1 to2147483647. It is the special-servicenumber, such as 114. It exclusivelydefines an attendant console togetherwith the special-service traffic groupID
PNUM6 PhoneNumber 6
It is a mandatory parameterindicating the phone console numbercorresponding to the special servicephone group ID and the specialservice number. It ranges from 0 to40
SSNUM 7SpecialServiceNumber 7
It is a mandatory parameter, whichis an integer, ranging form 1 to2147483647. It is the special-servicenumber, such as 114. It exclusivelydefines an attendant console togetherwith the special-service traffic groupID
PNUM7 PhoneNumber 7
It is a mandatory parameterindicating the phone console numbercorresponding to the special servicephone group ID and the specialservice number. It ranges from 0 to40
SSNUM 8SpecialServiceNumber 8
It is a mandatory parameter, whichis an integer, ranging form 1 to2147483647. It is the special-servicenumber, such as 114. It exclusivelydefines an attendant console togetherwith the special-service traffic groupID
PNUM8 PhoneNumber 8
It is a mandatory parameterindicating the phone console numbercorresponding to the special servicephone group ID and the specialservice number. It ranges from 0 to40
198 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 2 Access Data Configuration
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
SSNUM 9SpecialServiceNumber 9
It is a mandatory parameter, whichis an integer, ranging form 1 to2147483647. It is the special-servicenumber, such as 114. It exclusivelydefines an attendant console togetherwith the special-service traffic groupID
PNUM9 PhoneNumber 9
It is a mandatory parameterindicating the phone console numbercorresponding to the special servicephone group ID and the specialservice number. It ranges from 0 to40
SSNUM 10SpecialServiceNumber 10
It is a mandatory parameter, whichis an integer, ranging form 1 to2147483647. It is the special-servicenumber, such as 114. It exclusivelydefines an attendant console togetherwith the special-service traffic groupID
PNUM10 PhoneNumber 10
It is a mandatory parameterindicating the phone console numbercorresponding to the special servicephone group ID and the specialservice number. It ranges from 0 to40
For example, create the special service phone group. The Spe-cial service phone group ID is 1, the special service number is110, the phone number is 0086251100 and the special servicephone group name is SSPN1. The command is as follows:
ADD SSPN:SSPGID=1,SSPGNAME="SSPN1",SSNUM1=110,PNUM1="0086251100";
END OF STEPS
Creating the Special Service PhoneCalled Number Analysis
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The exchange ID to be configured is given.
� The number analyzer entry is created.
� The special service phone group is created.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context This topic details how to create the special service called numberanalysis.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 199
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Analyze the prefix of a called number by executing commandADD TPDNAL.
The explanation of the main parameters in command ADDTPDNAL is shown inTable 95
TABLE 95 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TPDNAL COMMAND
Parame-ter Name
ParameterDescription Instructions
ENTR Number analyzer en-try
It is a mandatory parameter,which is an integer, rangingfrom 1 to 1000. Select thecorresponding analyzer entryof the analyzed number prefix.For local calls, select the corre-sponding analyzer entry of thelocal number analyzer
DIGIT Analyzed number
It is a mandatory parameter,consisting of 0~20 digits. Inputthe prefix of the called num-ber, whose length must make itbe distinguished in the local of-fice. For intra-office calls, it isrequired to configure both theprefix of the called number andthat of the local-office roamingnumber
NAME User alias
It is an optional parameter,consisting of 0~50 characters.
It is used to specificallydescribe the called numberanalysis to make it easilyrecognized
CAT Call service typesIt is an optional parameter, se-lect LSFR (Free Special ServiceOf The Current Office)
RST1 Number analysisresult 1
Type the special servicenumber configured in ADDSSPN
For example, create the special service called number analysiswith the following requirements:
� Number analyzer entry: 1
� User alias: SS1
� Analyzed number: 110
� Call service types: LSFR
200 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 2 Access Data Configuration
� Number analysis result 1 :110
� Other parameters: Use default
The specific command is as follows.
ADD TPDNAL:ENTR=1,DIGIT="110",NAME="SS1",SPECRST=0,SPECIDX=0,CAT=LSFR,RST1=110,RST2=0,RST3=0,CHAINAL=0,RNLEN=0,MINLEN=3,MAXLEN=20,OVLYPRI=NO,REL=NO,NET=1,NAT=DEF,OPDDICONT=NO,TPDDICONT=NO,OPDDI=0,TPDDI=0,OPDLYDDI=0,TPDLYDDI=0,DDIOVERB=0,IWVIDEO=LSUP,TIMELMT=0,AUXDAS=0,A6=0,PFXLEN=0,INSRV=INM,FAXIDX=0,AVIDX=0,DVIDX=0,ADATAIDX=0,DDATAIDX=0,DDCPLAY=NONE,VAD=INVALID,CALLSERVPRILVL=INVALID,RERTS=0,INCHAIN=NO,BICT=NO,ICT=0,ICTT=10,GNM=NORMAL,STBILL=INVALID,HOPDAS=0,MCA=NO,IVVR=NO,WANTL=0,IMSCENTR=NO;
END OF STEPS
LAI and GCI/Service AreaConfigurationCreating a LAI Controlled by theLocal Office
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The exchange ID to be configured is given.
� The RNC/BSC office direction attributes are configured.
� The LAI range is set in the Resource Management system.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context This section introduces how to configure the basic information fora Location Area ID (LAI) controlled by the BSC/RNC.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute the command SET on theMML Terminal window or select a NE from the system tree tospecify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS 11 from the system tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create a LAI controlled by the local office by executing com-mand ADD LAI.
The explanation of the main parameters in command ADD LAIis shown inTable 96.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 201
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
TABLE 96 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD LAI COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
LAC Location areacode (HEX)
It is a mandatory parameter,consisting of 4 HEX digits. Itshould be consistent with thatof the RNC/BSC side
NAME Alias
It is an optional parameter,consisting of 1~50 characters.It is used to describe the LAI,such as “Adjacent BSC/RNCoffice name-LAI”
ID Location area ID
It is an optional parameter.It is used to define a LAI inthe system, ranging from1~65534. If there is no specialrequirements, enter the LAIin the cell of the BSC/RNCconnected with the MSCS
VMSCIDX Virtual MSC index
It is an optional parameter.It indicates whether theBSC/RNC connected withthe MSCS accesses theMSCS through the publicdomain. If the BSC/RNCaccesses the MSCS throughthe public domain, enter 0.Otherwise, enter the index ofthe connected virtual MSC
MCC Mobile CountryCode
It is an optional parameter,consisting of 0~3 digits. Enterit according to the actualcondition, such as 460 forChina
MNC Mobile NetworkCode
It is an optional parameter.Enter the corresponding MNCof this LAI
MSC MSC number.
It indicates which MSC theaccessed RNC/BSC belongs to.It is an optional parameter,consisting of 0~16 digits.At present, in the networkmanagement system in thedefault case, if the accessedRNC/BSC is controlled by thelocal office (i.e., the BELONGfield is MSC), no MSC numberneeds to be entered. IfVMSCIDX is 0, the systemdirectly adopts the MSCnumber from the local-officemobile data. If VMSCIDX is not0, the system directly adoptsthe corresponding virtual MSCnumber from the virtual MSCconfiguration. If the accessedRNC/BSC is not controlled by
202 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 2 Access Data Configuration
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
the local office, this parameterneeds to be entered
VLR VLR number
It indicates which VLR theaccessed RNC/BSC belongs to.It is an optional parameter,consisting of 0~16 digits.At present, in the networkmanagement system in thedefault case, if the accessedRNC/BSC is controlled bythe local office (i.e., theBELONG field is MSC), noVLR number needs to beentered. If VMSCIDX is 0, thesystem directly adopts the VLRnumber from the local-officemobile data. If VMSCIDX is not0, the system directly adoptsthe corresponding virtual VLRnumber from the virtual MSCconfiguration. If the accessedRNC/BSC is not controlled bythe local office, this parameterneeds to be entered
LOCNUM Location number
It is an optional parameter.The VLR brings the locationnumber to the HLR duringPROVIDE-SUBSCRIBER-LOCATION procedures. Entercountry code + area code,such as 8625 for Nanjing inChina
ECCIDX Emergency callindex
It is an optional parameter.Select a configured emergencycall index. If no emergencycall index is configured, select0
BSC BSC ID in the LAI
It is an optional parameter.Enter one or more adjacentBSC office IDs managingthis LAI. In case of the RANaccessing the MSCS, thereis no need to configure thisparameter
RNC RNC ID in the LAI
It is an optional parameter.Enter one or more adjacentRNC office IDs managingthis LAI. In case of the BSCaccessing the MSCS, thereis no need to configure thisparameter
TPDAS DAS for the callednumber
It is an optional parameter.Enter the originating DAS 101from the number analysisconfiguration. If no DAS isconfigured, enter 0 at first andthen modify it
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 203
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
BELONG
Belonging to,including
� NO_MSC(notbelong tolocal MSCServerdomain)
� MSC (belongto localMSC Serverdomain)
� DATTR(belong todouble homedomain)
It is an optional parameter,with MSC as the default value.If this LAI is managed bythe local office, select MSC.Otherwise, select NO_MSC. Inthis case, it is required to enterthe MSC number and VLRnumber where this LAI belongsto. IF this LAI is managed bya dual-homing domain, selectDATTR
LAIATTR
Location areaattribute,including:
� ATTBILL(Produceattempt callbill)
� NONE (none)
It is an optional parameter
WDMID Work domainindex
It is an optional parameter,with 0 as the default value.In case of dual-homingnetworking, enter thedual-homing work domainindex ranging from 0 to 255
UPVER UP mode versionof MSC-B
It is an optional parameterindicating the version No. ofthe MSC user plane where thelocation area exists
R5HOCASE
Support HO Caseof Version R5,including:
� NO
� YES
It is an optional parameterand the default value is NO. Itconfigures whether the localLAI supports the R5 handover.During 3G-to-2G handover,determine the transformmode for the handover andensure the compatibility ofthe version according to theconfiguration. That is to say,when the option is YES, thehandover is done according tothe handover reason definedin R5 version. If the optionis NO, the handover is doneaccording to the handoverreason defined in R4 version
GSMSSPGIDGSM SpecialService PhoneGroup ID
It is an optional parameterranging from 0 to 65535 andit is defined by the commandADD SSPN
204 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 2 Access Data Configuration
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
UMTSSSPGIDUMTS SpecialService PhoneGroup ID
It is an optional parameterranging from 0 to 65535. It isdefined by the command ADDSSPN
EXTINFO
Extend Info,including:
NONBCLAI(Non-BroadcastLAI in POOL)
It is an optional parameter.For the non-broadcast LAI inPOOL, the value is Null
For example, create BSC location area with the following re-quirements.
� Location area code: 12FB
� Location area identity: 201
� User alias: BSC-12FB
� Mobile country code: 460
� Mobile network code: 00
� Location number: 8625
� BSC ID in LAI: 99
� DAS for the called number: 1
� Other parameters: use default
The command is as follows:
ADD LAI:LAC="12FB",NAME="BSC-12FB",ID=201,MCC="460",MNC="00",LOCNUM="8625",ECCIDX=1,BSC="99",RNC="0",TPDAS=1,BELONG=NO_MSC,WDMID=0,UPVER=1,R5HOCASE=NO,GSMSSPGID=1,UMTSSSPGID=0,PAGEIDX=0,ASSTIMER=0;
END OF STEPS
Creating an Adjacent LAI
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The exchange ID to be configured is given.
� The LAI range is set in the Resource Management system.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context This section introduces how to create an adjacent LAI where han-dover services may occur.
When a handover occurs, the handover request message carriesthe target cell. The MSCSERVER needs to get the MSCNUM accord-ing to the LAI in the message, and judge whether the handoveroccurs within the local office. When the corresponding MSC num-ber of the LAI is different with the local MSC number, it is required
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 205
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
to initiates an inter-office handover to other MSC. Therefore, it isrequired to configure the number of the home MSC/VLR of the ad-jacent LAI belongs.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute the command SET on theMML Terminal window or select a NE from the system tree tospecify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS 11 from the system tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create an adjacent LAI by executing command ADD LAI.
The explanation of the main parameters in command ADD LAIis shown in Table 97.
TABLE 97 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD LAI COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instructions
LAC Location area code(HEX)
It is a mandatory parameter.It consists of 4 HEX digits. Itshould be consistent with thatof the RNC/BSC side
NAME Alias
It is an optional parameter,consisting of 1~50 characters.It is used to describe the LAI,such as “Adjacent BSC/RNCoffice name-LAI”
ID Location area ID
It is an optional parameter.It is used to define a LAI inthe system, ranging from1~65534. If there is nospecial requirements, enterthe LAI in the cell of theBSC/RNC connected with theMSCS
VMSCIDX Virtual MSC Index
It is an optional parameter.It indicates whether theBSC/RNC connected withthe MSCS accesses theMSCS through the publicdomain. If the BSC/RNCaccesses the MSCS throughthe public domain, enter 0.Otherwise, enter the index ofthe connected virtual MSC
MCC Mobile CountryCode
It is an optional parameter,consisting of 0~3 digits. Enterit according to the actualcondition, such as 460 forChina
MNC Mobile NetworkCode
It is an optional parameter.Enter the corresponding MNCof this LAI, such as 00 forChina Mobile, and 01 forChina Unicom
206 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 2 Access Data Configuration
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instructions
MSC MSC number
It indicates which MSC theaccessed RNC/BSC belongs to.It is an optional parameter,consisting of 0~16 digits.At present, in the networkmanagement system in thedefault case, if the connectedRNC/BSC is controlled by thelocal office (i.e., the BELONGfield is MSC), no MSC numberneeds to be entered. IfVMSCIDX is 0, the systemdirectly adopts the MSCnumber from the local-officemobile data. If VMSCIDX isnot 0, the system directlyadopts the correspondingvirtual MSC number from thevirtual MSC configuration. Ifthe accessed RNC/BSC is notcontrolled by the local office,this parameter needs to beentered. When configuringthe adjacent LAI, enter thecorresponding MSC GT of theadjacent LAI
VLR VLR number
It indicates which VLR theaccessed RNC/BSC belongs to.It is an optional parameter,consisting of 0~16 digits.At present, in the networkmanagement system in thedefault case, if the accessedRNC/BSC is controlled by thelocal office (i.e., the BELONGfield is MSC), no VLR numberneeds to be entered. IfVMSCIDX is 0, the systemdirectly adopts the VLRnumber from the local-officemobile data. If VMSCIDX isnot 0, the system directlyadopts the correspondingvirtual VLR number from thevirtual MSC configuration. Ifthe accessed RNC/BSC is notcontrolled by the local office,this parameter needs to beentered. When configuringthe adjacent LAI, enter thecorresponding VLR GT of theadjacent LAI
LOCNUM Location number
It is an optional parameter.The VLR brings the locationnumber to the HLR duringPROVIDE-SUBSCRIBER-LOCATION procedures. Entercountry code + area code,such as 8625 for Nanjing inChina
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 207
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instructions
BELONG
Belonging,including
� NO_MSC(notbelong to localMSC Serverdomain)
� MSC (belongto localMSC Serverdomain)
� DATTR(belong todouble homedomain)
It is an optional parameter,with MSC as the default value.If this LAI is managed bythe local office, select MSC.Otherwise, select NO_MSC.In this case, it is required toenter the MSC number andVLR number where this LAIbelongs to. IF this LAI ismanaged by a dual-homingdomain, select DATTR
LAIATTR
Location areaattribute,including:
� ATTBILL(Produceattempt callbill)
� NONE (none)
It is an optional parameter
WDMID Work domainindex
It is an optional parameter,with 0 as the default value.In case of dual-homingnetworking, enter thedual-homing work domainindex ranging from 0 to 255
UPVER UP mode versionof MSC-B
It is an optional parameterindicating the version No. ofthe MSC user plane where thelocation area exists
R5HOCASE
Support HO Caseof Version R5,including:
� NO
� YES
It is an optional parameterand the default value is NO. Itconfigures whether the localLAI supports the R5 handover.During 3G-to-2G handover,determine the transformmode for the handover andensure the compatibility ofthe version according to theconfiguration. That is to say,when the option is YES, thehandover is done according tothe handover reason definedin R5 version. If the optionis NO, the handover is doneaccording to the handoverreason defined in R4 version
GSMSSPGIDGSM SpecialService PhoneGroup ID
It is an optional parameterranging from 0 to 65535 andit is defined by the commandADD SSPN
208 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 2 Access Data Configuration
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instructions
UMTSSSPGIDUMTS SpecialService PhoneGroup ID
It is an optional parameterranging from 0 to 65535. It isdefined by the command ADDSSPN
EXTINFO
Extend Info,including:
NONBCLAI(Non-BroadcastLAI in POOL)
It is an optional parameter.For the non-broadcast LAI inPOOL, the value is Null
For example, create the BSC location area with the followingrequirements.
� Location area code: 1111
� Location area identity: 301
� User alias: BSC-1111
� Mobile country code: 460
� Mobile network code: 01
� Location number: 8625
� VLR number: 8613954353
� Belong type: NO_MSC
� Other parameters: use default
The command is as follows:
ADD LAI:LAC="1111",NAME="BSC-1111",ID=301,MCC="460",MNC="01",MSC="8613954353",VLR="8613954353",LOCNUM="8625",ECCIDX=0,BSC="0",RNC="0",TPDAS=0,BELONG=NO_MSC,WDMID=0,UPVER=1,R5HOCASE=NO,GSMSSPGID=0,UMTSSSPGID=0,PAGEIDX=0,ASSTIMER=0;
END OF STEPS
Creating a Global Cell
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The exchange ID to be configured is given.
� The DAS for the called number is configured.
� The BSC LAI is configured.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context When the BSC accesses the MSCS, it is required to configure theglobal cell data. When a GSM handover occurs, the handover-originated office (intra/inter-office handover) needs to know thehome BSC of the handover-terminated cell, so that it can initiatesa handover request to the BSC.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 209
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute the command SET on theMML Terminal window or select a NE from the system tree tospecify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS 11 from the system tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create a global cell by executing command ADD GCI.
The explanation of the main parameters in command ADD GCIis shown in Table 98.
TABLE 98 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD GCI COMMAND
Parame-ter Name
ParameterDescription Instructions
LAIID Location area ID
It is a mandatory parameter,ranging 1 to 65534. Select thehome LAI of the cell from the listof configured LAIs
GCI Cell Identity(hex)
It is an optional parametercomposed of GCIBEGIN (CellIdentity Begin) and GCIEND (CellIdentity End). The format of it isCIB-CIE. Configure it according tothe real conditions. It should beconsistent with that of the BSCside
TPDAS Called NumberSelector
It is an optional parameter. Itranges from 0 to 4096, witha default of 0. It may not beconfigured here. During the calldata configuration, it could bemodified and the referred valueis the number analysis selector inthe number analysis configuration
BSC BSC OfficeIt is an optional parameter, rangingfrom 0 to 3000. Select the BSCoffice that manages this cell
GCIATTR
Cell Attribute,including
NONE (none)
ATTBILL(produceattempt call bill)
It is a mandatory parameter
NAME Alias It is an optional parameter,consisting of 0~50 characters
SSPGID Special servicephone group ID
It is an optional parameter rangingfrom 0 to 65535. It is defined bythe command ADD SSPN
VMSCIDX Virtual MSCIndex
It is an optional parameter. Itranges from 0 to 65535. If 0is selected, it represents publicdomain, if 0 is not selected,
210 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 2 Access Data Configuration
Parame-ter Name
ParameterDescription Instructions
the virtual MSC index should beentered.
ECCIDX Emergency callindex
It is an optional parameter rangingfrom 0 to 65535.
For example, create the global cell with the following require-ments.
� Location area ID: 201
� Called number selector: 101
� Cell identity (Hex): 1111-1111
� BSC office ID: 99
� Alias: GCI1
� Special service phone group ID: 1
� Emergency call index: 1
� Other parameters: adopt the default value.
The command is as follows.
ADD GCI:LAIID=201,GCI="1111"-"1111",TPDAS=1,BSC=99,NAME="GCI1",SSPGID=1,ECCIDX=1;
END OF STEPS
Creating a Service Area
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The exchange ID to be configured is given.
� The RNC LAI is created.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context During the RNC access, it is required to configure the data for theservice area.
Steps 1. If the exchange is not specified, execute the command SETon the MML Terminal window or select a NE from the systemtree to specify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS 11 from the system tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create a service area with the command ADD SAI.
The parameter description of the command ADD SAI is shownin Table 99.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 211
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
TABLE 99 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD SAI COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instructions
LAIID LocationArea ID
It is a mandatory parameter rangingfrom 1 to 65534. Select the home LAIof the cell from the list of the config-ured LAIs
SAC Service AreaCode (hex)
It is a mandatory parameter com-posed of SACB (Service Area CodeBegin) and SACE (Service Area CodeEnd). The format is SACB-SACE.Configure it according to the real con-ditions. It should be consistent withthat of the RNC side
RNC RNC OfficeIt is an optional parameter rangingfrom 0 to 2048. Select the RNC officethat manages this service area
NAME Alias It is an optional parameter rangingfrom 0 to 50 characters
SSPGIDSpecial Serv-ice PhoneGroup
It is an optional parameter rangingfrom 0 to 65535 and it is defined bythe command ADD SSPN
VMSCIDX Virtual MSCIndex
It is an optional parameter rangingfrom 0 to 65535. If 0 is selected, itmeans the common domain. If it isnot 0, enter the accessed virtual MSCindex No.
ECCIDX Emergencycall index
It is an optional parameter rangingfrom 0 to 65535.
For example, create a service area identity with the followingrequirements. The is 201, the , and the is 100. For the otherparameters, select the default value. The command is as fol-lows:
� Location area ID: 201
� Service area code: 0000
� RNC office ID: 100
� Alias: SAI1
� Special service phone group: 1
� Emergency call index: 1
� Other parameters: use default
The command is as follows:
ADD SAI:LAIID=201,SAC="0000"-"0000",RNC=100,NAME="SAI1",SSPGID=1,ECCIDX=1;
END OF STEPS
212 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
C h a p t e r 3
Number Analysis DataMaking
Table of ContentsNumber Analysis ............................................................. 213Number Analysis Configuration.......................................... 218
Number AnalysisThe switch performs network addressing based on each type ofnumbers. In the mobile switch, there are two types of numbers.One type is subscriber number, including fixed subscriber numberand mobile subscriber number. The other type is network num-ber, including Mobile Station Roaming Number (MSRN), MSC/VLRnumber, HLR number, and handover number. ZXWN MSCS num-ber analysis configuration is used to determine the correspondingnetwork addressing and service processing methods of each typeof number to ensure that the switch can correctly perform signal-ing interaction and voice channel connection.
ZXWN MSCS system provides seven number analyzers: new ser-vice number analyzer, CENTREX number analyzer, private-networknumber analyzer, special-service number analyzer, local-networknumber analyzer, national toll-service number analyzer, and inter-national toll-service number analyzer. For a specified DAS, num-bers pass each type of analyzers specified by this DAS in a fixedorder. The analyzers strictly follow the following order to performnumber analysis, as shown in Figure 11.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 213
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
FIGURE 11 ANALYSIS ORDER OF NUMBER ANALYZERS
Configuration instances of common DASs and the number analysisresults are as follows:
1. DAS for pre-analyzing the called number
It is used to process special dial prefixes, including performingcall restriction, format conversion of the called number.
After an exchange receives “10193+called number” dialed bya subscriber, 10193 is deleted in this exchange, and the subse-quent routing is based on the existing traffic routing, as shownin Table 100.
TABLE 100 DAS FOR PRE-ANALYZING THE CALLED NUMBER
AnalyzerEntry Analyzed Number Analysis Result
10193 + 0 + local areacode
If call restriction isrequired, analyze it to“pre-analysis ending, andcall rejected”
If no call restriction isrequired, analyze it to“pre-analysis normallyending”, and delete“10193 + 0 + local areacode” from the changeindex of the callednumber
10193 + 0 + non-localarea code
10193 + G networknumber section
Newservicenumberanalyzer
10193 + C networknumber section
Analyze it to“pre-analysis normallyending”, and delete10193 from the changeindex of the callednumber.
Whether to add 10193 tothe called-number indexin the CDR dependson the CDR fillingrequirements on thebilling center
214 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 3 Number Analysis Data Making
2. Originating DAS: used to analyze the called number in the lo-cal-office-originated call, as shown in Table 101.
TABLE 101 ORIGINATING DAS
AnalyzerEntry Analyzed Number Analysis Result
Newservicenumberanalyzer
Charging query number Analyze it to the SSPcharging query service
Free special-servicenumber
Analyze it to thelocal-office free specialservice, pointing tothe special-servicenumber configured onthe attendant console
Corresponding attendantconsole number of thespecial-service number
Analyze it to theoutgoing free specialservice, pointing to thespecial-service circuitgroup
Short number -
Special-servicenumberanalyzer
Special-service numberof the operator
Analyze it to theoutgoing free specialservice, pointing to thespecial-service circuitgroup
Vacant number
0 All numbers are analyzedby the subsequentanalyzers
Local PSTN number
Analyze it tothe local-networkoutgoing/local-callservice, pointing tothe gateway office
Local number section ofother mobile network
Analyze it tothe local-networkoutgoing/local-callservice, pointing tothe gateway office
Non-local number sectionof other mobile network
Analyze it to theautomatic service inthe national toll region,pointing to the tandemoffice of the local province
Local-networknumberanalyzer
Number section of thelocal mobile network
Analyze it to the MSCcommon service
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 215
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
AnalyzerEntry Analyzed Number Analysis Result
Vacant number
0 All numbers are analyzedby the subsequentanalyzers
0 + Local area code +Local PSTN number
Analyze it tothe local-networkoutgoing/local-callservice, pointing tothe gateway office
Nationaltoll-servicenumberanalyzer
0 + Non-local area code
Analyze it to theautomatic service inthe national toll region,pointing to the tandemoffice of the local province
Inter-nationaltoll-serv-ice numberanalyzer
00 + Internationalnumber
Analyze it to theinternational tollautomatic service
3. Forwarding DAS: used to analyze the number to which the callis forwarded, as shown in Table 102.
TABLE 102 FORWARDING DAS
Analyzer Entry Analyzed Number Analysis Result
Vacant number
0 All numbers areanalyzed bythe subsequentanalyzers
Local PSTN number
Analyze it to thelocal-networkoutgoing/local-callservice, pointing tothe gateway office
Local numbersection of othermobile network
Analyze it to thelocal-networkoutgoing/local-callservice, pointing tothe gateway office
Non-local numbersection of othermobile network
Analyze it to theautomatic servicein the national tollregion, pointing tothe tandem office ofthe local province
Local-networknumber analyzer
216 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 3 Number Analysis Data Making
Analyzer Entry Analyzed Number Analysis Result
Number section ofthe local mobilenetwork
Analyze it to the MSCcommon service
Vacant number
0 All numbers areanalyzed bythe subsequentanalyzers
0 + Local areacode + Local PSTNnumber
Analyze it to thelocal-networkoutgoing/local-callservice, pointing tothe gateway office
National toll-servicenumber analyzer
0 + Non-local areacode
Analyze it to theautomatic servicein the national tollregion, pointing tothe tandem office ofthe local province
4. Roaming DAS: used to analyze the roaming number in the re-sponse message to the routing information query message, asshown in Table 103. It is unnecessary to analysis the CC innational roaming numbers.
TABLE 103 ROAMING DAS
Analyzer Entry Analyzed Number Analysis Result
Roaming numbersection of the localservice area in thelocal office
Analyze it to thelocal MSC service
Roaming numbersection of non-localservice area in thelocal office
Analyze it to theoutgoing service ofthe local MSC.
Note: The roamingDAS is used whenthere is no directvoice channelbetween MGWs(switched throughthe T office) in theregion networking
National otherroaming sections
Analyze it to thenational toll call
Local-networknumber analyzer
00 + Internationalnumber
Analyze it to theinternational tollautomatic service
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 217
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Number AnalysisConfigurationOverview
Description This section only introduces the basic steps of number analysis.For detailed configuration related with number analysis (includ-ing number pre-analysis, calling number analysis, and numberchange), refer to ZXWN MSCS MSC Server Number Analysis.
Data Configura-tion
The related operations of the number analysis configuration are asfollows.
Steps Operations Instructions Commands
1 Creating a numberanalyzer entry
Specify an IDfor each type ofnumber analyzers
ADD ENTR
2 Creating a DAS
The DAS is thecollection ofvarious numberanalyzer entries,specifying theorder and ruleof performingnumber analysis.
ADD DAS
3Setting the defaultDAS template ofthe local office
Set the defaultDAS templateof the localoffice meanscreating the DASused for local-office serviceprocessing.
SET LDASTMPLT
4Creating aDAS template(optional)
Create multipleDAS templates inthe dual-homingor regionalnetworking.
ADD ACRTMPLT
5 Creating the callednumbers analysis
Create numberanalysis forprefixes of callednumbers androaming numbers
ADD TPDNAL
Creating a Number Analyzer Entry
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The exchange ID to be configured is given.
218 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 3 Number Analysis Data Making
� The number analyzer entry range is set in the resource man-agement system.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Creating number analyzer entries means specifying an ID for eachtype of number analyzers.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create a number analyzer entry by executing command ADDENTR.
The explanation of the main parameters in command ADDENTR is shown in Table 104.
TABLE 104 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD ENTR COMMAND
ParameterName
Parameter Descrip-tion Instruction
ID Analyzer entry
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer, ranging from1 to 1000
NAME User aliasIt is a mandatoryparameter, consisting of0~50 characters
TYPE Analyzer entry type
It is an optionalparameter. Referto Table 105 for theconfiguration description
NTYPE
Number analysis resultunder this analyzer,including CALLED(analysis on callednumbers), CALLING(analysis on callingnumbers), FORWARD(analysis on callingnumbers during callforwarding), OPIMSI(analysis on calling IMSInumbers), TPIMSI(analysis on calledIMSI numbers), andFWDIMSI (analysis onIMSI numbers duringcall forwarding)
It is an optionalparameter, with CALLEDas the default value. Ingeneral, select CALLED
VMSCIDX Virtual MSC index
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer, rangingfrom 0 to 65535. Enterit according to theactual condition. Thedefault value is 0 (publicdomain)
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 219
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
TABLE 105 ANALYZER ENTRY TYPES
ParameterName
Parameter Descrip-tion
ConfigurationDescription
NEWSRV New service numberanalyzer
After this analyzeris configured, if thenumber is not matchedin this analyzer, it is sentto the next entry foranalysis
CENTREX CENTREX numberanalyzer
This analyzer is notconfigured
PRINET Private-network numberanalyzer
This analyzer is notconfigured
SPECSRV Special-service numberanalyzer
After this analyzeris configured, if thenumber is not matchedin this analyzer, it is issent to the next entryfor analysis
LOCAL Local-network numberanalyzer
After this analyzeris configured, if thenumber is not matchedin this analyzer, theanalysis ends
NATIONAL National toll-servicenumber analyzer
After this analyzeris configured, if thenumber is not matchedin this analyzer, theanalysis ends
INTER International toll-servicenumber analyzer
After the number isanalyzed in this analyzer,the analysis ends
Example: Create a number analyzer entry with the followingrequirements.
� Number analyzer entry ID: 1
� User alias: Entr1
� Number analyzer entry type: Local number analyzer
� Analyzed number type: Called number.
The command is:
ADD ENTR:ID=1,NAME="Entr1",TYPE=LOCAL,NTYPE=CALLED;
END OF STEPS
220 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 3 Number Analysis Data Making
Creating a DAS
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The exchange ID to be configured is given.
� The DAS range is set in the resource management system.
� The number analyzer entry is configured.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context The DAS is the collection of various number analyzer entries, spec-ifying the order and rule of performing number analysis.
Table 106 lists common DASs.
TABLE 106 COMMON DASS
ParameterName Parameter Description Configuration
Description
MS MS originatingUsed to analyze the callednumber when an MSoriginates a call
MSRN Mobile station roamingnumber
Used to analyze roamingnumbers or handovernumbers
CNG Calling number analysis Used for traffic division ofcalling numbers
LI Intercepted number Used for the interceptionfunction
PBRT Personal Back Ring Tone Used for the PBRT function
FWD Forwarding numberanalysis
Used to analyze thethird-party number towhich the call is forwarded
PREDAS Number pre-analysis
Used for the numberpre-analysis function,standardizing callednumbers, and performingcall restriction based onnumbers
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create a DAS by executing command ADD DAS.
The explanation of the main parameters in command ADDDASis shown in Table 107.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 221
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
TABLE 107 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD DAS COMMAND
ParameterName
Parameter Descrip-tion Instruction
ID DAS
It is a mandatoryparameter, which is aninteger, ranging from1 to 4096. It is theindex number of thenewly-added DAS
NAME User aliasIt is an optionalparameter, consisting of0~50 characters.
NEWSRV New service numberanalyzer entry
CENTR CENTREX numberanalyzer entry
PRINET Private-network numberanalyzer entry
SPECSRV Special-service numberanalyzer entry
LOCAL Local-network numberanalyzer entry
NATIONAL National toll-servicenumber analyzer entry
INTERInternationaltoll-service numberanalyzer entry
VMSCIDX Virtual MSC index
Enter the umberanalyzer entry IDscontained by a DAS
Example: Create a MS originating DAS with the following re-quirements.
� DAS ID: 101
� User alias: MSQH
� Local number analyzer entry: 1
� Other parameters: Adopt the default values.
The command is:
ADD DAS:ID=101,NAME="MSQH",NEWSRV=0,CENTR=0,PRINET=0,SPECSRV=0,LOCAL=1,NATIONAL=0,INTER=0;
END OF STEPS
222 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 3 Number Analysis Data Making
Setting the Default DAS Template ofthe Local Office
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The exchange ID to be configured is given.
� The DAS is configured.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context Creating the default DAS template of the local office means creat-ing the DAS used for local-office service processing.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Set the default DAS template of the local office by executingcommand SET LDASTMPLT.
The explanation of the main parameters in command SETLDASTMPLT is shown in Table 108.
TABLE 108 PARAMETERS IN THE SET LDASTMPLT COMMAND
Parame-ter Name
ParameterDescription Instruction
MS MS originatingDAS
It is an optional parameter, whichis an integer, ranging from 0to 4096. It is used to analyzethe called number when an MSoriginates a call. If the calledparty is a mobile subscriber,the MSC needs to query therouting information from thecorresponding HLR. If the calledparty is a fixed subscriber, theMSC connect the call to thecorresponding local exchange ortoll exchange according to locationof the called party
MSRN MSRN DAS
It is an optional parameter, whichis an integer, ranging from 0to 4096. It is used to analyzethe MSRN returned from theHLR, and judge whether the callbelongs to the local-office mobileservice or outgoing mobile servicebased on this number. If the callbelongs to the local-office mobileservice, this number is sent tothe corresponding module forprocessing. If the call belongs tothe outgoing mobile service, selectthe corresponding route chainfor call connection. In addition,
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 223
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Parame-ter Name
ParameterDescription Instruction
this DAS also analyzes forwardingnumbers returned from the HLR,and subscriber numbers fromother mobile office or fixed office
OR Preferredrouting DAS
It is an optional parameter, whichis an integer, ranging from 0 to4096.
When it is set that the local officesupports preferred routing in theglobal variable control system,configure this DAS for internationalroaming call and the forwardingservice
CNG Calling numberDAS
It is an optional parameter, whichis an integer, ranging from 0 to4096.
It is used to analyze the callingnumber in outgoing calls toimplement traffic division of thecalling number and calling numberchange function
LI InterceptionDAS
It is an optional parameter, whichis an integer, ranging from 0 to4096.
It is used for the interceptionservice
IP IP DAS
It is an optional parameter, whichis an integer, ranging from 0 to4096.
It is used for the IP telephoneservice
ICBCNG
Incoming callrestriction DASfor callingnumbers
It is an optional parameter, whichis an integer, ranging from 0 to4096.
It is used for the incoming callrestriction service
PBRT PBRT DAS
It is an optional parameter, whichis an integer, ranging from 0 to4096.
It is used for the PBRT service
FWD Forwarding DASIt is an optional parameter, whichis an integer, ranging from 0 to4096
FWDCNGForwardingDAS for callingnumbers
It is an optional parameter, whichis an integer, ranging from 0 to4096
CNGVIGWCalling numberDAS of virtualIGW
It is an optional parameter, whichis an integer, ranging from 0 to4096
224 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 3 Number Analysis Data Making
Parame-ter Name
ParameterDescription Instruction
FWDVIGW Forwarding DASof virtual IGW
It is an optional parameter, whichis an integer, ranging from 0 to4096
INTRAWire andwirelessintegrated DAS
It is an optional parameter, whichis an integer, ranging from 0 to4096. It is used for the functionof one number for two MSs andmixed group
ROUTCAT1
MS originatingDAS forcategory-1subscribers
It is an optional parameter, whichis an integer, ranging from 0 to4096
ROUTCAT2
MS originatingDAS forcategory-2subscribers
It is an optional parameter, whichis an integer, ranging from 0 to4096
ROUTCAT3
MS originatingDAS forcategory-3subscribers
It is an optional parameter, whichis an integer, ranging from 0 to4096
ROUTCAT4
MS originatingDAS forcategory-4subscribers
It is an optional parameter, whichis an integer, ranging from 0 to4096
ROUTCAT5
MS originatingDAS forcategory-5subscribers
It is an optional parameter, whichis an integer, ranging from 0 to4096
IMSIOP-DAS
Outgoing IMSItraffic divisionDAS
It is an optional parameter, whichis an integer, ranging from 0 to4096
OVERLAY CallingOVERLAY DAS
It is an optional parameter, whichis an integer, ranging from 0 to4096
IGWMONI-TOR
IGWinterceptionDAS
It is an optional parameter, whichis an integer, ranging from 0 to4096
SHLRSKEYSHLR servicekey conversionDAS
It is an optional parameter, whichis an integer, ranging from 0 to4096
IMSITPDAS DAS for calledIMSI
It is an optional parameter, whichis an integer, ranging from 0 to4096
IMSIFW-DAS
DAS for theIMSI of thesubscriber towhom the call isforwarded
It is an optional parameter, whichis an integer, ranging from 0 to4096
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 225
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Parame-ter Name
ParameterDescription Instruction
TESTCALL-DAS Test call DAS
It is an optional parameter, whichis an integer, ranging from 0 to4096
MRBTMulti-mediaring back toneDAS
It is an optional parameter, whichis an integer, ranging from 0 to4096
INTPRE-DAS
Internationalnumberpre-analysisDAS
It is an optional parameter, whichis an integer, ranging from 0 to4096
PREDASNumberpre-analysisDAS
It is an optional parameter, whichis an integer, ranging from 0 to1000
RE-CNCTDAS
ReconnectionDAS
It is an optional parameter, whichis an integer, ranging from 0 to4096
Example: Configure the default DAS template of the local officewith the following requirements.
� MS originating DAS: 101
� MSRN DAS: 201
� Forwarding DAS: 301.
The command is:
SET LDASTMPLT:MS=101,MSRN=201,FWD=301;
END OF STEPS
Creating a DAS Template
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The exchange ID to be configured is given.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context It is required to create multiple DAS templates in the dual-homingor regional networking.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create a DAS template by executing command ADD ACRTMPLT.
226 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 3 Number Analysis Data Making
The explanation of the main parameters in command ADDACRTMPLT is shown in Table 109.
TABLE 109 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD ACRTMPLT COMMAND
ParameterName
Parameter Descrip-tion Instruction
TMPLIDX Routing template IDIt is a mandatoryparameter, rangingfrom 1~65535
NAME User aliasIt is a mandatoryparameter, consistingof 1~50 characters
MS MS originating DAS
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer, ranging from0 to 4096
MSRN MSRN DAS
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer, ranging from0 to 4096
OR Preferred routing DAS
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer, ranging from0 to 4096
CNG Calling number DAS
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer, ranging from0 to 4096
LI Interception DAS
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer, ranging from0 to 4096
IP IP DAS
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer, ranging from0 to 4096
CBCNG Incoming call restrictionDAS for calling numbers
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer, ranging from0 to 4096
PBRT PRBT DAS
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer, ranging from0 to 4096
FWD Forwarding DAS
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer, ranging from0 to 4096
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 227
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
Parameter Descrip-tion Instruction
FWDCNG Forwarding DAS forcalling numbers
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer, ranging from0 to 4096
CNGVIGW Calling number DAS ofvirtual IGW
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer, ranging from0 to 4096
FWDVIGW Forwarding DAS ofvirtual IGW
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer, ranging from0 to 4096
INTRA Wire and wirelessintegrated DAS
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer, ranging from0 to 4096. It is usedfor the function of onenumber for two MSs andmixed group
ROUTCAT1 MS originating DAS forcategory-1 subscribers
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer, ranging from0 to 4096
ROUTCAT2 MS originating DAS forcategory-2 subscribers
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer, ranging from0 to 4096
ROUTCAT3 MS originating DAS forcategory-3 subscribers
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer, ranging from0 to 4096
ROUTCAT4 MS originating DAS forcategory-4 subscribers
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer, ranging from0 to 4096
ROUTCAT5 MS originating DAS forcategory-5 subscribers
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer, ranging from0 to 4096
IMSIOPDAS Calling IMSI numberselector
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer, ranging from0 to 4096
OVERLAY Calling OVERLAY DAS
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer, ranging from0 to 4096
228 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 3 Number Analysis Data Making
ParameterName
Parameter Descrip-tion Instruction
LIIGW IGW interception DAS
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer, ranging from0 to 4096
SHLRSKEY SHLR service key DAS
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer, ranging from0 to 4096
IMSITPDAS DAS for called IMSI
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer, ranging from0 to 4096
IMSIFWDASDAS for the IMSI of thesubscriber to whom thecall is forwarded
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer, ranging from0 to 4096
MBRT Multi-media ring backtone DAS
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer, ranging from0 to 4096
INTPREDAS International numberpre-analysis DAS
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer, ranging from0 to 4096
PREDAS Number pre-analysisDAS
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer, ranging from0 to 1000
RECNCTDAS Reconnection DAS
It is an optionalparameter, which isan integer, ranging from0 to 4096
Example: Add a DAS template with the following requirements.
� DAS template ID: 1
� User alias: VMSC1
� MS originating DAS: 101
� MSRN DAS: 201
� Preferred routing DAS: 301
� Calling number DAS: 401
� Other parameters: Adopt the default values.
The command is:
ADD ACRTMPLT:TPLIDX=1,NAME="VMSC1",MS=101,MSRN=201,OR=301,CNG=401,LI=0,IP=0,CBCNG=0,PBRT=0,CFU=0,CFUCNG=0,CFNDUB=0,CFNDUBCNG=0,CFUDUB=0,CFUDUBCNG=0,CFNRC_E=0,CFNRCCNG_E=0,CFNRC_L=0,CFNRCCNG_L=0,CFNRY=0,CFNRYCNG=0,CD
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 229
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
=0,CDCNG=0,FWD=0,FWDCNG=0,CNGVIGW=0,FWDVIGW=0,INTRA=0,ROUTCAT1=0,ROUTCAT2=0,ROUTCAT3=0,ROUTCAT4=0,ROUTCAT5=0,IMSIOPDAS=0,OVERLAY=0,LIIGW=0,SHLRSKEY=0,IMSITPDAS=0,IMSIFWDAS=0,MBRT=0,INTPREDAS=0,PREDAS=0,CFPRE=0,CFUPRE=0,NDUBPRE=0,UDUBPRE=0,CFNRCE_PRE=0,CFNRCL_PRE=0,CFNRYPRE=0,CDPRE=0,MORCPRE=0,GMSCRCPRE=0,CFRCPRE=0,MTRCPRE=0,RECNCTDAS=0,CAMELDNALIDX=0,SSDAS=0,ASCODEDAS=0;
END OF STEPS
Creating the Called Number Analysis
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
� The exchange ID to be configured is given.
� The number analyzer entry is configured.
� The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context This section introduces how to configure number analysis for pre-fixes of called numbers and roaming numbers. The called numberanalysis determines the subsequent service procedures of the call.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Analyze the prefix of a called number or roaming number byexecuting command ADD TPDNAL.
The explanation of the main parameters in command ADDTPDNAL is shown in Table 110.
TABLE 110 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TPDNAL COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
ENTR Numberanalyzer entry
It is a mandatory parameter, whichis an integer, ranging from 1 to1000. Select the correspondinganalyzer entry of the analyzednumber prefix. For local calls,select the corresponding analyzerentry of the local number analyzer
DIGIT Analyzernumber
It is a mandatory parameter,consisting of 1~20 digits. Inputthe prefix of the called number,whose length must make it bedistinguished in the local office.For intra-office calls, it is requiredto configure both the prefix of
230 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 3 Number Analysis Data Making
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
the called number and that of thelocal-office roaming number
NAME User alias
It is an optional parameter,consisting of 0~50 characters.
It is used to specifically describethe called number analysis tomake it easily recognized
SPECRST Special analysisresult rule
It is used to specify the indexnumber of the special analysisresult rule for the associated callednumber. This parameter mustbe defined by command ADDCEDSPECRL at first. Then it canbe indexed here. This parameteris configured to implement therouting service based on numberlength. When the system performsanalysis on the called number,it automatically matches theactual length of the called numberto see whether the length iswithin the range of “Specialanalysis result rule for callednumbers”. If the length is withinthe range, the system adopts therouting information in “Specialanalysis result of called numbers”.Otherwise, the system adopts therouting information in the callednumber analysis
SPECIDX Special analysisresult index
It is used to specify the indexnumber of the special analysisresult of the associated callednumber. This parameter mustbe defined by command ADDSPECRST at first. Then it canbe indexed here. This parameteris configured to implement therouting service based on numberlength. When the system performsanalysis on the called number,it automatically matches theactual length of the called numberto see whether the length iswithin the range of “Specialanalysis result rule for callednumbers”. If the length is withinthe range, the system adopts therouting information in “Specialanalysis result of called numbers”.Otherwise, the system adopts therouting information in the callednumber analysis
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 231
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
CAT
Call servicetypes, includingthe options inTable 111
It is an optional parameter. It isused to specify the service typetriggered by this number, anddetermine the direction of thiscall. The system adopts “vacantnumber” by default.
The called number of the localoffice is analyzed to MSCO (MSCcommon service). The roamingnumber of the local office isanalyzed to MSLL (MSC localservice). The roaming number ofother office is analyzed to MSLO(MSC local outgoing service)
RST1Numberanalysis result1
When the call service type isvacant number, local-networklocal-office/common service, MSClocal-network local-office service,Mobile Number Portability (MNP),or H323 call, number analysisresult 1 must be fixed to 0. Whenthe call service type is outgoingcall or toll call, number analysisresult 1 is used to specify theindex number of the outgoingroute chain.
When the call service type isequal access: CIC of theoperator where the subscriberis located or equal access:non-local-network CIC, numberanalysis result 1 is used to specifythe index number of the outgoingroute chain.
When the call service type isOVERLAY prefix incomingservice, number analysis result1 is used to specify the indexnumber of the outgoing routechain. When the call service typeis OVERLAY: CAMEL servicetriggered by MO, or OVERLAY:CAMEL service triggered by MT,number analysis result 1 is usedto specify the index number of theoutgoing route chain.
When the call service type is IPservice, IP mobile service, orindependent IP service numberanalysis result 1 is used to specifythe index number of the outgoingroute chain.
When the call service type isMNP outgoing routing numberanalysis result 1 is used to specifythe index number of the outgoingroute chain.
When the call service type isOutgoing paid special service
232 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 3 Number Analysis Data Making
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
or Outgoing free specialservice, number analysis result1 is used to specify the indexnumber of the outgoing routechain.
The above-specified index numberof the outgoing route chain mustbe defined by command ADDCHAIN at first. Then it can beindexed here.
When the call service type isMobile emergency specialservice, Local-office paidspecial service or Local-officefree special service, numberanalysis result 1 is used to specifythe special-service number. Thisparameter must be defined bycommand ADD SSPN at first.Then it can be indexed here.
When the call service type is Toneplay service, CAT_SEND_TONE,number analysis result 1 is usedto specify the ID of the tone to beplayed
RST2Numberanalysis result2
It is used to specify the indexnumber of CAMEL accesssubscription information of thecalling subscriber. This parametermust be defined by commandADD CAINFO at first. Then itcan be indexed here. When thecall service type is equal access:CIC of the operator where thesubscriber is located or “equalaccess: non-local-network CIC,this parameter must be configured.
When the call service type isOVERLAY: CAMEL servicetriggered by MO, or OVERLAY:CAMEL service triggered byMT, this parameter must beconfigured. When the call servicetype is other types except theabove-listed, number analysisresult 2 must be fixed to 0
RST3Numberanalysis result3
It is used to specify the indexnumber of CAMEL accesssubscription information of thecalled subscriber. This parametermust be defined by command ADDCAINFO at first. Then it can beindexed here.
When the call service type isOVERLAY: CAMEL servicetriggered by MO, or OVERLAY:CAMEL service triggered byMT, this parameter must beconfigured. When the call service
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 233
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
type is other types except theabove-listed, number analysisresult 3 must be fixed to 0
CHAINAL Route chaninanalysis index
It is used to specify the analysisindex number of the route chain.This parameter must be definedby command ADD CHAINAL atfirst. Then it can be indexed. Thisparameter takes effect only whenthe call service type is outgoingservice (including various outgoingservices). It priority is higher thanthat of the outgoing route chainreferred to in number analysisresult 1. Route chain analysis isan intelligent routing policy betterthan the policy of specifying asingle route chain
RNLENLength of thecarried routingnumber
When the call service type is MNPoutgoing routing, it is configuredto the length of the carried routingnumber. When the call servicetype is other types except theabove-listed, it must be fixed to 0
MINLENMinimum digitlength ofnumbers
It is an optional parameter, whichis an integer ranging from 0 to255, with a default of 3. It isused to specify the minimum digitlength of the analyzed numberrequired for call connection.
During an incoming call, if thereceived digits are shorter thanthis length, the system waitsfor the subsequent digits. If thesystem judges that there is nosubsequent digit, and the receiveddigits are shorter than this length,the system considers that thenumber format is wrong, andreleases the call.
During a local-office-originatedcall, if the received digits areshorter than this length, thesystem considers that the numberformat is wrong, and releases thecall.
For the OVERLAY prefix incomingservice, the system gets the lengthof the OVERLAY prefix accordingto the minimum digit length ofnumbers. Therefore, it is requiredto configure the minimum digitlength of numbers to the length ofthe OVERLAY prefix. Otherwise,procedures cannot be correctlyprocessed
234 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 3 Number Analysis Data Making
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
MAXLENMaximumdigit length ofnumbers
It is an optional parameter, whichis an integer ranging from 0 to255, with a default of 20. It isused to specify the maximum digitlength of the analyzed numberrequired for call connection.
During an incoming call, it isthe basis of whether to waitfor subsequent digits. If thereceived digits reach this length,the system does not wait forsubsequent digits.
During a local-office-originatedcall, if the received digits arelonger than this length, the systemdetermines whether to continue orrelease the call according to flag“No call when the called numberexceeds the length” in the optionenabling configuration. If thesystem determines to continue thecall, it cuts the exceeding digits
OVLYPRI
OVERLAYpriority,including:
NO (Nopriority):Trigger theintelligentservice basedon CSI atfirst, andthen triggerthe intelligentservice againbased onOVERLAY
HCSI (Higherthan the CSIin priority):Trigger theintelligentservice basedon OVERLAYat first, andthen triggerthe intelligentservice againbased on CSI
It is used to the priority relationshipbetween triggering the intelligentservice based on CSI and triggeringthe intelligent service based onOVERLAY. The system adopts NoPriority by default. When the callservice type is OVERLAY(CAMELservice triggered by MO), thisparameter is effective. Otherwise,this parameter is ineffective
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 235
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
REL
Voice channelrelease mode,including:
CING (callingcontrolrelease):The callingparty controlswhether torelease thecall. In thismode, whenonly the calledparty hooks on,the call still cancontinue.
CED(calledcontrolrelease):The calledparty controlswhether torelease the call.In this mode,when only thecalling partyhooks on, thecall still cancontinue.
NO (non-controlrelease): Boththe callingparty and thecalled partycan controlwhether torelease the call.In this mode,no matterwhether thecalling party orthe called partyhooks on, thecall is released
It is an optional parameter. Itindicates a resource release modewhen subscribers hook on. Ingeneral, select NO. Select CED forsuch special numbers as 110 and119
NETType of thedestinationnetwork
It is an optional parameter, witha default of 1. For calls to otheroffice in the local network, selectthe signaling network where thedestination office is located. Forintra-office calls, this option ismeaningless.
236 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 3 Number Analysis Data Making
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
NAT
Numberaddressattribute,including:DEF (defaultattribute): Donot replacethe addressattribute ofthe analyzednumber.
INT(internationalnumber):Replace theaddressattribute ofthe analyzednumber withinternationalnumber.
NAT (nationalnumber):Replace theaddressattribute ofthe analyzednumber withnational (valid)number.
LOC(localnumber):Replace theaddressattribute ofthe analyzednumber withlocal number.
UNK (attributeunknown):Replace theaddressattribute ofthe analyzednumber withunknown
It is an optional parameter. Itis used to replace the addressattribute of the analyzed number.In general, it is set to DEF, or isset according to the requirementsof the peer end
OPDDI-CONT
Transformingthe callingnumber again,including:
NO (Notallowed): It isnot allowed totransform thecalling numberagain in thesubsequent callprocedures.
It is an optional parameter. Itis used to specify whether it isallowed to transform the callingnumber again in the subsequentcall procedures when the callingnumber was already transformedonce. The system adopts NO bydefault
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 237
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
YES (allowed):It is allowed totransform thecalling numberagain in thesubsequent callprocedures.
TPDDI-CONT
Transformingthe callednumber again,including:
NO (Notallowed): It isnot allowed totransform thecalled numberagain in thesubsequent callprocedures.
YES (allowed):It is allowed totransform thecalled numberagain in thesubsequent callprocedures
It is an optional parameter. Itis used to specify whether it isallowed to transform the callednumber again in the subsequentcall procedures when the callednumber was already transformedonce. The system adopts NO bydefault
OPDDI
Calling-numberimmediatetransformindex
It is an optional parameter. Itis the number stream transformindex of the calling-numberimmediate transform. Immediatetransform immediately makes thecalling number transformed. Thisparameter must be defined bycommand ADD DDI at first. Thenit can be indexed here
TPDDI
Called-numberimmediatetransformindex
It is an optional parameter. Itis the number stream transformindex of the called-numberimmediate transform. Immediatetransform immediately makes thecalled number transformed. Thisparameter must be defined bycommand ADD DDI at first. Thenit can be indexed here
OPDLYDDICalling-numberdelay transformindex
It is an optional parameter. Itis the number stream transformindex of the calling-number delaytransform. Delay transform takeseffects in the IAM message at theoutgoing side instead of makingthe calling number transformedimmediately. This parameter mustbe defined by command ADD DDIat first. Then it can be indexedhere.
According to the IAM message atthe outgoing side, perform thecalling-number delay transform
238 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 3 Number Analysis Data Making
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
here, and then perform thecalling-number delay transform inthe number pre-analysis
TPDLYDDICalled-numberdelay transformindex
It is an optional parameter. Itis the number stream transformindex of the called-numberimmediate transform. Immediatetransform immediately makes thecalled number transformed. Thisparameter must be defined bycommand ADD DDI at first. Thenit can be indexed here
DDIOVERB
B-interfacenumbertransformindex
It is the number stream transformindex of the called number in theoutgoing call request messagebetween the MSC and the VLR. Thetransform purpose is to facilitatethe VLR judging the toll callauthority. This parameter must bedefined by command ADD DDI atfirst. Then it can be indexed here
IWVEDIO
Whether tosupport theinterworkingbetween videocalls, including:
LSUP:Local-networksubscriberssupport theinterworkingbetweenvideo calls bydefault). Thecall continues.
OSUP:Subscribers inother networkssupport theinterworkingbetween videocalls). The callcontinues.
ONSUP:Subscribersin othernetworks donot support theinterworking
It is an optional parameter. It isused to specify whether to supportthe interworking between videocalls. The default value is LSUP
TIMELMTMaximumcall duration(minute)
It is used to specify the maximumcall duration allowed for a call.When the duration of a call reachesthe maximum call duration, thesystem automatically release thecall. If it is unnecessary to restrictthe maximum call duration, adoptthe default value of 0
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 239
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
AUXDAS Assistant DAS
It is an optional parameter. Itis used to specify the DAS foranalyzing the called number againwhen the call service type isoutgoing service, and when theconnection between the local officeand the mutually-backed-up officeis broken in the mutual backupdual-homing networking. Thisparameter must be defined bycommand ADD DAS at first. Thenit can be indexed here
A6
Sending A6signal afterreceivinghow manydigits duringincoming calls
It is used to specify the numberof digits that the system receivesenough to send A6 signal to thefront office. This parameter onlytakes effect during incomingcalls using Channel AssociatedSignaling (CAS)
PFXLENToll prefix +Area codelength
It is an optional parameter, whichis an integer, ranging from 0to 15. When the call servicetype is national/international tollservice, this parameter needs tobe configured
ENOPT
Enabledoptions Referto Table 112 fordetails
It is an optional parameter.In general, select CCS7(Automatically sending thecalling number when using CCS7for outgoing services) and (No callwhen the called number exceedsthe maximum digit length)
FAXIDX Fax analysisresutl index
It is used to specify the beareranalysis result index number ofthe called number associated withthe fax service. This parametermust be defined by command ADDBEARRST at first. Then it can beindexed here. This parameteris configured to implement therouting service based on the bearercapability. For the fax service,if the associated bearer analysisresult index of the called numberis configured, the call adopts theassociated bearer analysis resultof the called number, thus flexiblerouting is implemented
240 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 3 Number Analysis Data Making
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
AVIDXAnalog videoanalysis resultindex
It is used to specify the beareranalysis result index number ofthe called number associatedwith the analog video service.This parameter must be definedby command ADD BEARRST atfirst. Then it can be indexed here.This parameter is configured toimplement the routing servicebased on the bearer capability.For the analog video service, ifthe associated bearer analysisresult index of the called numberis configured, the call adopts theassociated bearer analysis resultof the called number, thus flexiblerouting is implemented
DVIDXDigital videoanalysis resultindex
It is used to specify the beareranalysis result index number ofthe called number associatedwith the digital video service.This parameter must be definedby command ADD BEARRST atfirst. Then it can be indexed here.This parameter is configured toimplement the routing servicebased on the bearer capability.For the digital video service, ifthe associated bearer analysisresult index of the called numberis configured, the call adopts theassociated bearer analysis resultof the called number, thus flexiblerouting is implemented
ADATAIDXAnalog dataanalysis resultindex
It is used to specify the beareranalysis result index number ofthe called number associated withthe analog data service. Thisparameter must be defined bycommand ADD BEARRST at first.Then it can be indexed here.This parameter is configured toimplement the routing servicebased on the bearer capability.For the analog data service, ifthe associated bearer analysisresult index of the called numberis configured, the call adopts theassociated bearer analysis resultof the called number, thus flexiblerouting is implemented
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 241
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
DDATAIDXDigital dataanalysis resultindex
It is used to specify the beareranalysis result index number ofthe called number associatedwith the digital data service. Thisparameter must be defined bycommand ADD BEARRST at first.Then it can be indexed here.This parameter is configured toimplement the routing servicebased on the bearer capability.For the digital data service, if theassociated bearer analysis resultindex of the called number isconfigured, the call adopts theassociated bearer analysis resultof the called number, thus flexiblerouting is implemented
DDCPLAY
Whether to playthe DDC tone,including:
NONE (Notplaying theDDC tone): Itis not requiredto play the DDCtone in the localoffice.
PLAY (Playingthe DDC tone):It is requiredto play the DDCtone in the localoffice.
It is used to specify whetherto play the DDC tone in thelocal office. The system adoptsNONE by default. The purposeof configuring whether to playthe DDC tone in the numberanalysis configuration is to avoidno tone play or repeated tone playcaused by inconsistent tone playconfiguration during inter-officeDDC calls
VAD
Voice ActivityDetection(VAD) flag,including:
CLOSE: Notstarting theVAD function.OPEN: Startingthe VADfunction.INVALID: TheVAD function isinvalid
It is used to specify whether tostart the VAD function. The systemadopts INVALID by default
OPPMGWID Opposite-endMGW ID
It is used to specify between whichopposite-end MGW and the localMGW the TDM backup route isadopted. The QOSs between thelocal MGW and all opposite-endMGWs can be found throughautomatic test calls. When theQOS difference between theopposite-end MGW and the localMGW is specified, the call adoptsthe TDM backup route
242 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 3 Number Analysis Data Making
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
CALLSERV-PRILVL
Call typepriority,including:
INVALID: Thecall priority isinvalid.
HIGHEST: Thecall has thehighest priority.
HIGHER: Thecall has apriority onelevel lower thanthe highestpriority.
NORMAL:The call hasa priority onelevel lowerthan the higherpriority.
LOW: The callhas the lowestpriority
It is used to specify the callpriority. The system adoptsINVALID by default. The callpriority has two functions. Inone case, in the softswitch officein the toll softswitch network,the voice coding format can bedynamically selected according tothe call priority and the load onthe IP bearer network. In anothercase, based on the combinedinformation of office ID andpriority configured in the numberanalysis configuration, the finalpriority of a call is got to performload control
RERTS Re-routingroute chain
It is used to specify the re-routingroute chain ID. This parametermust be defined by commandADD RERTS at first. Then itcan be indexed here. When flagRRTO in enabled options takeseffect, the re-routing route chaintakes effect too. For an outgoingcall procedure, if the call fails,and the corresponding failurecause is configured with “Enablingrerouting for failure” in the R_ICPconfiguration, re-select the routefrom this route chain accordingto the re-routing route chain.For an incoming call using ISUP,TUP, or BICC signaling, whenthe call procedure is an outgoingprocedure, and the call fails beforethe IAM message is sent, there-routing route chain serves asthe standby route, and is notcontrolled by RRTO.
If route chain analysis isconfigured, the re-routingroute chain here is invalid. In thiscase, use the re-routing routechain configured in the route chainanalysis
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 243
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
INCHAIN
Inter-MGWroute chain ornot, including:
NO: Theoutgoing routechain gotfrom numberanalysis is notan inter-MGWroute chain.
YES: Theoutgoing routechain gotfrom numberanalysis isan inter-MGWroute chain
It is used to specify whether theoutgoing route chain got fromnumber analysis is an inter-MGWroute chain. The system selectNO by default. If YES is selected,the routes in the outgoing routechains will not be selected forthe outgoing route. The outgoingroute will be got after performnumber analysis again accordingto the associated called numberDAS configured in the outgoingroute chain.
This parameter is used in thefollowing cases:
One virtual outgoing route chainis got based on number analysisat first, and then the real outgoingroute is got based on the callednumber DAS associated with thevirtual outgoing route chain.
When one MSCS controls multipleareas, the outgoing route chainfacilitates subscriber management
RECMDMG-WNODEID
RecommendedMGW nodes
It is used to specify the set ofrecommended MGWs for outgoingservice. In the case of multiple IPdomains, if one MSCS managesmultiple MGWs, and these MGWsbelong to different IP domains,the set of recommended MGWsfor outgoing service needs to beconfigured. The MGW set hereshould be a sub-set of the MGWset supported by outgoing service.This parameter must be definedby command ADD TOPO at first.Then it can be indexed here
TABLE 111 CALL SERVICE TYPES
CallServiceTypes
Meanings Description
NONE Vacant number
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the procedure of processingvacant numbers
LLC
Local-network local-office/commonservice
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the local service procedure
244 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 3 Number Analysis Data Making
CallServiceTypes
Meanings Description
LOLLocal-networkoutgoing/local-call service
Indicates that the subsequentcall procedures are processedbased on the local-call serviceprocedure. The mobile-to-fixedlocal outgoing call service isusually analyzed to this type
LORU
Local-networkoutgoing/rural(network) callservice
Indicates that the subsequentcall procedures are processedbased on the local rural (network)outgoing call service procedure.The mobile-to-fixed rural outgoingcall service is usually analyzed tothis type
DWTMDomestic toll(intra-region)manual service
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the domestic toll (intra-region)manual service procedure. Ingeneral, it is not recommended toconfigure this service type
DWTA
Domestic toll(intra-region)automaticservice
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the domestic toll (intra-region)automatic service procedure. Ingeneral, it is not recommended toconfigure this service type
DBTMDomestic toll(inter-region)manual service
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the domestic toll (inter-region)manual service procedure. Ingeneral, it is not recommended toconfigure this service type
DBTA
Domestic toll(inter-region)automaticservice
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the domestic toll (inter-region)automatic service procedure. Thedomestic toll call service is usuallyanalyzed to this type
INTMInternationaltoll manualservice
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the international toll manualservice procedure. In general, itis not recommended to configurethis service type
INTAInternationaltoll automaticservice
Indicates that the subsequentcall procedures are processedbased on the international tollautomatic service procedure. Theinternational toll call service isusually analyzed to this type
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 245
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
CallServiceTypes
Meanings Description
LSPA Local-office paidspecial service
Indicates that the subsequentcall procedures are processedbased on the local-office paidspecial service procedure. Thelocal-office paid special service isusually analyzed to this type
LSFR Local-office freespecial service
Indicates that the subsequentcall procedures are processedbased on the local-office freespecial service procedure. Thelocal-office free special service isusually analyzed to this type
OUPA Outgoing paidspecial service
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the outgoing paid specialservice procedure. The outgoingpaid special service is usuallyanalyzed to this type
OUFR Outgoing freespecial service
Indicates that the subsequentcall procedures are processedbased on the outgoing free specialservice procedure. The outgoingfree special service is usuallyanalyzed to this type
DEPS Additionalservice
Indicates that the subsequentcall procedures are processedbased on the additional serviceprocedure. In general, it is notrecommended to configure thisservice type
CENTL
Intra-officecall withinthe CENTREXbusiness group
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the intra-office call procedurewithin the CENTREX businessgroup.
CENTO
Outgoing callwithin theCENTREXbusiness group
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the outgoing call procedurewithin the CENTREX businessgroup
TELCAIntelligentNtwork servicecall
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the intelligent network servicecall procedure
EQACL
Equal access:CIC of theoperator wherethe subscriber islocated
Indicates that the subsequentcall procedures are processedbased on the procedure of “Equalaccess: CIC of the operator wherethe subscriber is located”
246 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 3 Number Analysis Data Making
CallServiceTypes
Meanings Description
EQACOEqual access:non-local-network CIC
Indicates that the subsequentcall procedures are processedbased on the procedure of “Equalaccess: non-local-network CIC”
STONETone play serv-ice, CAT_SEND-_TONE
Indicates that the subsequentcall procedures are processedbased on the tone play serviceprocedure. After calling thenumber that is analyzed to thistype, the system will directly playthe tone according to the toneID configured in number analysisresult 1
DDCI Toll DDCincoming call
Indicates that the subsequentcall procedures are processedbased on the toll DDC incomingcall service procedure. The tollincoming DDC call that needs tobe routed in the local office isanalyzed to this type
DDCC Local DDC call
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the local DDC call serviceprocedure. The local DDC call(dialing the MSISDN number) thatneeds to be routed in the localoffice is analyzed to this type
DDCO Toll DDCoutgoing call
Indicates that the subsequentcall procedures are processedbased on the toll DDC outgoingcall service procedure. The tolloutgoing DDC call is analyzed tothis type
DDCCO Local DDCoutgoing call
Indicates that the subsequentcall procedures are processedbased on the local DDC outgoingcall service procedure. The localoutgoing DDC call is analyzed tothis type
MSCO MSC commonservice
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the MSC common serviceprocedure. The call (dialing theMSISDN number) that needs tobe routed in the local office isanalyzed to this type
MSLL
MSC local-networklocal-officeservice (onlyfor roamingnumbers)
Indicates that the subsequentcall procedures are processedbased on the MSC local-networklocal-office service procedure. Itis used to analyze the roamingnumbers and handover numbersof the local office
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 247
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
CallServiceTypes
Meanings Description
MSLO
MSC localoutgoingservice (onlyfor roamingnumbers)
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the local outgoing serviceprocedure. The local outgoing callof roaming numbers is analyzedto this type
CINRECalling-numberincoming callrestriction
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the calling-number incomingcall restriction procedure
MSLTE
MSC nationaltoll call (onlyfor roamingnumbers)
Indicates that the subsequentcall procedures are processedbased on the MSC national tollcall service procedure. The tolloutgoing call of roaming numbersis analyzed to this type
AACAutomaticresponsenumber
Indicates that the subsequentcall procedures are processedbased on the automatic responsenumber service procedure
OVPREOVERLAYprefix incomingservice
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the OVERLAY prefix incomingservice procedure. The OVERLAYprefix incoming call is analyzed tothis type
OVCS OVERLAY callservice
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the OVERLAY call serviceprocedure. It is used for the IGWsystem
MSITE
MSCinternationaltoll call (onlyfor roamingnumbers)
Indicates that the subsequentcall procedures are processedbased on the MSC internationaltoll call service procedure. Theinternational toll outgoing call isanalyzed to this type
IP IP fixed service
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the IP fixed service procedure.It is used for the IGW system
SSPSSP chargingand queryingservice
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the SSP charging and queryingservice procedure.
NSSPNon-SSPcharging andquerying service
Reserved
248 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 3 Number Analysis Data Making
CallServiceTypes
Meanings Description
IPMO IP mobileservice
Indicates that the subsequentcall procedures are processedbased on the IP mobile serviceprocedure. The IP service in themobile system is analyzed to thistype
INSIP
IP service dialedby intelligent-networksubscribers
Reserved
ALIP Independent IPservice
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the independent IP serviceprocedure. The independent IPincoming call is analyzed to thistype
OVMOOVERLAY:MO-triggeredCAMEL service
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the “OVERLAY: MO-triggeredCAMEL service” procedure
OVMTOVERLAY:MT-triggeredCAMEL service
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the “OVERLAY: MT-triggeredCAMEL service” procedure
MNP Mobile numberportability
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the MNP service procedure
MNPR MNP MNPoutgoing routing
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the MNP outgoing routingservice procedure
SIPO SIP outgoingcall
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the SIP outgoing call serviceprocedure
H323 H323 call
Indicates that the subsequentcall procedures are processedbased on the H323 call serviceprocedure.
MOIMCMobileemergencyspecial service
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the mobile emergency specialservice procedure
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 249
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
CallServiceTypes
Meanings Description
SSSPIndependentSSP outgoingservice
Indicates that the subsequentcall procedures are processedbased on the independent SSPoutgoing service procedure. TheSSSP (Independent SSP outgoingservice) in the analysis result ofthe called number is used for theIGW system
IGWA
IGWsupplementaryservice (only forIGW)
Indicates that the subsequentcall procedures are processedbased on the IGW supplementaryservice procedure
DASADAS service(virtual IGW)(only for IGW)
A new DAS is got through numberanalysis, which is used for thesubsequent analysis of the callednumber
OCIC Local valid CICservice
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the local valid CIC serviceprocedure. This parameter isreserved
OUPAOD
Outgoingpaid specialservice (canbe dialed bythe defaultingsubscribers)
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the outgoing paid specialservice (can be dialed by thedefaulting subscribers) procedure
LINTSLocal-officeintelligentservice
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the local-office intelligentservice procedure. It is used forthe IGW system
SHLRQSHLR queryingservice (only forIGW)
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the SHLR querying serviceprocedure
IGWCIGW commonservice (only forIGW)
Indicates that the subsequentcall procedures are processedbased on the IGW commonservice procedure. The call toPHS subscribers, which needs tobe routed in the local office, isanalyzed to this type
ISSPQ
IGWSSPcharging andquerying service(only for IGW)
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the IGW SSP charging andquerying service procedure
IGWLFIGW local-officefree specialservice
Indicates that the subsequentcall procedures are processedbased on the IGW local-office freespecial service procedure
250 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 3 Number Analysis Data Making
CallServiceTypes
Meanings Description
IGWLPIGW local-officepaid specialservice
Indicates that the subsequentcall procedures are processedbased on the IGW local-office paidspecial service procedure
IGWOVIGWOVERLAYprefix incomingservice
Indicates that the subsequentcall procedures are processedbased on the IGWOVERLAY prefixincoming service procedure
IGWDDCIN IGW toll DDCincoming call
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the IGW toll DDC incoming callservice procedure
IGWDDCL-OCAL
IGW local DDCcall
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the IGW local DDC call serviceprocedure
TEST Test call
Indicates that the subsequent callprocedures are processed basedon the test call service procedure.It is used to analyze test calls
TABLE 112 ENABLED OPTIONS
EnabledOptions Meanings Description
CCS7
Automatically sendingthe calling number whenusing CCS7 for outgoingservices
It indicates whether theoutgoing TUP signalingcarries the callingnumber. When the localoffice actively sends thecalling number, it sendsan IAI message of TUPsignaling to the peer-endoffice, carrying the callingnumber. Otherwise, thelocal office sends anIAM message of TUPsignaling to the peer-endoffice, not carryingthe calling number.For ISUP signaling, itindicates whether thelocal MSC number is filledin the location numberinformation
CHGK Changing the type ofcalling subscribers
Indicates whether toset the type of thecalling subscriber in theoutgoing IAM message ofISUP or BICC signalingto the calling subscribertypes flexibly configuredin security variables
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 251
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
EnabledOptions Meanings Description
CHGN Changing the number
Indicates that theanalyzed number ischanged, and the systemnotifies the callingsubscriber by playingthe tone
DELA Delayed dialing of thespecial service Reserved
MAIL 166-voice-mailboxservice
Indicates that the callis a 166-voice-mailboxservice
NSCP Not waiting for SCPresponses Reserved
RRTO Rerouting after outgoingfailure
For incoming callsusing ISUP, TUP, orBICC signaling, thecall procedure is anoutgoing call procedure.When the local officedoes not receives a RELmessage after sending anoutgoing IAM message tothe peer-end office, thisoption control whetherrerouting is allowed
NETF IN forward message Reserved
VNUM Virtual number Reserved
HRA High rate Reserved
NUMLEN Estimate Number Length Estimate Number Length
CEC Charge as emergencycall
Charge as emergencycall
NOLMTLEN No Limited Time LengthFor Tone
No Limited Time LengthFor Tone
IGFWD Ignore Redirection InfoIn Outgoing Call
Ignore Redirection InfoIn Outgoing Call
ECL Use Emergency Call Level Use Emergency Call Level
NTC Not triggering IN serviceof the calling number
Indicates whether thecall triggers the INservice of the callingnumber. This option isused for the case wherethe IN service of thecalling number cannotbe triggered when thecall to the IN subscriberis forwarded or whensome special numbersare dialed
252 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 3 Number Analysis Data Making
EnabledOptions Meanings Description
NCELNo call when the callednumber exceeds thelength
Indicates whether thesystem releases the callif the analyzed numberexceeds the configuredmaximum digit length
LSIN Interception numberincoming
Indicates whether thecall is an incomingcall returned from theinterception center. Thisoption is only used in theIGW system
CONSending the “connect”message in advance(only for IGW)
Indicates whether thelocal office sends aringing message of thecalled subscriber and a“connect” message tothe calling subscriberat the same time (thatis, sends a “connect”message to the callingsubscriber before thecalled subscriber answersthe call). This option isonly used in the IGWsystem
SHLRF Not triggering SHLRquery
Indicates whether thenumber section needsto be transformed inthe SHLR during callorigination. In theSHLR mixed networking,common call originationprocedures need tointeract with the SHLRto get the callinglogic number, and thecalled physical number.However, in the specificcalls, the called numberneeds no transform. Inthis case, select thisoption in the numberanalysis result. Thisoption is only used in theIGW system
SHLRG Over net number in SHLR
Indicates whether theincoming call restrainthe SHLR from returningthe IN access code. Thisoption is used to preventrepeatedly triggering INservices. This option isonly used in the IGWsystem
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 253
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
EnabledOptions Meanings Description
JUDG Needing to judge the IPresource
Indicates whether therouting query in the SHLRis forcibly performedduring IP calls. Thisoption is only used in theIGW system
REBO Restraining HOMEBOXservice
Indicates whetherincoming calls triggerthe HOMEBOX servicein the local office. Thisoption is only used in theIGW system
Example: Configure the called number analysis with the fol-lowing requirements.
� Analyzer entry: 1
� User alias: TPDNAL1
� Analyzed number: 13902099
� Call service type: MSC common service
� Other parameters: Adopt the default values.
The command is:
ADD TPDNAL:ENTR=1,DIGIT="13902099",NAME="TPDNAL1",SPECRST=0,SPECIDX=0,CAT=MSCO,RST1=0,RST2=0,RST3=0,CHAINAL=0,RNLEN=0,MINLEN=3,MAXLEN=20,OVLYPRI=HCSI,REL=NO,NET=1,NAT=DEF,OPDDICONT=NO,TPDDICONT=NO,OPDDI=0,TPDDI=0,OPDLYDDI=0,TPDLYDDI=0,DDIOVERB=0,IWVIDEO=LSUP,TIMELMT=0,AUXDAS=0,A6=0,PFXLEN=0,INSRV=INM,FAXIDX=0,AVIDX=0,DVIDX=0,ADATAIDX=0,DDATAIDX=0,DDCPLAY=NONE,VAD=INVALID,CALLSERVPRILVL=INVALID,RERTS=0,INCHAIN=NO,BICT=NO,ICT=0,ICTT=10,GNM=NORMAL,STBILL=INVALID,HOPDAS=0,MCA=NO,IVVR=NO,WANTL=0,IMSCENTR=NO;
Example: Configure the roaming number analysis of the localoffice with the following requirements.
� Analyzer entry: 1
� User alias: TPDNAL1
� Analyzed number: 15902099
� Call service type: MSC local service
� Other parameters: Adopt the default values.
The command is:
ADD TPDNAL:ENTR=1,DIGIT="15902099",NAME="TPDNAL2",SPECRST=0,SPECIDX=0,CAT=MSLL,RST1=0,RST2=0,RST3=0,CHAINAL=0,RNLEN=0,MINLEN=3,MAXLEN=20,OVLYPRI=HCSI,REL=NO,NET=1,NAT=DEF,OPDDICONT=NO,TPDDICONT=NO,OPDDI=0,TPDDI=0,OPDLYDDI=0,TPDLYDDI=0,DDIOVERB=0,IWVIDEO=LSUP,TIMELMT=0,AUXDAS=0,A6=0,PFXLEN=0,INSRV=INM,FAXID
254 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 3 Number Analysis Data Making
X=0,AVIDX=0,DVIDX=0,ADATAIDX=0,DDATAIDX=0,DDCPLAY=NONE,VAD=INVALID,CALLSERVPRILVL=INVALID,RERTS=0,INCHAIN=NO,BICT=NO,ICT=0,ICTT=10,GNM=NORMAL,STBILL=INVALID,HOPDAS=0,MCA=NO,IVVR=NO,WANTL=0,IMSCENTR=NO;
END OF STEPS
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 255
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
This page is intentionally blank.
256 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
C h a p t e r 4
Tone Configuration
Table of ContentsCreating MSCS Tones in Batches........................................ 257Creating the Fixed Tone Play Data...................................... 258Creating the Basic Service Tone Play Data........................... 265Creating the Intelligent Service Tone Play Data.................... 274
Creating MSCS Tones inBatches
Prerequisites Before the operation, it is required to confirm:
The MML Terminal window is opened.
Context The NetNumen M30 network management system provides thefunction of quickly creating tone play data in batches, avoidinglow efficiency, and the error-prone problem of the manual setting.Since most of the tones in the system have been clearly defined inthe related protocols and national standard, it is suggested to con-figure tone play data through this function in practical use. In caseof special requirements, adjust different system tones accordingto different services.
Note:
During batch deletion, delete the MGW static data first; otherwise,the system will prompt that “The tone play template No. is beingused by the MGW static data, so it cannot be deleted”.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create MSCS tones in batches. The command is BADDSTONE.
Table 113 describes the main parameters in the BADD STONEcommand.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 257
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
TABLE 113 PARAMETERS IN THE BADD STONE COMMAND
ParameterName Parameter Description Instruction
TYPE
Voice type, includes
� ALL: all configuration oftone
� ICP: tone service
� KD: the relationshipbetween the call typeand the KD
� LANGDES: languagedescription string
� MSGID: external MSGID,relation to inter servicekey
� TONEID: the servicetone ID to the protocolpackage
� TONEIN: service key andits relation to tone ID
� TONEPLAYMT: themethod of playing tones
Select itaccording to theactual condition.
Example: Create the batch processing of all the MSCS tones.The specific command is as follows.
BADD STONE:TYPE=ALL;
3. After completing the tone play data configuration on both theMSCS and the MGW, perform the dial test to check whether thesystem can correctly play tones.
END OF STEPS
Creating the Fixed TonePlay Data
Prerequisites � The NMS system works properly, and the client logs in to theserver.
� The physical data configuration is complete, and the TONE-typeMRB board is created on the MGW.
Context 1. Description of the tone play data of fixed tones on the MSCS
� ToneID: ID of a service tone in the MSCS system. TheToneID of fixed tones ranges from 1 to 99.
� Tone package type (TonePro): a parameter defined in theH.248 protocol. It is specified in the Q.1950 protocol thatthe tone packages of fixed tones are divided into two types,
258 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 4 Tone Configuration
BCG (Basic Call Progress Tones Generator with Direction-ality) and XCG (Expanded Call Progress tones GeneratorPackage). Each fixed tone must belong to one of them.
� Service tone No. in the tone package (PKGID): a parameterdefined in the H.248 protocol, used to distinguish differentservice tones in the same type of tone packages.
� In the actual configuration, perform the configuration ac-cording to the tones supported by the system.
2. Description of the tone play data of fixed tones on the MGW
� ToneID: same with that of the MSCS.
� Tone package type (TonePro): same with that of the MSCS.
� Service tone No. in the tone package (PKGID): same withthat of the MSCS.
� Frequency point: an internal ID in the MGW, associatedwith the frequency point No. in the code dot informationconfiguration. Through it, the play frequency, volume, andthe circuit type of the fixed tone can be indexed.
� Play duration: the duration of playing a part of tone at afrequency of a fixed tone. A fixed tone is played in seriesbased on the duration of each frequency. The play periodof a fixed tone equals to the sum of durations of all fre-quencies.
� Frequency: tone frequency of a fixed tone.
� Volume: volume
� Circuit type: PCM compression mode of a fixed tone, in-cluding A law and u law
� The MRB board circularly plays tones according to the con-figured duty ratio. If there is phase and amplitude saltusbetween the first dot and the last one of the code dots of thetone generated according to a special frequency f, noise willoccur when the MRB board circularly plays the tone. Thebackground generates single-frequency tones according toCOS (π×f×L)/4000, where π is the constant of circumfer-ence ratio, f is the frequency for generating fixed tones,and L is the code dot length. f×L/4000 must be an integer,so that the generated fixed tone can be circularly playedwithout interruption. Therefore, during the configuration,it is required to confirm whether to select 640 bytes or 800bytes for the fixed code dot length according to the fre-quency.
3. Brief introduction to data association
The MSCS translates the ToneID generated by the service intothe exclusive combination of TonPro and PKGID, and transfersit the MGW.
The MGW translates the exclusive combination of TonePro andPKGID into the ToneID. It gets the frequency point and playduration according to the ToneID, and then gets the actual fre-quency, volume, circuit type of the tone play according to thefrequency point.
This topic introduces how to create tone play data for a fixed tone,taking the ring back tone as an example. The fixed tone play data
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 259
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
configuration is used to implement the function of playing fixedtones.In normal cases, the fixed tone configuration data can becreated in batches. In case of special requirements, it is requiredto separately configure the fixed tone play data.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create a tone ID. The command is ADD TONEID.
Table 114 describes the main parameters in the ADD TONEIDcommand.
TABLE 114 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TONEID COMMAND FORFIXED TONES
ParameterName
ParameterDescriptions Instruction
TPLID Playback templateindex number
Numbered from 1,used in “MGW staticdata configuration(ADD MGSCFG), anddetermining the playedtones supported by theMGW
TONE Tone ID
Tone ID self-defined inZXWN, for internal use.It is usually consistentwith the internal Tone IDof the MGW. Refer to thecorresponding tone list ofthe Tone ID to configureit. The TONEID of the ringback tone is 2.
PKG
Tone package type,including:
� CG (CG package)
� CT (CT package)
� AU (AU package)
� AN (AN package)
� BCG (BCGpackage)
� XCG (XCGpackage)
� THREEGXCG(THREEGXCGpackage)
� AASB (AASBpackage)
� AASDC (AASDCpackage)
A parameter definedin the H.248 protocol,for classifying tones inthe H.248 protocol. Fordetails, see the contentsin the H.248 protocol.The tone package typeof the ring back tone isBCG (Basic Call ProgressTones Generator withDirectionality)
260 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 4 Tone Configuration
ParameterName
ParameterDescriptions Instruction
� 132 (132 package)
INPKGID Tone ID in the tonepackage
A parameter defined in theH.248 protocol, specifyingthe number of a tone inthe specific type of tonepackage. For details, seethe contents in the H.248protocol. The number ofthe ring back tone in theBCG package is 65.
ID ID Used to specify the ID ofthis service tone
URL
URL address/characterstring codecorresponded by theservice tone
Used to specify thecorresponding URLaddress of this servicetone. In general, only ANand AASB packages needto be configured.
For example, create a service tone ID with the following re-quirements.
� Tone play template index: 1
� Service tone ID: 2
� Tone package type: BCG
� Service tone No. in this tone package: 65
� ID: 2
The specific command is as follows.
ADD TONEID:TPLID=1,TONE=2,ANARSLT=EOTA,PKG=BCG,INPKGID=65,ID=2;
3. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MGW exchange with ID as 31 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=31;
4. Create a service-tone-to-protocol-tone-package configuration.The command is ADD TONEPRO.
Table 115 describes the parameters in the ADD TONEPROcommand.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 261
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
TABLE 115 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TONEPRO COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
TPROID SN
Used to define a service-tone-ID-to-protocol-tone-packageconfiguration in the system. Itis of a unified number globally,ranging from 1 to 10000.
PKGTP Package type
A parameter defined in the H.248protocol, for classifying tones inthe H.248 protocol. For details,see the contents in the H.248protocol. The tone packagetype of the ring back tone isBCG (Basic Call Progress TonesGenerator with Directionality)
TPRO
Servicetone type,correspondingto the INPKGIDparameterin the ADDTONEIDcommand onthe MSCS
A parameter defined in the H.248protocol, specifying the numberof a tone in the specific type oftone package. For details, see thecontents in the H.248 protocol.The number of the ring back tonein the BCG package is 65.
TONE Tone ID
Tone ID self-defined in ZXWN,for internal use. It is usuallyconsistent with the internal ToneID of the MSCS. Refer to thecorresponding tone list of theTone ID to configure it. TheTONEID of the ring back tone is 2.
ANSPEC Service keycode
A parameter defined in theH.248 protocol, corresponding tothe URL parameter in the ADDTONEID command on the MSCS,which does not take effect duringconfiguring fixed tones. Configureit to 1.
SKEY Service key
The internal service key in ZXWN.The fixed tones belong to basicservice tones, and the service keyis 1.
NAME AliasUsed to specifically describe theconfiguration of a service tone IDto make it easily recognized.
For example, create ring-back-tone-to-protocol-tone-packageconfiguration with the following requirements.
� ID: 1
� Package type: BCG
� Service tone ID: 2
� Service key: 1
262 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 4 Tone Configuration
� Alias: RingbackTone
The specific command is as follows.
ADD TONEPRO:TPROID=1,PKGTP=BCG,TPRO=65,TONE=2,ANSPEC="1",SKEY=1,NAME="RingbackTone";
5. Create a tone frequency. The command is ADD CODEDOTS.
Table 116 describes the parameters in the ADD CODEDOTScommand. The ring back tone includes mute and 450 Hz tone.First set the frequency and volume for the mute, and then setthe frequency point information for the 450 Hz tone.
TABLE 116 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD CODEDOTS COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
FREQ
Frequency point No..Specify the frequencyof tone play andnumber it globally
Set it according to theplan.
CDFREQ Code point frequency(Hz)
Select it according to theactual conditions.
DECIBEL Code point volume(Db)
Select it according to theactual conditions.
CTYPE Circuit type, includingA law and u law
The circuit type ofall records must beconfigured to be thesame, being A law or ulaw instead of both
CDLEN
Code point bytestream length, whichcan be 640 bytes or800 bytes
When no code pointbyte stream length isentered, the systemwill set a default valueaccording to the circuittype, 640 for A law, and800 for u law. A/u lawand code point lengthcan be specified at thesame time.
NAME Alias
Specifically describesthe language descriptionstring to make it easilyrecognized
Note:
The MRB board circularly plays tones according to the config-ured duty ratio. If there is phase and amplitude saltus betweenthe first dot and the last one of the code dots of the tone gen-erated according to a special frequency f, noise will occur whenthe MRB board circularly plays the tone.
The background generates single-frequency tones according toCOS (π×f×L)/4000, where π is the constant of circumferenceratio, f is the frequency for generating fixed tones, and L is the
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 263
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
code dot length. f×L/4000 must be an integer, so that the gen-erated fixed tone can be circularly played without interruption.
For double-frequency or multiple-frequency tones,they are generated according to COS(π×f1×L)/4000+COS(π×f2×L)/4000+…+ COS(π×fn×L)/4000. In this case, allf×L/4000s must be integers.
For example, create a frequency for the ring back tone withthe following requirements.
� Frequency No.: 9
� Code point frequency: 440 Hz and 480 Hz
� Code point volume: –16Db
� Circuit type: A law
� Code point byte stream length: 800 bytes
� Alias: RingbackTone
The specific command is as follows.
ADD CODEDOTS:FREQ=9,CDFREQ="440"&"480",DECIBEL=-16,CTYPE=A,CDLEN=800,NAME="RingbackTone";
6. Create a fixed tone. The command is ADD FIXTONE.
The ADD FIXTONE command is used to set the frequencypoint information included by the fixed tone, and the play du-ration of each frequency point. The explanation of the mainparameters is described in Table 117.
TABLE 117 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD FIXTONE COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
TONE Service Tone ID
Used to define a servicetone ID configurationin the system. Thisparameter ranges from 1to 50. and is of a unifiednumber in the entireoffice.
FRDU Frequency point andduration (in 10 ms)
Frequency point usesthe frequency point No.defined in the ADDCODEDOTS command.Configure the durationaccording to the actualconditions.
NAME Alias
Specifically describesthe language descriptionstring to make it easilyrecognized
For example, create a ring back tone with the following re-quirements.
� Service tone ID: 2
264 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 4 Tone Configuration
� Frequency point: 9-40
� Duration: 0-20
� Alias: RingbackTone.
The specific command is as follows.
ADD FIXTONE:TONE=2,FRDU="9"-"40"&"0"-"20",NAME="RingbackTone";
7. Transfer data to the foregrounds of the MSCS and the MGW.Dial a local mobile phone to test whether the ring back tone isproperly played.
END OF STEPS
Creating the Basic ServiceTone Play Data
Prerequisites � The NMS system works properly, and the client logs in to theserver.
� The physical data configuration is complete, and the TONE-typeMRB board is created on the MGW.
� Each kind of tone play requirement and the corresponding re-lationship between basic tones in the version are planned wellin the local office.
Context 1. Description of the tone-play data of basic service tones on theMSCS
� ErrCode: When a service fails, the system will exclusivelyidentify the service failure according to the ErrCode, whichis the initial condition of the basic service tone play. TheMSCS confirm the ToneID based on the above information.
� ToneID: ID of a service tone in the MSCS system. TheToneID of fixed tones ranges from 100 to 200.
� Tone package type (TonePro): a parameter defined in theH.248 protocol. It is specified in the H.248.7 protocol thatthe tone package type of basic service is “an”.
� Service tone No. in the tone package (PKGID): a parameterdefined in the H.248 protocol, used to distinguish differentservice tones in the same type of tone packages. For theallocation of PKGID, refer to the H.248 protocol.
� Language type: language type of service tones, such asEnglish, Chinese, first Chinese and then English.
� Play duration: tone play period.
� Play times: times of playing tones.
� Play interval: interval between two times of playing tones.
� Notify that the tone play is complete: Whether to notify theMSCS after tone play.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 265
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
2. Description of the tone-play data of basic service tones on theMGW
� ToneID: ID of a service tone in the MGW system. TheToneID of fixed tones ranges from 100 to 200.
� Tone package type (TonePro): same with that of the MSCS.
� Service tone No. in the tone package (PKGID): same withthat of the MSCS.
� Language type: same with that of the MSCS.
� Play duration: same with that of the MSCS.
� Play times: same with that of the MSCS.
� Play interval: same with that of the MSCS.
� Notify that the play is complete: same with that of theMSCS.
� Service key: The ZXWN system defines an ID for each ser-vice. The tone play types for different services are differ-ent. The service key of the basic services is fixed as 1. Theservice key of each tone subunit is configured in the net-work management system, determining the service tonetype of the tone subunit.
� Fixed tone elements and variable tone elements: In thesame service, tone elements are used to distinguish differ-ent tones. After finding the subunit of the tone resource,the system can play the tone on the subunit according tofixed tone elements and variable tone elements.
� Unit No.: associated with the unit No. of the MRB board inthe physical configuration in the ZXWN network manage-ment system, and used to address the MRB board playingthe tone during the tone play.
� Subunit No.: associated with the subunit No. of the MRBboard in the physical configuration in the ZXWN networkmanagement system. The subunits of the MRB board canbe configured to TONE, DTMF, and MFC. Only the subunitof TONE type can be used to play tones. The service keyof each subunit of TONE type should be configured on thenetwork management system.
3. Brief introduction to data association
The MSCS translates the ErrCode generated by the service pro-cessing module into the ToneID. Then it translates the ToneIDinto the exclusive combination of TonePro and URL, and trans-lates the language type, play method, and other parametersof the basic services at the same time. It transfers TonePro,URL, language type, and the play method to the MGW.
The MGW translates the exclusive combination of TonePro andURL into the ToneID and the service key, translates the lan-guage type to that on the MGW, and saves the play method.It gets the tone element component (fixed tone elements andvariable tone elements) according to the ToneID and the lan-guage type, and gets the tone unit No. and the subunit No.according to service key 1 of the basic services.
The basic service tone play data configuration is used to implementthe function that the system automatically plays the related tone
266 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 4 Tone Configuration
when a basic call service fails. For example, the system plays theinvalid number tone when a subscriber dials an incorrect number,and ringing-time-out tone when the called subscriber makes noreply for a long time. In normal cases, the basic service toneplay data can be created in batches. This topic introduces how toconfigure the tone play data for a basic tone, taking the vacantnumber tone as an example.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create a voice service. The command is ADD TONESRV.
Table 118 describes the parameters in the ADD TONESRVcommand.
TABLE 118 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TONESRV COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
FAILCODE Tone play cause
Enter it according to theerror code returned bythe service processingmodule.
ANARSLT
Analysis result,including:
� EOTA: Endanalysis
� CONT: Numberanalyzedsubsequently
Select it according to theactual conditions.
TONE Tone ID
Tone ID self-defined inZXWN, for internal use.It is usually consistentwith the internal Tone IDof the MGW.
SRVTAG
Service tag providedin the call failurecode, including:
� TONESIG(Sending tonesignal betweenoffices): Sendingtone signal to thecalling side.
� ACKSIG(Sending thecalled-party-answering signalto the callingside): Sendingfalse answering
It is an optionalparameter, which is ofenumeration type, with adefault of TONESIG.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 267
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
signal to thecalling side.
� PLAYFLG:Meaning whetherto set the toneplay duration andtimes accordingto the servicetones.
NAME AliasSpecifically describes thevoice service to make iteasily recognized
ITERR Iteration times
It is used to specify thetimes of this failure toneto be played repeatedly,with a default of 0. It isinvalid to the fixed failuretone.
DURATION Playback duration (s)
It is used to specifythe play duration ofthis failure tone, with adefault of 0.
For example, create a vacant-number-tone service with thefollowing requirements.
� Call failure code: 4005
� Analysis result: end of tone analysis
� Service tone ID: 101
� Service tag provided to subscribers in the call failure code:TONESIG
� Alias: "Invalid Number Tone"
� Play times of failure tones: 5
� Play duration of failure tones: 10 seconds
The specific command is as follows.
ADD TONESRV:FAILCODE=4005,ANARSLT=EOTA,TONE=101,SRVTAG="TONESIG",ITERR=5,DURATION=10;
3. Create a tone ID. The command is ADD TONEID.
Table 119 describes the parameters in the ADD TONEID com-mand.
268 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 4 Tone Configuration
TABLE 119 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TONEID COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
TPLID Playback templateindex number
Numbered from 1, usedin “MGW static dataconfiguration (ADDMGSCFG), and determiningthe played tones supportedby the MGW
ANARSLT
Analysis result,including:
� EOTA: Endanalysis
� CONT: Numberanalyzedsubsequently
Select it according to theactual conditions.
TONE Tone ID
Tone ID self-defined inZXWN, for internal use. It isusually consistent with theinternal Tone ID of the MGW.Refer to the correspondingtone list of the Tone ID toconfigure it.
PKG
Tone package type,including:
� CG (CG package)
� CT (CT package)
� AU (AU package)
� AN (AN package)
� BCG (BCGpackage)
� XCG (XCGpackage)
� THREEGXCG(THREEGXCGpackage)
� AASB (AASBpackage)
� AASDC (AASDCpackage)
� 132 (132package)
A parameter defined inthe H.248 protocol, forclassifying tones in theH.248 protocol. For details,see the contents in theH.248 protocol.
INPKGID Tone ID in the tonepackage
This parameter is invalid forbasic service tones.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 269
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
ID ID Used to specify the ID of thisservice tone
URL
URL address/char-acter string codecorresponded by theservice tone
Used to specify thecorresponding URL addressof this service tone. Ingeneral, only AN andAASB packages need to beconfigured.
For example, create an ID for the vacant number with the fol-lowing requirements.
� ToneID: 101
� Analysis result: end of tone analysis
� Tone package type: AN
� Corresponding URL: cmcc_bs_101
The specific command is as follows.
ADD TONEID:TPLID=1,TONE=101,ANARSLT=EOTA,PKG=AN,INPKGID=101,ID=101,URL="cmcc_bs_101",NAME="Invalid Number Tone";
4. Create the play method for service tones. The command isADD TONEPLAYMT.
Table 120 describes the parameters in the ADD TONEPLAYMTcommand.
TABLE 120 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TONEPLAYMT COMMANDFOR BASIC SERVICE TONES
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
SRVKEY Service key The basic service key is TRDT.
LANG Language type
Selected according to theactual requirements. Forexample 4097 (First Chineseand then English)
ITERR Iteration timesSelect it according to theactual requirement, such as 5times.
DURATION Playbackduration(s)
Select it according to theactual requirement, such as15 seconds.
CMP
Notify that the toneplay is complete,indicating whetherto notify the MSCSafter tone play
Selected according to theactual requirements. For thevacant number tone, it isrequired to set “notifying theMSCS after tone play”.
270 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 4 Tone Configuration
For example, create a tone play method for the vacant numbertone with the following requirements.
� Service key: traditional service TDRT
� Language type: 4097 (First Chinese then English)
� Tone play times: 5
� Tone play duration: 15 seconds.
The specific command is as follows.
ADD TONEPLAYMT:SRVKEY=TRDT,LANG=4097,ITERR=5,DURATION=15,INTERVAL=1,CMP=YES;
5. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MGW exchange with ID as 31 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=31;
6. Create a service-tone-to-protocol-tone-package configuration.The command is ADD TONEPRO.
Table 121 describes the parameters in the ADD TONEPROcommand.
TABLE 121 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TONEPRO COMMAND
ParameterName
Parameter Descrip-tion Instruction
PKGTP
Service tone type,corresponding to thePKG parameter inthe ADD TONEIDcommand on the MSCS
A parameter definedin the H.248 protocol,for classifying tones inthe H.248 protocol. Fordetails, see the contentsin the H.248 protocol.
TPRO Service tone type in theprotocol
This parameter is invalidfor basic service tones.Configure it to 1.
TONE Tone ID
Tone ID self-defined inZXWN, for internal use.It is usually consistentwith the internal ToneID of the MSCS. Refer tothe corresponding tonelist of the Tone ID toconfigure it.
ANSPEC Service tone number inthe protocol
A parameter definedin the H.248 protocol,corresponding to theURL parameter in theADD TONEID commandon the MSCS.
SKEY Service keyAn internal service key.The service key of thebasic service tones is 1.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 271
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
For example, create the vacant-number-ToneID-to-protocoltone package configuration.
� ToneID: 101
� Tone packet type: AN
� Corresponding URL: cmcc_bs_101.
The specific command is as follows.
ADD TONEPRO:TPROID=24,PKGTP=AN,TPRO=1,TONE=101,ANSPEC="cmcc_bs_101",SKEY=1,NAME="InvalidNumber Tone";
7. Create the tone-language comparison configuration. The com-mand is ADD LANGSTR.
Table 122 describes the parameters in the ADD LANGSTRcommand.
TABLE 122 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD LANGSTR COMMAND
Parame-ter Name
ParameterDescription Instruction
LGSTR Language Descriptor
Kept to be consistent with theLANG parameter in the ADDTONEPLAYMT command,and analyzing the languagecharacter string.
LG1 Language 1
Configured according to theactual situation, such as Eng,where language 1 is ENG(English)
LG2 Language 2 Configured according to theactual situation
LG3 Language 3 Configured according to theactual situation
LG4 Language 4 Configured according to theactual situation
LG5 Language 5 Configured according to theactual situation
For example, create the vacant-number-tone-language com-parison configuration with the following requirements.
� Language descriptor: Eng
� Language 1: English
The specific command is as follows.
ADD LANGSTR:LGSTR="EN",LG1=Eng,LG2=INVALID,LG3=INVALID,LG4=INVALID,LG5=INVALID,NAME="InvalidNumber Tone";
8. Create a tone ID and tone element composition configuration.The command is ADD TONELIST.
Table 123 describes the parameters in the ADD TONELISTcommand.
272 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 4 Tone Configuration
TABLE 123 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TONELIST COMMAND
Parame-ter Name
ParameterDescription Instruction
TONE Tone ID Enter the ToneID, which is 101 forthe vacant number tone.
LANG Language type Enter the language type of theservice tone (EN)
KIND Tone type Select Exclu for the vacant numbertone
For example, create composition of the vacant number toneIDand tone element, and add the English tone element compo-nents of the vacant number tone. The specific command is asfollows.
ADD TONELIST:TONE=101,LANG=Eng,KIND=Exclu,ST1=0,ST2=0,ST3=0,ST4=0,ST5=0,VTP1=Invalid,VTP2=Invalid,VTP3=Invalid,VTP4=Invalid,VTP5=Invalid,CD1=65535,CD2=65535,CD3=65535,CD4=65535,CD5=65535,CD6=65535,NAME="Invalid Number Tone";
9. Create a service key configuration on the tone board. The com-mand is ADD TONESVC.
Table 124 describes the parameters in the ADD TONESVCcommand.
TABLE 124 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TONESVC COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
UNIT MRB unit No. Enter the MRB unit No.
SUNIT Tone subunit No. inthe MRB
Enter the tone subunitNo.
SKEY1 Service key Enter basic service key 1
SKEY2 Service key Enter basic service key 2
SKEY3 Service key Enter basic service key 3
SKEY4 Service key Enter basic service key 4
SKEY5 Service key Enter basic service key 5
SKEY6 Service key Enter basic service key 6
For example, create the service key configuration on the toneboard in the MGW office with the following requirements. Con-figure service key 1 of the basic services on the TONE subunitof the MRB board. The specific command is as follows.
ADD TONESVC:UNIT=221,SUNIT=9,SKEY1=1,SKEY2=0,SKEY3=0,SKEY4=0,SKEY5=0,SKEY6=0;
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 273
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
10. Transfer data to the foregrounds of the MSCS and the MGW.Dial a local mobile phone to test whether the ring back tone isproperly played.
END OF STEPS
Creating the IntelligentService Tone Play Data
Prerequisites � The NMS system works properly, and the client logs in to theserver.
� The physical data configuration is complete, and the TONE-typeMRB board is created on the MGW.
� The MTP interconnection data configuration and the SCCP dataconfiguration with the SCP are complete.
� The service keys and EMIDs are planned together with the SCP.
Context 1. Description of the tone-play data of basic service tones on theMSCS
� External EMID: A tone parameter in PA operations, whichcan exclusively identify the contents and the language typeof the tone to be played between the SCP and the MSCS.This parameter is determined by the SCP, and sent to theSSP.
� Internal EMID: the EMID defined by ZTE. Its coding stan-dard is shown in Figure 12.
FIGURE 12 CODING STANDARD OF THE INTERNAL EMID
� External service key: The service key delivered by theSCP. It is contained in the EMID, which consists of the 8most significant bits in the internal EMID.
� Internal service key: IDs of different intelligent servicein ZTE, which is the highest in the internal EMID code.
Other parameters are the same with those of the basic ser-vice tone play.
2. The intelligent service tone play data on the MGW are the samewith the basic service tone play data on the MGW.
3. Brief introduction to data association
274 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 4 Tone Configuration
The MSCS translates the external EMID sent from the SCP intothe internal EMID, and finds the external service key, languagetype, and the record notification No. according to the EMID.Then it translates the external service key into the internalservice key, and gets the play method of the corresponding in-telligent service tone. It gets ToneID according to the servicetone notification No. and the service key, translates the ToneIDinto the exclusive combination of TonePro and URL, and trans-lates the language type, play method, and other parametersof the intelligent services at the same time. Then it transfersthe TonePro, URL, language type, and the play method to theMGW.
The intelligent service tone play procedure of the MGW is thesame with the basic service tone play procedure of the MGW.The MGW translates the exclusive combination of TonePro andURL into the ToneID and the service key, translates the lan-guage type to that on the MGW, and saves the play method.It gets the tone element components (fixed tone elements andvariable tone elements) according to the ToneID and the lan-guage type, and gets the tone unit No. and the subunit No.according to service key of the intelligent services.
The intelligent service tone play data configuration is used to en-able the ZXWN CS equipment to play intelligent service tones,complete the SRF function, and implement the function that thesystem can play the related intelligent service tone based on theEMID sent from the SCP. This topic introduces how to configurethe tone play data for the intelligent service.
Steps 1. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MSCS exchange with ID as 11 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=11;
2. Create MSGID conversion. The command is ADD EMIDTRF.
Table 125 explains the parameters in the ADD EMIDTRF com-mand.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 275
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
TABLE 125 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD EMIDTRIF COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
EMID ID of external message Used to specify theEMID to be converted
SRVKEY Service key
Used to specify theexternal service key towhich the EMID is to beconverted
MID Code in the service key
Used to specify theradio access modeapplied to the handoverpolicy
LANG
Language type,including:
� MIXED: indicatesthat the languagetype is mixed tone.
� MANDARIN:indicates thelanguage type ismandarin.
� EN: indicates thelanguage type isEnglish.
� LOCAL: indicatesthe language typeis local language
Select it according tothe actual condition.
Tip:
MSGID (MSGID conversion) can be added in batches throughDev Configuration > Tone Configuration > Tone BatchOperation > Batch Create MSCS Tone (BADD STONE) onthe MML Terminal window.
For example, create MSGID conversion with the following re-quirements.
� External message ID: 201
� Service key: 1
� Code in the service key: 1
� Language type: English.
The specific command is as follows.
ADD EMIDTRF:EMID=201,SRVKEY=1,MID=1,LANG=EN;
3. Create the interconnection conversion for service keys. Thecommand is ADD SVRTRANSKEY.
Table 126 describes the parameters in the ADD SVRTRANSKEY command.
276 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 4 Tone Configuration
TABLE 126 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD SVRTRANSKEYCOMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
EXSVCKEY External service keycoding
Specifies the code of anexternal service key
SVCKEY Service Key Codes Specifies a service keycode in the system
NAME Alias
Specifically describesthe service keyinterconnectionconversion to makeit easily recognized
ID IDDefines the servicekey interconnectionconversion in the system
SCPTYPE SCP type Used to specify the SCPtype
SVCKEYDES Service keydescription
Used to specificallydescribe thecorresponding servicekey to make it easilyrecognized
For example, create the service key interconnection conversionwith the following requirements.
� External service key No.: 11
� Service key No.: PPS service
� Alias: "PPS service"
� Configuration ID: 1
� SCP type: 0
The specific command is as follows.
ADD SVRTRANSKEY:EXSVCKEY=10,SVCKEY=PPS,NAME="PPS Service",ID=1,SCPTYPE=0;
4. Create service-key-to-service-tone-ID configuration. Thecommand is ADD TONEIN.
Table 127 describes the parameters in the ADD TONEIN com-mand.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 277
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
TABLE 127 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TONEIN COMMAND
ParameterName
Parameter Descrip-tion Instruction
SVCKEY Service Key Codes Specifies a service keycode in the system
MID The code in the servicekey
Specifies the code ofthe service tone in thecorresponding servicekey
ANARSLT
Analysis result,including:
� EOTA: End analysis
� CONT: Numberanalyzedsubsequently
Select it according tothe actual conditions.
TONEID Tone ID Used to specify the IDof the service tone
ID ID
Used to definethe service keyinterconnectionconversion in thesystem
NAME Alias
Used to specificallydescribe the servicekey interconnectionconversion to make iteasily recognized
For example, create service-key-to-service-tone-ID conversionconfiguration with the following requirements.
� Service key codes: PPS service
� Code in the service key: 1
� Analysis result: end of tone analysis
� Service tone ID: 201
� The No. is tone 20001.
The specific command is as follows.
ADD TONEIN:SRVKEY=PPS,ANARSLT=EOTA,MID=1,TONEID=201,ID=20001;
5. Create a tone ID. The command is ADD TONEID. Configurethe ToneID, the corresponding protocol tone package type, andthe corresponding URL of the service tone.
Table 128 describes the parameters in the ADD TONEID com-mand. This step of configuration mainly aims to configure thetone play method for the intelligent service on the MSCS.
278 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 4 Tone Configuration
TABLE 128 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TONEID COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
TPLID Playback templateindex number
Numbered from 1,used in “MGW staticdata configuration(ADD MGSCFG), anddetermining the playedtones supported by theMGW
TONE Tone ID
Tone ID self-defined inZXWN, for internal use.It is usually consistentwith the internal Tone IDof the MGW. Refer to thecorresponding tone list ofthe Tone ID to configure it.
PKG
Tone package type,including:
� CG (CG package)
� CT (CT package)
� AU (AU package)
� AN (AN package)
� BCG (BCGpackage)
� XCG (XCGpackage)
� THREEGXCG(THREEGXCGpackage)
� AASB (AASBpackage)
� AASDC (AASDCpackage)
� 132 (132package)
A parameter definedin the H.248 protocol,for classifying tones inthe H.248 protocol. Fordetails, see the contentsin the H.248 protocol.
INPKGID Tone ID in the tonepackage
A parameter defined in theH.248 protocol, specifyingthe number of a tone inthe specific type of tonepackage. For details, seethe contents in the H.248protocol.
URL
URL address/char-acter string codecorresponded by theservice tone
Used to indicate thecorresponding URLaddress of the servicetone. In general, only ANand AASB packages needto be configured.
6. Create the play method for service tones. The command isADD TONEPLAYMT.
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 279
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Table 129 describes the parameters in the ADD TONEPLAYMTcommand. This step of configuration mainly aims to configurethe tone play method for the intelligent service on the MSCS.
TABLE 129 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TONEPLAYMT COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
SRVKEY Service key Select it according to theactual requirement.
LANG Language type
Selected according to theactual requirements. Forexample 4097 (FirstChinese and then English)
ITERR Iteration timesSelect it according to theactual requirement, such as5 times.
DURATION Playback durationSelect it according to theactual requirement, such as15 seconds.
CMP
Notify that the toneplay is complete,indicating whetherto notify the MSCSafter tone play
Select it according to theactual requirement.
7. Create the language description string. The command is ADDLANGDES.
Table 130 explains the parameters in the ADD LANGDES com-mand. This step of configuration mainly aims to configure thelanguage translation data on the MSCS.
TABLE 130 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD LANGDES COMMAND
ParameterName
ParameterDescription Instruction
TPLID Language templateNo.
Used to specify the templateNo. of the languagedescription string
LANG Language type Used to specify the languagetype
LANGDES Languagedescription string
Used to specify thecorresponding descriptionstring of the language type
NAME Alias
Used to specifically describethe language descriptionstring to make it easilyrecognized
For example, create a language description string with the fol-lowing requirements.
280 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Chapter 4 Tone Configuration
� Language template No.: 1
� Language type: 2
� Language description string: en
The specific command is as follows.
ADD LANGDES:TPLID=1,LANG=2,LANGDES="en";
8. If no exchange is specified, execute command SET on theMMLTerminal window or select a NE from the system tree to spec-ify the exchange to be configured.
Example: Select the MGW exchange with ID as 31 from thesystem tree.
SET:NEID=31;
9. The data configuration procedure of the MGW is the same withthat of the basic service tone on the MGW.
END OF STEPS
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 281
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
This page is intentionally blank.
282 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Figure
Figure 1 Networking Between MSCS and MGW........................ 2
Figure 2 SIGTRAN CONFIGURATION FLOW............................23
Figure 3 CONFIGURATION FLOW..........................................36
Figure 4 Typical Networking Between the ZXWN CS and the
HLR .................................................................45
Figure 5 Typical Networking Between the ZXWN CS and the
STP .................................................................69
Figure 6 Networking Between the ZXWN CS and the SCP ........86
Figure 7 Networking Between ZXWN CS and SMC ................ 104
Figure 8 Interconnection between ZXWN MSCS and
PSTN/MSC ...................................................... 112
Figure 9 Networking with BSC ........................................... 137
Figure 10 Networking Between MGW and RNC..................... 168
Figure 11 ANALYSIS ORDER OF NUMBER ANALYZERS ........... 214
Figure 12 Coding Standard of the Internal EMID .................. 274
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 283
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
This page is intentionally blank.
284 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Table
Table 1 Data Collection Table................................................ 2
Table 2 Configuration Flow ................................................... 3
Table 3 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD IP ADDRESS COMMAND .... 4
Table 4 INTERFACE REAL INTERFACE................................... 5
Table 5 ADD IP ADDRESS REAL INTERFACE ......................... 6
Table 6 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD IP ROUTE COMMAND ........ 7
Table 7 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD ADJOFC COMMAND ..........10
Table 8 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD CODECTPL COMMAND ......14
Table 9 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TOPO COMMAND..............16
Table 10 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD MGWBEARMOD
COMMAND........................................................20
Table 11 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD SCTPCONN COMMAND....24
Table 12 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD ASP COMMAND ..............28
Table 13 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD AS COMMAND ................29
Table 14 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD M3UART COMMAND........32
Table 15 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD SIOLOCAS COMMAND.....34
Table 16 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD MGCSCFG COMMAND......37
Table 17 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD MGSTPL COMMAND ........39
Table 18 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD MGSCFG COMMAND........40
Table 19 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TIDANL COMMAND.........42
Table 20 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TIDENTR COMMAND.......44
Table 21 MSCS-HLR Interconnection Data Collection...............45
Table 22 Data for Interconnection with the HLR .....................46
Table 23 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD ADJOFC COMMAND ........47
Table 24 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD N7LKS COMMAND ..........49
Table 25 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD N7LNKE1 COMMAND ......51
Table 26 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD N7ROUTE COMMAND......54
Table 27 ARRANGEMENT MODE OF SIGNALING SETS..............55
Table 28 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD N7OFC COMMAND ..........56
Table 29 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD IMSIANA COMMAND ......58
Table 30 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD GTT COMMAND ..............60
Table 31 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD GT COMMAND ................64
Table 32 SSN ....................................................................67
Table 33 MSCS-STP Data Collection......................................70
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 285
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Table 34 MSCS-STP Data Configuration Flow .........................70
Table 35 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD ADJOFC COMMAND ........71
Table 36 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD N7LKS COMMAND ..........73
Table 37 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD N7LNKE1 COMMAND ......75
Table 38 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD N7ROUTE COMMAND......78
Table 39 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD N7OFC COMMAND ..........80
Table 40 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD GT COMMAND ................82
Table 41 Data Collection Table .............................................86
Table 42 MSCS-SCP Data Configuration Flow .........................87
Table 43 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD N7SSN COMMAND..........88
Table 44 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD GT COMMAND ................89
Table 45 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD CAMEL COMMAND ..........93
Table 46 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD CAINFO COMMAND ........95
Table 47 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TPDNAL COMMAND ........97
Table 48 Internal Service Keys .......................................... 100
Table 49 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD SVRTRANSKEY
COMMAND...................................................... 101
Table 50 Service Key Codes .............................................. 101
Table 51 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TONESVC COMMAND .... 103
Table 52 Data Collection Table ........................................... 105
Table 53 Data Configuration Flow of SMC Adjacent Office ...... 105
Table 54 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD GT COMMAND .............. 106
Table 55 Data for Interconnection with the MGW.................. 112
Table 56 Data for Interconnection with the PSTN/MSC Office .. 112
Table 57 Configuration Flow of PSTN/2G MSC Adjacent Office
Data .............................................................. 113
Table 58 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD ADJOFC COMMAND ...... 114
Table 59 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TG DT COMMAND ......... 115
Table 60 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD SPCM COMMAND.......... 119
Table 61 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD RT COMMAND .............. 121
Table 62 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD RTS COMMAND ............ 123
Table 63 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD CHAIN COMMAND ........ 124
Table 64 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD SCTPCONN COMMAND .. 127
Table 65 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD ASP COMMAND ............ 129
Table 66 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD AS COMMAND .............. 131
Table 67 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD M3UART COMMAND...... 134
Table 68 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD SIOLOCAS COMMAND... 135
Table 69 Data for Interconnection with the MGW.................. 138
Table 70 Data for Interconnection with the BSC ................... 138
Table 71 BSC Adjacent Office Data Configuration Flow .......... 138
286 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Tables
Table 72 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD ADJOFC COMMAND ...... 140
Table 73 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD BSCOFC COMMAND ...... 144
Table 74 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TOPO COMMAND.......... 146
Table 75 MAIN PARAMETERS IN THE ADD RNCMGWTOPO
COMMAND...................................................... 149
Table 76 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TG DT COMMAND ......... 151
Table 77 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD SPCM COMMAND.......... 158
Table 78 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD SCTPCONN COMMAND .. 159
Table 79 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD ASP COMMAND ............ 162
Table 80 AS Parameters.................................................... 163
Table 81 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD M3UART COMMAND...... 165
Table 82 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD SIOLOCAS COMMAND... 167
Table 83 Data for Interconnection with the MGW.................. 169
Table 84 Data for Interconnection with the RNC ................... 169
Table 85 RNC Adjacent Office Data Configuration Flow .......... 170
Table 86 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD ADJOFC COMMAND ...... 171
Table 87 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD RNCOFC COMMAND...... 175
Table 88 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TOPO COMMAND.......... 178
Table 89 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD RNCMGWTOPO
COMMAND...................................................... 182
Table 90 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TG ATM COMMAND....... 184
Table 91 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD SPCM COMMAND.......... 190
Table 92 Access Configuration Flow .................................... 193
Table 93 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD ECC COMMAND............. 194
Table 94 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD SSPN COMMAND .......... 196
Table 95 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TPDNAL COMMAND ...... 200
Table 96 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD LAI COMMAND ............. 202
Table 97 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD LAI COMMAND ............. 206
Table 98 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD GCI COMMAND............. 210
Table 99 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD SAI COMMAND............. 212
Table 100 DAS FOR PRE-ANALYZING THE CALLED NUMBER ... 214
Table 101 ORIGINATING DAS ............................................ 215
Table 102 FORWARDING DAS............................................ 216
Table 103 ROAMING DAS.................................................. 217
Table 104 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD ENTR COMMAND ........ 219
Table 105 ANALYZER ENTRY TYPES .................................... 220
Table 106 COMMON DASS................................................. 221
Table 107 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD DAS COMMAND .......... 222
Table 108 PARAMETERS IN THE SET LDASTMPLT
COMMAND...................................................... 223
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 287
ZXWN MSCS Common Configuration Operation Guide
Table 109 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD ACRTMPLT
COMMAND...................................................... 227
Table 110 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TPDNAL COMMAND .... 230
Table 111 CALL SERVICE TYPES......................................... 244
Table 112 ENABLED OPTIONS............................................ 251
Table 113 PARAMETERS IN THE BADD STONE COMMAND .... 258
Table 114 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TONEID COMMAND
FOR FIXED TONES ........................................... 260
Table 115 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TONEPRO COMMAND .. 262
Table 116 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD CODEDOTS
COMMAND...................................................... 263
Table 117 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD FIXTONE COMMAND... 264
Table 118 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TONESRV COMMAND .. 267
Table 119 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TONEID COMMAND..... 269
Table 120 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TONEPLAYMT
COMMAND FOR BASIC SERVICE TONES .............. 270
Table 121 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TONEPRO COMMAND .. 271
Table 122 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD LANGSTR COMMAND .. 272
Table 123 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TONELIST COMMAND .. 273
Table 124 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TONESVC COMMAND .. 273
Table 125 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD EMIDTRIF COMMAND .. 276
Table 126 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD SVRTRANSKEY
COMMAND...................................................... 277
Table 127 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TONEIN COMMAND .... 278
Table 128 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TONEID COMMAND..... 279
Table 129 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD TONEPLAYMT
COMMAND...................................................... 280
Table 130 PARAMETERS IN THE ADD LANGDES COMMAND .. 280
288 Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION
Index
DData configuration ....... 2,45, 59, 69, 71, 86–87,93, 104–105, 112, 135,137–138, 168–169, 258,260, 265–266, 269,274–275, 279, 281
GGT translationselector .................. 59,62–63, 68, 81, 85, 87,89, 92, 106, 110
HHandover ................. 46,63, 81, 193, 276
NNetworking mode ..... 104, 168Number section........ 158, 190
OOutgoing route.........113,121–124
PPhysical configura-tion .......... 76, 126, 159, 266
SSignaling link ............ 70,73–79, 105, 169Signaling point ............ 2,45–48, 59, 70, 72, 86,88, 105, 112, 114, 138,166–167, 169Signaling route.......... 70,78–80, 87, 105
Confidential and Proprietary Information of ZTE CORPORATION 289